Siemens SINAMICS G120X Operating Instructions Manual Download Page 323

Page: 323 / 1148

&DYLWDWLRQSURWHFWLRQHQDEOH

3,'6FDOHG

IHHGEDFN>@

6WDWXVZRUGELW3,'PLQLPXPOLPLWUHDFKHG

6WDWXVZRUGELW3,'PD[LPXP

OLPLWUHDFKHG

6WDWXVZRUGELW3,'LQYHUWHUUXQQLQJ

&DYLWDWLRQSURWHFWLRQGHOD\

3,'HQDEOHGLVDEOH

&DYLWDWLRQSURWHFWLRQWKUHVKROG

7ULJJHUZDUQLQJ$

7ULJJHUIDXOW)

&DYLWDWLRQSURWHFWLRQGLVDEOHG

>V@

ุ

Parameters

Number

Name

Factory setting

p29625

Cavitation protection enable

p29626

Cavitation protection threshold

40%

p29627

Cavitation protection time

30 s

For more information about the parameters, see Chapter "Parameters (Page 467)".

Advanced commissioning

6.4 Pump control

SINAMICS G120X converter

Operating Instructions, 06/2019, FW V1.01, A5E44751209B AC

321

Summary of Contents for SINAMICS G120X

Page 1: ...Operating instructions Infrastructure converter for HVAC water wastewater 06 2019 Edition SINAMICS G120X SINAMICS www siemens com drives ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...1 01 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC Fundamental safety instructions 1 Description 2 Mounting 3 Wiring 4 Commissioning 5 Advanced commissioning 6 Parameters 7 Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 Warnings faults and system messages 9 Corrective maintenance 10 Technical data 11 Appendix A ...

Page 4: ...ersonnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers...

Page 5: ...dv dt filter plus VPL 39 2 6 7 Push through mounting kit 41 2 6 8 Mounting grips for push through mounted converters 44 2 6 9 IP21 top cover 44 2 6 10 Mounting kit for line side cable connection left FSH only 45 2 6 11 I O Extension Module 45 2 6 12 Operator panel 47 2 6 13 SINAMICS G120 Smart Access 48 2 7 Motors and multi motor drives that can be operated 49 3 Mounting 51 3 1 Installing the labe...

Page 6: ... 99 4 2 1 Overview of the interfaces 99 4 2 2 Fieldbus interface allocation 100 4 2 3 Terminal strips 101 4 2 4 Terminals strips for I O Extension Module 103 4 2 5 Factory interface settings 105 4 2 6 Default setting of the interfaces macros 107 4 2 7 Additional digital inputs and digital outputs on converters FSH and FSJ 126 4 2 8 Safe Torque Off safety function 128 4 2 9 Application examples for...

Page 7: ...181 6 3 Drive control 182 6 3 1 Sequence control when switching the motor on and off 182 6 3 2 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strips 186 6 3 2 1 Digital inputs 188 6 3 2 2 Analog input as digital input 191 6 3 2 3 Digital outputs 193 6 3 2 4 Analog inputs 196 6 3 2 5 Adjusting characteristics for analog input 199 6 3 2 6 Setting the deadband 200 6 3 2 7 Analog outputs 202 6 3 2 8 Adjust...

Page 8: ...ameters for setting communication via BACnet 277 6 3 7 5 Supported services and objects 279 6 3 7 6 Acyclic communication general parameter access via BACnet 288 6 3 8 Jogging 290 6 3 9 Switching over the drive control command data set 292 6 3 10 Selecting physical units 294 6 3 10 1 Motor standard 294 6 3 10 2 Unit system 294 6 3 10 3 Technological unit of the technology controller 295 6 3 11 Saf...

Page 9: ...ontrol 391 6 7 3 1 Structure of vector control without encoder sensorless 391 6 7 3 2 Optimizing the speed controller 396 6 7 4 Electrically braking the motor 398 6 7 4 1 DC braking 400 6 7 4 2 Compound braking 402 6 7 5 Pulse frequency wobbling 403 6 8 Drive protection 404 6 8 1 Overcurrent protection 404 6 8 2 Converter protection using temperature monitoring 406 6 8 3 Motor protection with temp...

Page 10: ...mended memory cards 940 8 1 2 Saving setting on a memory card 940 8 1 2 1 Automatic backup 941 8 1 2 2 Manual backup 942 8 1 3 Transferring the setting from the memory card 942 8 1 3 1 Automatic transfer 942 8 1 3 2 Manually transferring 943 8 1 4 Safely remove the memory card 944 8 1 5 Message for a memory card that is not inserted 945 8 2 Operator panel 946 8 2 1 Backup using the operator panel ...

Page 11: ...wngrade 1073 10 3 1 Preparing the memory card 1074 10 3 2 Upgrading the firmware 1075 10 3 3 Firmware downgrade 1077 10 3 4 Correcting an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade 1079 10 4 Reduced acceptance test after component replacement and firmware change 1080 11 Technical data 1081 11 1 Technical data of inputs and outputs 1081 11 2 Load cycles and overload capability 1084 11 3 General con...

Page 12: ...gory C1 1104 11 8 3 4 Current harmonics of individual devices 1104 11 8 3 5 Harmonics at the power supply connection point acc to IEC 61000 2 2 1106 11 8 3 6 Harmonics at the power supply connection point acc to IEEE 519 1106 11 9 Protecting persons from electromagnetic fields 1108 A Appendix 1109 A 1 Manuals and technical support 1109 A 1 1 Overview of the manuals 1109 A 1 2 Configuring support 1...

Page 13: ...ll other dangerous energy sources e g compressed air hydraulic systems or water Switch the energy sources to a safe state 8 Check that the correct drive system is completely locked After you have completed the work restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence WARNING Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance Excessively low short circuit c...

Page 14: ...ble regulations WARNING Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply exposed components may carry a hazardous voltage Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death Only use power supplies that provide SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage or PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage output voltages for all connection...

Page 15: ...s injury Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no voltage condition and start work NOTICE Property damage due to loose power connections Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections This can result in damage due to fire device defects or malfunctions Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque Check all power connections a...

Page 16: ...t app only on equipment that has already been switched off NOTICE Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages When operated on systems with grounded line conductor or in the event of a ground fault in the IT system the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage to ground If you use motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line conductors you ...

Page 17: ...devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the manufacturer and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the system machine WARNING Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions Inactive or non adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that may result in serious injury or death Observe the...

Page 18: ...hanged parameter settings As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization machines can malfunction which in turn can lead to injuries or death Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures e g emergency stop or emergency off Fundamental safety instructions 1 1 General safety instructions SINAMICS G120X converter 16 Operating ...

Page 19: ...send electronic components modules or devices in their original packaging or in other suitable materials e g conductive foam rubber of aluminum foil Only touch components modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the following methods Wearing an ESD wrist strap Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring Only place electronic components modules or devi...

Page 20: ...only intended to provide support for typical tasks As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are operated correctly Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe handling when using installing operating and maintaining the equipment Fundamental safety instructions 1 3 Warranty and liability for application examples SINAMICS G120X co...

Page 21: ...rk segmentation are in place For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented please visit Industrial security https www siemens com industrialsecurity Siemens products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they become available and that only the latest product ...

Page 22: ...or the installation or machine Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with suitable protection measures e g virus scanners On completion of commissioning check all security related settings Protect the drive against unauthorized changes by activating the Know how p...

Page 23: ...tc can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions caused by for example Component failure Software errors Operation and or environmental conditions outside the specification External influences damage 3 Hazardous shock voltages caused by for example Component failure Influence during electrostatic charging Induction of voltages in moving motors Operation and or environmental co...

Page 24: ...Fundamental safety instructions 1 5 Residual risks of power drive systems SINAMICS G120X converter 22 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 25: ...n compiled in such a way that it is sufficient for all standard applications and enables drives to be commissioned as efficiently as possible Where it appears useful additional information for entry level personnel has been added The operating instructions also contain information about special applications Since it is assumed that readers already have a sound technical knowledge of how to configu...

Page 26: ...ument contains recommendations relating to third party products Siemens accepts the fundamental suitability of these third party products You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third party products Use of OpenSSL This product contains software developed in the OpenSSL project for use within the OpenSSL toolkit This produc...

Page 27: ...trol terminals One set of shield connection kit for the Power Module available for FSA to FSG only One set of shield connection kit for the Control Unit available for FSD to FSG only Compact Installation Instructions in German and English A printed full size drill pattern available for FSD to FSG only which allows the easy drilling of the necessary mounting holes The converter contains open source...

Page 28: ...Q 0RGXOH LHOGEXV 866 0RGEXV 578 LHOGEXV 352 1 7 WKHUQHW 3 LHOGEXV 352 86 LOWHU LOWHU QYLURQPHQW FODVV QYLURQPHQW FODVV 5DWHG RXWSXW SRZHU N KS UDPH VL H 5DWHG RXWSXW FXUUHQW DVHG RQ D ORZ RYHUORDG UWLFOH QXPEHU LWK ILOWHU LWKRXW ILOWHU LWKRXW RSHUDWRU SDQHO LWK 2SHUDWRU 3DQHO 23 LWK 2SHUDWRU 3DQHO 23 N KS 9 9 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Description 2 3 Scope of delivery SINAMICS G120X converter 26 Operating Ins...

Page 29: ...QPHQW FODVV LWKRXW RSHUDWRU SDQHO LWK 2SHUDWRU 3DQHO 23 LWK 2SHUDWRU 3DQHO 23 LWKRXW 2 WHQVLRQ 0RGXOH LWK 2 WHQVLRQ 0RGXOH LHOGEXV 866 0RGEXV 578 LHOGEXV 352 1 7 WKHUQH 3 LHOGEXV 352 86 LOWHU LOWHU RU V VWHPV DFFRUGLQJ WR 8 9 9 Q D 9 9 6 6 Q D 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Q D 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 N KS Description 2 3 Scope of delivery SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Inst...

Page 30: ... number Degree of protection Motor data Figure 2 1 Example for a rating plate You will find the rating plate at the side of the converter Description 2 3 Scope of delivery SINAMICS G120X converter 28 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 31: ...ices RoHS European EMC Directive The compliance of the converter with the regulations of the Directive 2014 30 EU has been demonstrated by full compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 EMC requirements for South Korea The converters with the KC marking on the rating plate satisfy the EMC requirements for South Korea Underwriters Laboratories North American market Converters provided with one of the test...

Page 32: ... Integrated http support automation siemens com WW view en 22339653 134200 Certificates for products that were certified by UL http database ul com cgi bin XYV template LISEXT 1FRAME index html Certificates for products that were certified by TÜV SÜD https www tuev sued de industrie_konsumprodukte zertifikatsdatenbank Standards that are not relevant China Compulsory Certification The converters do...

Page 33: ...r old device please contact a company certified for the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment and dispose of the old device as prescribed in the respective country of use Description 2 5 Device disposal SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 31 ...

Page 34: ... 6 1 External line filter With a line filter the converter achieves a higher radio interference class The converters of frame sizes FSA to FSF are available with and without integrated line filter The converters of frame sizes FSG to FSJ are available with integrated line filter only External line filters are available as optional components for the converters FSA to FSF without integrated filters...

Page 35: ... link chokes line reactors are thus not required A line reactor is needed for high short circuit power levels partly to protect the actual converter against excessive harmonic currents and thus against overload and partly to limit line harmonics to the permitted values The harmonic currents are limited by the total inductance comprising the line reactor and mains supply cable inductance Line react...

Page 36: ...for RSC is less than that in the above table This is the case when the converter as shown in the following figure is connected to the line through a transformer with the appropriate rating Note A line reactor is always needed if a line filter is used 0DLQ VXSSO FDEOH LQGXFWDQFH RQQHFWLRQ SRLQW RI WKH WUDQVIRUPHU RQQHFWLRQ SRLQW RI WKH FRQYHUWHU LQH RQYHUWHU 6N OLQH 6N 6WUDQVI 8N WUDQVI In this cas...

Page 37: ...converter fulfills the IEEE 519 standards If you use a line harmonics filter you do not need a line reactor or a line filter When using the line harmonics filter observe the following restrictions The permissible line voltage is 380 V 415 V 3 AC 10 The operating frequency is 50 Hz For technical details refer to the following link Line harmonics filter https www schaffner com products download prod...

Page 38: ...er of the line harmonics filter is not exceeded you may operate several convertors FSA on a common line harmonics filter Special restrictions for converter FSG When connecting 400 V converter FSG with line harmonics filters parameter p1300 must be set to 20 For converter FSG with line harmonics filter operation is only permissible in the vector control mode It is not permissible for U f mode to be...

Page 39: ...230 Activate the output reactor during commissioning according to the electric specifications Article number Converter frame size Rated power kW Output reactor 400 V converters FSD 18 5 6SL3202 0AE23 8CA0 22 37 6SE6400 3TC07 5ED0 FSE 45 55 6SE6400 3TC14 5FD0 FSF 75 90 110 6SL3000 2BE32 1AA0 132 6SL3000 2BE32 6AA0 FSG 160 6SL3000 2BE33 2AA0 200 6SL3000 2BE33 8AA0 250 6SL3000 2BE35 0AA0 FSH 315 6SL3...

Page 40: ...onnected directly to the mains Maximum permissible motor cable length Page 82 When using sine wave filters observe the following restrictions For rated power up to 90 kW the pulse frequency should not exceed 8 kHz for rated power above 90 kW the pulse frequency should be 4 kHz The maximum permissible output frequency is 150 Hz NOTICE Damage to the sine wave filter if it is not activated during com...

Page 41: ... dt filter and a voltage peak limiter VPL dv dt filter plus VPL are available to suppress voltage peaks and enable longer motor cables to be connected Maximum permissible motor cable length Page 82 When using the dv dt filter plus VPL observe the following restrictions The maximum output frequency is 150 Hz The maximum pulse frequency is 4 kHz NOTICE Damage to the dv dt filter plus VPL if it is no...

Page 42: ...3 0HB 22 30 JTA TEF1203 0JB 37 JTA TEF1203 0KB FSE 45 55 JTA TEF1203 0LB FSF 75 90 132 JTA TEF1203 0MB FSG 160 250 6SL3000 2DE35 0AA0 FSH 315 400 6SL3000 2DE38 4AA0 FSJ 450 560 6SL3000 2DE41 4AA0 690 V converters FSD 3 18 5 JTA TEF1203 0GB 22 37 JTA TEF1203 0HB FSE 45 55 JTA TEF1203 0JB FSF 75 90 JTA TEF1203 0KB 110 132 JTA TEF1203 0LB FSG 160 250 JTA TEF1203 0MB FSH 315 400 6SL3000 2DH35 8AA0 450...

Page 43: ...Cover the back side of the converter sufficiently with a metallic cover or a separate metallic air duct or similar Article number Converter frame size Article number FSA 6SL3261 6GA00 0BA0 FSB 6SL3261 6GB00 0BA0 FSC 6SL3261 6GC00 0BA0 FSD 6SL3261 6GD00 0BA0 FSE 6SL3261 6GE00 0BA0 FSF 6SL3261 6GF00 0BA0 FSG 6SL3261 6GG00 0BA0 Mounting the converter with the push through mounting kit The push throug...

Page 44: ... screws FSA FSB 6 M6 2 5 Nm FSC 6 M6 3 Nm step You have correctly installed the converter with the push through mounting kit Procedure FSD FSG 1 Prepare a cutout and holes in the control cabinet panel for the push through mounting kit Dimension drawings and drill patterns Page 64 2 Fix the top and bottom frames bearing TOP and BOTTOM marks respectively to the converter using screws FSD FSE 8 M5 3 ...

Page 45: ...kit Mounting the shield connection kit for the Power Module push through mounted FSD FSG The push through mounting kits for converters of frame sizes FSD to FSG provide separate shielding plates for the power connections In order to connect the line supply and motor cable shields for a push through mounted converter FSD to FSG you must use the shielding plate provided in the push through mounting ...

Page 46: ...9 2 6 9 IP21 top cover Overview The optional IP21 top cover provides extra protection for the converter The IP21 top cover is mounted above the converter and includes the necessary seals to ensure compliance with degree of protection IP21 Mounting Mounting instructions Mount the IP21 top cover on the control cabinet panel using two screws Mount the IP21 top cover right above the converter so that ...

Page 47: ...t The converter can then be installed higher in the control cabinet allowing more efficient use of the available cabinet space In many cases use of this installation kit also helps in the implementation of effective cabinet cooling For converters of frame size FSJ the line supply cables can only be connected from the top Article number 6SL3366 1LH00 0PA0 2 6 11 I O Extension Module The SINAMICS G1...

Page 48: ...e front cover DFN YLHZ URQW YLHZ Interface to an operator panel or SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Switch for AI 2 temperature current 7HPS Terminal strip X202 Hole for fixing screw Terminal strips X203 and X204 Interface to converter Description 2 6 Optional components SINAMICS G120X converter 46 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 49: ...e module with the pro vided M3 screw You have now mounted the I O Extension Module Note The SINAMICS G120X I O Extension Module does not support the mounting in the door of a control cabinet Wiring the terminal strips For more information on wiring the terminal strips refer to the following chapters Terminal strips Page 101 Wiring the terminal strips Page 139 2 6 12 Operator panel An operator pane...

Page 50: ...3256 0AP00 0JA0 2 6 13 SINAMICS G120 Smart Access The SINAMICS G120 Smart Access is a Wi Fi based Web server module and an engineering tool It has been designed for quick commissioning parameterization and maintenance of the converters Article number 6SL3255 0AA00 5AA0 FAQ https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109765499 Description 2 6 Optional components SINAMICS G120X converter 48 Ope...

Page 51: ...tion is provided on the Internet Requirements for third party motors https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 79690594 Permissible power of standard induction motors The following standard induction motors are permissible without restriction 400 V converter Motor power in the range of 25 to 150 of the converter power 690 V converter Motor power in the range of 50 to 125 of the converter po...

Page 52: ...Description 2 7 Motors and multi motor drives that can be operated SINAMICS G120X converter 50 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 53: ...r North America The converter is supplied with an adhesive label with danger and warning notes for the North American market Attach the adhesive label in the required language to the inside of the control cabinet where it is clearly visible at all times SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 51 ...

Page 54: ...WHU QYHUWHU 2XWSXW UHDFWRU RQWURO FDELQHW LQH VXSSO ULYHQ PDFKLQH Figure 3 2 Example of the EMC zones of a plant or machine Inside the control cabinet Zone A Line supply connection Zone B Power electronics Devices in Zone B generate energy rich electromagnetic fields Zone C Control and sensors Devices in Zone C do not generate any energy rich electromagnetic fields themselves but their functions c...

Page 55: ...ood electrical connection Mount the control cabinet components on a bare metal mounting plate Connect the mounting plate to the control cabinet frame and PE bar and shield support through a large surface area to establish a good electrical connection For screw connections onto painted or anodized surfaces establish a good conductive contact using one of the following methods Use special serrated c...

Page 56: ... EMC compliant installation is available in the Internet EMC installation guideline http support automation siemens com WW view en 60612658 3 2 2 Cables Cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference are connected to the converter Cables with a high level of interference Cable between the line filter and converter Motor cable Cable at the converter DC link con...

Page 57: ...iated equipotential bonding cables parallel and close to one another Twist incoming and outgoing unshielded individual conductors Alternatively you can route incoming and outgoing conductors in parallel but close to one another Ground any unused conductors of signal and data cables at both ends Signal and data cables must only enter the cabinet from one side e g from below Using shielded cables fo...

Page 58: ...G 7RRWKHG WDSH RVH FODPS Figure 3 5 Examples for EMC compliant shield support Attach the shield to the shield support directly after the cable enters the cabinet Do not interrupt the shield Only use metallic or metallized plug connectors for shielded data cables 3 2 3 Electromechanical components Surge voltage protection circuit Connect surge voltage protection circuits to the following components...

Page 59: ...of the individual components Δ T Permissible temperature rise in the control cabinet Ensure that the control cabinet is appropriately ventilated and equipped with suitable air filters Ensure that the components maintain the specified clearances with respect to one another Ensure that the components are provided with adequate cooling air through the cooling openings Use appropriate air barriers to ...

Page 60: ...cessary in extreme cases when the cooling air temperature reaches the maximum ambient temperature of the converter RROLQJ DLU IORZ RROLQJ DLU IORZ LU EDUULHU LU EDUULHU Mounting 3 3 Power losses and air cooling requirements SINAMICS G120X converter 58 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 61: ...stall it away from potential water hazards for example do not install it beneath pipes that are subject to condensation Avoid installing it where excessive humidity and condensation may occur Keep the device within the maximum and minimum operating temperatures At temperatures 40 C and installation altitudes 1000 m the devices must be derated Ensure that the correct level of ventilation and air fl...

Page 62: ...0 C is specified the cable cross section must also be rated according to 60 C When connecting a cable with a higher rated temperature e g 90 C you must determine the cable cross section as if the cable had a rated temperature of 60 C WARNING Risk of explosion or spread of fire from built in devices Short circuits in the converter or its components may cause explosion or fire in the control cabinet...

Page 63: ... and drill patterns Overview The converters are designed to be mounted in accordance with the dimension drawings in a cabinet using screws nuts and washers Note To comply with EMC specifications it is recommended to mount the converter on an electrically conductive mounting panel in the cabinet This mounting panel should be connected to the cabinet PE Mounting 3 4 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G...

Page 64: ... 1 100 3 9 0 3 FSB 275 10 8 383 15 1 100 3 9 209 8 2 9 0 4 7 0 3 27 1 1 1 80 3 1 100 3 9 0 3 FSC 295 11 6 423 16 7 140 5 5 209 8 2 9 0 4 7 0 3 27 1 1 1 80 3 1 100 3 9 0 3 FSD 472 18 6 625 24 6 200 7 9 239 9 4 9 0 4 7 0 3 27 1 1 1 300 11 8 350 13 8 0 3 FSE 551 21 7 729 28 7 275 10 8 239 9 4 9 0 4 7 0 3 27 1 1 1 300 11 8 350 13 8 0 3 FSF 709 27 9 969 38 1 305 12 360 14 2 9 0 4 7 0 3 27 1 1 1 300 11 ...

Page 65: ...aximum surrounding air temperature during operation of 50 C in case of the surrounding air temperature higher than 50 C a lateral clearance of 50 mm or greater is required Drill patterns mm in Table 3 1 FSA FSG Drill pattern Dimensions FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF FSG A 55 2 2 80 3 2 118 4 6 170 6 7 230 9 1 270 10 6 265 10 4 B 221 5 8 7 265 10 4 283 11 1 430 16 9 509 20 0 680 26 8 970 5 38 2 Ø 5 0 2 5 ...

Page 66: ...3 3 4 2 2 Mounting the converter utilizing push through technology FSA to FSG only Use the optional mounting kit to mount a converter in push through technology in a control cabinet Mounting instructions are provided in the following section Push through mounting kit Page 41 The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale Panel thickness of the control cabinet 3 5 mm Mounti...

Page 67: ... 15 1 279 10 9 153 6 0 66 2 6 FSC 192 7 6 407 16 0 295 11 6 154 6 1 65 2 5 FSD 271 10 6 647 25 5 514 20 2 142 5 6 98 3 9 FSE 360 14 2 773 30 4 600 23 6 145 5 7 93 3 7 FSF 396 15 6 1003 39 5 749 29 5 185 7 3 185 7 3 FSG 384 15 1 1275 50 2 1026 40 4 184 7 2 188 7 4 Mounting 3 4 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 65 ...

Page 68: ...26 6 M6 2 5 22 1 FSC 170 5 6 7 120 5 4 7 296 11 6 149 5 9 32 1 26 6 5 0 26 6 M6 3 26 6 FSD 246 9 7 235 9 3 241 9 5 497 19 6 216 8 5 10 5 0 4 7 0 3 6 M5 6 53 1 FSE 323 12 7 275 10 8 281 11 1 588 23 292 11 5 19 0 7 7 0 3 6 M5 6 53 1 FSF 350 13 8 220 8 7 250 9 8 226 8 9 731 28 8 324 12 8 20 5 0 8 10 0 4 8 M8 25 221 3 FSG 350 13 8 328 12 9 330 13 328 12 9 1015 40 324 12 8 14 6 0 6 10 11 0 4 8 M8 4 M10...

Page 69: ...s available for converters FSD to FSG only Attach the shielding plate to the bottom of the Control Unit and use a cross tip screwdriver PZ to tighten the screw to fix it onto the converter 0 1P OEI LQ Mounting the shield connection kit for the Power Module FSA FSC Procedure 1 Remove the two screws and two U clamps from the bottom of the converter 2 Mount the two U clamps with the two screws on the...

Page 70: ...ter has an integrated line filter mount the EMC connecting bracket additionally a Slide the EMC connecting bracket into the converter so that it is held in the converter by the clamping spring The EMC connecting bracket is positioned correctly if you feel some resistance when pulling it out from the converter b Having ensured that it is positioned correctly fasten the EMC connecting bracket in pla...

Page 71: ...onverter and fasten it in place using six screws 3 If the converter has an integrated line filter mount the EMC connecting bracket additionally by fastening it to the shielding plate with four screws 1P OEI LQ 1P OEI LQ 1P OEI LQ You have now mounted the shield connection kit 3 4 4 Additional mounting instructions for FSD FSJ 3 4 4 1 Additional mounting instructions FSD FSG When mounting the conve...

Page 72: ...ppropriate hoisting gear when mounting the converters on the cabinet panel 6 6 6 For push through mounted converters Use the hoisting gear shown below when mounting the converters utilizing push through technology Mounting 3 4 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120X converter 70 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 73: ...ounting grips to mount the push through mounted converters without hoisting gear Install the four mounting grips as shown below Mounting 3 4 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 71 ...

Page 74: ...rs FSH and FSJ can be lifted into the cabinet with the lifting eyes Use a lifting harness where the ropes or chains are maintained in a vertical position The device must not be lifted at an angle because this can damage the housing Rope spreaders may have to be used PP LQ Mounting 3 4 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120X converter 72 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 75: ...op plates from the cabinet frame and mount at least two support plates in the cabinet DELQHW IUDPH 6XSSRUW SODWHV After the converter is installed in the cabinet install the side back and top plates back to the cabinet frame 3 4 5 Mounting the optional components Depending on the particular application converters may require optional components For more information about optional components refer ...

Page 76: ...Mounting 3 4 Mounting the converter SINAMICS G120X converter 74 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 77: ...sible line supplies 4 1 1 1 TN system Overview 7UDQVIRUPHU RU JHQHUDWRU 7R WKH V VWHP DPSOH 6HSDUDWH WUDQVIHU RI 1 DQG 3 JURXQGHG QHXWUDO SRLQW 1 3 Figure 4 1 TN system A TN system transfers the PE protective conductor to the installed plant or system using a cable Generally in a TN system the neutral point is grounded There are versions of a TN system with a grounded line conductor e g with groun...

Page 78: ...ne filter C3 1 1 1 Operation permissible 1 Operation permissible once grounding screw has been removed If the grounding screw has been removed the converter no longer fulfills the requirements of class C3 Operation not permissible Converter not available More information on removing the grounding connection in the converter Removing functional grounding of the converter Page 78 Wiring 4 1 Line sup...

Page 79: ...ter operated on a TT system Converter Line supply with grounded neutral Line supply with grounded phase conduc tor and a voltage 600 V phase to phase Frame size A B C D E F G H J A B C D E F G H J Without line filter Integrated line filter C2 1 Integrated line filter C3 1 1 1 Operation permissible 1 Operation permissible once grounding screw has been removed If the grounding screw has been removed...

Page 80: ...rame size A B C D E F G H J A B C D E F G H J Without line filter Integrated line filter C2 Integrated line filter C3 1 1 1 1 1 1 Operation permissible 1 Operation permissible once grounding screw has been removed If the grounding screw has been removed the converter no longer fulfills the requirements of class C3 Operation not permissible Converter not available More information on removing the g...

Page 81: ...l charge in the power components Check the voltage at the converter connections before you remove the functional grounding Removing screw for functional grounding FSG Disconnecting the basic interference suppression module FSH FSJ If a converter FSH or FSJ is operated from a non grounded line supply IT system the connection to the basic interference suppression module of the Power Module must be o...

Page 82: ...rounded line supply IT system open the connection to the basic interference suppression module 4 1 2 Minimum cross section of the protective conductor Overview A high leakage current flows through the protective conductor in converter operation The protective conductor of the converter must not be interrupted for safe touch protection in converter operation This primarily results in requirements f...

Page 83: ...nd the control cabinet Protective conductor for motor feeder cables The minimum cross section of the protective conductor depends on the cross section of the line or motor feeder cable Line or motor feeder cable 16 mm2 Minimum cross section of the protective conductor cross section of the line or motor feeder cable 16 mm line or motor feeder cable 35 mm2 Minimum cross section of the protective con...

Page 84: ... local regulations for protective conductors subject to a high leakage current at the installation site 4 1 3 Maximum permissible motor cable length Overview The longer the motor cable of the converter the higher the line capacitances of the motor cable Line capacitances cause an additive current in converter operation and present an additional load to the converter Therefore a maximum admissible ...

Page 85: ...thout line filters with external C3 filter FSA FSG 50 m 1 The values apply to a pulse frequency at the factory setting If you set other pulse frequencies you must ensure that the EMC category is complied with on the plant or system side 2 2 kHz pulse frequency for FSF 75 kW and 90 kW 3 For motor cable lengths of 100 m 150 m with additional basic interference suppression module available on request...

Page 86: ...al L1 L2 and L3 FSE Schaffner VAC W517 02 1 ferrite sleeve per motor terminal U2 V2 and W2 FSF Schaffner RU41572 2 2 ferrite sleeves per line terminal L1 L2 and L3 and 2 ferrite sleeves per motor terminal U2 V2 and W2 Install the ferrite sleeves as closely as possible to the converter terminals on the connecting cables Figure 4 4 Ferrite sleeves on the connecting cables Wiring 4 1 Line supply and ...

Page 87: ...SG 300 m With un shielded motor cable Without output reactor or dv dt filter FSA FSC 300 m FSD FSE 300 m FSF FSG 450 m FSH FSJ 200 m With 2 output reactors in ser ies or dv dt filter FSD FSE 525 m FSF FSG 800 m With 1 output reactor or dv dt filter FSH FSJ 450 m With sine wave filter FSA FSF 300 m FSG 450 m 1 The values are valid for a pulse frequency set at the factory 690 V converter EMC categor...

Page 88: ...ter plus line reactor 3 For motor cable lengths of 100 m 150 m an additional basic interference suppression module shall be provided on the line side available on request Without EMC category Table 4 7 Maximum permissible motor cable length 1 Converter frame size 690 V Maximum motor cable length With shiel ded motor cable Without output reactor or dv dt filter FSD 18 5 kW 30 kW 200 m FSD 37 kW FSG...

Page 89: ...le also depends on the quality of the motor cable and the pulse frequency The above values apply to high quality cables e g CY100 Dimension the motor cable such that the resistance losses are less than 5 of the rated converter power 4 1 4 Connecting the converter and converter components WARNING Electric shock when the motor terminal box is open As soon as the converter is connected to the line su...

Page 90: ...2 Line harmonics filter Line filter Output reactor Sine wave filter dv dt filter VPL 400 V FSA FSC 3 FSD FSG 690 V FSD FSG 1 If you choose to use line harmonics filter and line filter simultaneously the order of connection should be Line Line harmonics filter Line filter Converter 2 If you choose to use the motor side option it is enough to use only one of the options 3 Line harmonics filter is no...

Page 91: ... 4 6 Connecting converters FSH FSJ and their optional components 4 1 4 2 Connnecting converters Connecting converters FSA FSC LQN LQH VXSSO 0RWRU 9 8 5 672 Figure 4 7 Connections for the line supply motor and DC link terminals Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 89 ...

Page 92: ...crews from the cover and then remove it In addition you must make openings on the connection cover for the line supply and power cables Use side cutters or a fine saw blade 1 2 3 Figure 4 9 Removing the connection cover and making openings FSF FSG After the cables are connected you must re attach the cover in order to re establish the touch protection of the converter Wiring 4 1 Line supply and mo...

Page 93: ...VXSSO 0RWRU 0RWRU 0RWRU 5 8 9 672 8 9 5 6 8 9 672 672 5 Figure 4 10 Connections for the line supply and motor Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 91 ...

Page 94: ...ing plates voltage flashovers may occur between the phases Replace the insulating plates after connecting the cables Connecting converters FSH FSJ To access the line and motor terminals release the screws three screws on FSH and four screws on FSJ from the front cover and remove the cover towards the front 7 1P 7 7 Figure 4 11 Removing the front cover Wiring 4 1 Line supply and motor SINAMICS G120...

Page 95: ...re than one cable per connection Distribute the cables per connection evenly on the left and right side of the connection Only use the rear connections when the front connections are occupied After the cables are connected you must re attach the covers in order to re establish the touch protection of the converter screw tightening torque 6 Nm 53 lbf in WARNING Electric shock if the cable entry pro...

Page 96: ...inal connector type Terminal connector type Cable cross section Screw tighten ing torque FSF Line motor and PE Cable lug ac cording to SN71322 for M10 bolts Line motor and PE Cable lug ac cording to SN71322 for M10 bolts 35 mm 2 120 mm2 2 2 4 0 AWG 22 25 Nm 194 7 221 3 lbf in DC link FSG Line motor and PE 35 mm 2 185 mm2 2 2 350 MCM 50 Nm 442 5 lbf in Convert er Terminal connector type Cable cross...

Page 97: ...ke sure that you use copper busbars of the same cross sections as the connecting busbars of the converter itself FSH 64 mm 8 mm FSJ 80 mm 8 mm 4 1 4 4 Cable lug For cable connections using cable lugs the maximum dimensions of the cable lugs are listed in the table below These cable lugs are not to exceed these dimensions as mechanical fastening and adherence to the voltage distances is not guarant...

Page 98: ...cable insulation The following illustrations take converters with PROFINET interfaces as examples Connecting the cable shields FSA FSC converters The shield support for converter FSB is displayed as an example Unshielded line cable Cable tie Unshielded communication cable Unlacquered good electrically conducting mounting plate Shielded control cable Toothed tape Shielded motor cable Wiring 4 1 Lin...

Page 99: ...ect the cable shields if you use Siemens PROFINET cables for communication When using communication cables from other manufacturers make sure that you connect the cable shields with toothed tapes Note Recommended connecters for PROFIBUS DP cable We recommend Siemens connectors with the following article numbers for connecting the PROFIBUS DP cable 6GK1500 0FC10 6GK1500 0EA02 Wiring 4 1 Line supply...

Page 100: ...h 87 Hz characteristic I I1 ෭ ෪ I1 8 81 ෭ ෪ 81 ෭ ෪ 31 9 9 I 0 01 I 3 31 9 8 8 8 8 9 9 In a delta connection the motor is oper ated with a voltage and frequency above its rated values As a consequence the motor power is increased by a factor 3 1 73 In the range f 0 87 Hz the motor can output its rated torque MN The maximum voltage U 400 V is avail able at a frequency of f 3 50 Hz 87 Hz The motor on...

Page 101: ... open the front door Terminal strip Memory card slot Switch for AI 0 and AI 1 U I 8 To secure the I O Extension Module Terminal strips Status LED Fieldbus interfaces at the lower side Connection to the Operator Panel Smart Access or I O Extension Module Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 99 ...

Page 102: ...ard slot Cover for fieldbus interface 4 2 2 Fieldbus interface allocation Interfaces at the lower side of the Control Unit 5 UHFHLYH GDWD 7 WUDQVPLW GDWD 5 UHFHLYH GDWD 7 WUDQVPLW GDWD 352 1 7 3 3 5 7 3 UHFHLYH DQG WUDQVPLW 6KLHOG JURXQG 93 VXSSO YROWDJH 175 3 FRQWURO VLJQDO 5 7 1 UHFHLYH DQG WUDQVPLW 1 UHIHUHQFH SRWHQWLDO IRU GDWD 352 86 56b 3 UHFHLYH DQG WUDQVPLW 56b 1 UHFHLYH DQG WUDQVPLW 9 UHI...

Page 103: ...ternal 24 V power supply terminal 9 All terminals with the GND reference potential are internally connected with one another The reference potential DI COM is not internally connected with GND If as shown above you wish to use the 24 V supply from terminal 9 as supply for the digital inputs a jumper is required between terminals 28 and 69 When an optional 24 V power supply is connected at terminal...

Page 104: ... contacts that switch to m potential 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 12 2 20 2 1 9H W 1 H W Figure 4 15 Connecting contacts switching to m potential with an external power supply WARNING Electric shock due to unsuitable power supply When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply exposed components may carry a hazardous voltage that might result in serious injury or death Only use power suppl...

Page 105: ...r of G120X I O terminals See the following for the wiring diagram of the I O Extension Module 6HQVRU 3W 1L 1 1L RU DQDORJ LQSXW P P 6HQVRU 3W 1L 1 1L 9 RXWSXW PD P 5HIHUHQFH IRU WHUPLQDO 5HIHUHQFH IRU WHUPLQDOV DQG 5HIHUHQFH IRU WHUPLQDO 5HIHUHQFH WHUPLQDO QDORJ RXWSXW 9 ಹ 9 P ಹ P QDORJ RXWSXW 9 ಹ 9 P ಹ P 5HIHUHQFH IRU GLJLWDO LQSXWV 5HIHUHQFH IRU GLJLWDO LQSXWV LJLWDO RXWSXWV PD 9 PD 9 LJLWDO RXW...

Page 106: ... separate groups WARNING Electric shock due to DO connection to dual power supply When connecting the digital outputs of the I O Extension Module to DC and AC power supplies at the same time exposed components may carry a hazardous voltage that might result in serious injury or death Do not mix live parts with control signals PELV SELV when connecting the DO terminals of the I O Extension Module f...

Page 107: ...D WHUPLQDO VWULS RQWURO YLD 352 GULYH WHOHJUDP LJKHU OHYHO FRQWURO RJJLQJ RJJLQJ 6ZLWFK RYHU FRQWURO DQG VSHHG VHWSRLQW 2SHUDWLRQ RJJLQJ RU 6SHHG VHWSRLQW 6SHHG VHWSRLQW 7HOHJUDP 3 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 9 1 1 1 9 RXW 1 2 1 7 02725 7 02725 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 12 2 20 2 1 352 1 7 352 86 Figure 4 18 Factory setting for converters wi...

Page 108: ...1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ 1R IXQFWLRQ DXOW 2SHUDWLRQ 9 1 1 1 9 RXW 1 2 1 7 02725 7 02725 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 12 2 20 2 1 Figure 4 19 Factory setting for converters with RS 485 fieldbus interfaces Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 106 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 109: ...al value Current ac tual value Current ac tual value Current ac tual value Current ac tual value DI 0 ON OFF2 ON OFF2 ON OFF2 ON OFF2 ON OFF2 ON OFF2 lo cal ON OFF2 DI 1 Service pump 1 Service pump 1 Fixed set point 1 ON OFF2 re mote DI 2 Service pump 2 Service pump 2 Fixed set point 2 DI 3 Service pump 3 Fixed set point 3 DI 4 manual au to manual au to manual au to local remote DI 5 Acknowledge f...

Page 110: ...au to local remote local remote local remote DI 5 Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault Acknowledge fault DO 0 Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault DO 1 Operation Pump 1 Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation DO 2 2 Pump 1 Pump 2 Ready for op eration Ready for op eration Ready for op eration Ready for op eration ...

Page 111: ... Default setting 41 p0015 41 Q PLQ PLQ 9 9 9 Q 2 P P PLQ PLQ 2 P P DI 0 ON OFF1 OFF2 DI 5 p29652 0 722 0 p29650 0 0 p0840 0 29659 0 p0844 0 29659 1 p2104 0 722 5 AI 0 p1070 0 755 0 AO 0 p0771 0 21 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 AO 1 p0771 1 27 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI FINISH Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINA...

Page 112: ...DEOH FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 0DQXDO XWR 6HWSRLQW XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH ODUP 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 3 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 9 RXW 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 12 2 1 2 20 2 12 2 1 2 20 1 With I O Extension Module Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 110 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 113: ...p0844 0 29659 1 p2200 722 4 p2104 0 722 5 AI 0 p2253 0 755 0 p1070 0 755 0 AI 1 p2264 0 755 1 AO 0 p0771 0 21 AO 1 p0771 1 27 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI PID FINISH Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 111 ...

Page 114: ...WXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ DXOW QDEOH FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 0DQXDO XWR 6HWSRLQW 3 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 9 RXW 1 1 1 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 12 2 1 2 20 2 12 2 1 2 20 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 With I O Extension Module Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 112 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 115: ...22 2 p2200 722 4 p2104 0 722 5 AI 0 p2253 0 755 0 p1070 0 755 0 AI 1 p2264 0 755 1 AO 0 p0771 0 21 AO 1 p0771 1 27 Multi pump con trol p29520 1 p29521 2 p29539 1 p29540 1 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 29529 0 p0733 29529 1 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI 2XP FINISH Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter Operating I...

Page 116: ...QRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH DXOW QDEOH FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 0DQXDO XWR 6HWSRLQW 3 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 9 RXW 1 1 1 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 12 2 1 2 20 2 12 2 1 2 20 2 2 1 2 2 1 Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 114 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 117: ... control p29520 1 p29521 3 p29539 1 p29540 1 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 29529 0 p0732 29529 1 p0733 29529 2 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI 3XP FINISH Default setting macro 45 Fixed setpoint control L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ...

Page 118: ... 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X FIX FINISH Default setting macro 46 AI control local remote 6ZLWFKRYHU ORFDO UHPRWH FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 ORFDO 21 2 UHPRWH 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQW ORFDO 6HWSRLQW UHPRWH 6HWSRLQW 21 2 ORFDO UHPRWH ORFDO UHPRWH 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 9 RXW 1 1...

Page 119: ...p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X AI I r FINISH Default setting macro 47 PID controller with internal fixed setpoint FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 6HWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW 3 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 9 RXW 1 1 2 12 2...

Page 120: ...dure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X FIXPId FINISH Default setting macro 48 2 pumps and internal fixed setpoint 3XPS 3XPS 2SHUDWLRQ FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH DXOW FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU QDEOH L HG VHWSRLQW 6HUYLFH SXPS 6HUYLFH SXPS 6ZLWFKRYHU PDQXDO ർ DXWR 0DQXDO XWR 6HWSRLQW 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 9 RXW 1 1 ...

Page 121: ...ulti pump control p29520 1 p29521 2 p29539 1 p29540 1 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X In 2XP FINISH Default setting macro 49 3 pumps and internal fixed setpoint 3XPS FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 3XPS DXOW 3XPS FWXDO YDOXH IRU 3 WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU QDEOH L HG VHWSRLQW 6HUYLFH SXPS 6HUYLFH SXPS 6HUYLFH SXPS 6ZLWFKRYHU PD...

Page 122: ... 29529 1 p0733 29529 2 Setpoint p1070 0 1024 p2253 0 2224 p1020 0 65536 Multi pump control p29520 1 p29521 3 p29539 1 p29540 1 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X In 3XP FINISH Default setting macro 51 Modbus RTU control RQWURO YLD 0RGEXV 578 bEDXG FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 9 RXW 1 ...

Page 123: ...or changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X Fb mod FINISH Default setting macro 52 Modbus RTU control local remote RQWURO YLD 0RGEXV 578 bEDXG 6ZLWFKRYHU ORFDO ർ UHPRWH FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 ORFDO 21 2 ORFDO UHPRWH ORFDO UHPRWH 21 2 UHPRWH 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQW ORFDO 6HWSRLQW 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 9 RXW 1 1...

Page 124: ...40 65000 p0854 0 2090 10 p1070 0 2050 1 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X modl r FINISH Default setting macro 54 USS control RQWURO YLD 866 DXG 3 3 FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 12 2 20 2 1 2 12...

Page 125: ...for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X fb USS FINISH Default setting macro 55 USS control local remote RQWURO YLD 866 bEDXG 3 3 6ZLWFKRYHU ORFDO ർ UHPRWH FNQRZOHGJH IDXOW 21 2 ORFDO 21 2 ORFDO UHPRWH ORFDO UHPRWH 21 2 UHPRWH 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH XUUHQW DFWXDO YDOXH 2SHUDWLRQ ODUP DXOW 5HDG IRU RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQW ORFDO 6HWSRLQW 9 RXW 1 20 2 12 2 20 2 1 9 RXW 1 1 2 12 2 2...

Page 126: ... 0 21 AO 1 p0771 1 27 USS p2020 8 p2023 4 p2030 1 p2040 65000 p1070 0 2050 1 p0854 0 2090 10 DO 0 DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 p0732 52 1 p0733 52 7 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X USSl r FINISH Default setting macro 57 PROFINET control PROFINET control is the factory setting for converters with PROFINET or PROFIBUS interfaces Wiring 4 2 Contr...

Page 127: ...tic Setting Parameter Default setting 57 p0015 57 Q 2 P P PLQ PLQ DI 0 ON OFF1 OFF2 DI 1 DI 4 DI 5 p29652 1 722 0 p29650 1 0 p0840 0 1 29659 0 p0844 0 1 29659 1 p29652 0 722 1 p29650 0 1 p0810 722 4 p2104 0 1 722 5 AO 0 p0771 0 21 PROFINET p0922 1 p1070 0 2050 1 DO 0 DO 1 p0730 52 3 p0731 52 2 Procedure for changing p0015 with the BOP 2 operator panel SETUP MAc PAr P15 X PN 1 FINISH More informati...

Page 128: ... outputs on converters FSH and FSJ Overview Converters FSH and FSJ have 4 additional digital inputs and 2 digital outputs at terminal strip X9 7HUPLQDO VWULS Figure 4 20 Terminal strip X9 Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 126 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 129: ...ital inputs are low active in the factory setting If you do not use one of the digital inputs you must connect the digital input with 24 V 8 11 12 The function of the digital outputs cannot be changed 8 The digital output signals a fully charged DC link of the converter A charged DC link is the prerequisite for the operation converter state 11 12 A device to protect against overload and short circ...

Page 130: ... and the feedback from the converter Application examples for Safe Torque Off Page 132 Function description Use an SELV or PELV power supply with 24 V DC 20 4 V 28 8 V maximum 60 V briefly Use a shielded cable with the following properties Cable length 30 m Cross section 0 5 mm2 1 5 mm2 20 16 AWG Insulated for 600 V Conductor end sleeves stripping length 7 mm Tightening torque 0 2 Nm 2 lbf in Wiri...

Page 131: ...d switches for the STO function frame sizes FSA FSC 1 Connect the cables for selecting STO to terminals STO_A and STO_B 2 Connect the cables for STO feedback to 2 digital outputs of terminal block X134 3 Attach the shield to the shield plate of the converter through the largest possible surface area You have connected all cables for the STO safety function Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G1...

Page 132: ...ed Both switches OFF STO is locked Two switches different not permissible Figure 4 24 Terminals and switches for the STO function frame sizes FSD FSG 1 Remove the Control Unit 2 Connect the cable for selecting STO to terminals STO_A and STO_B 3 Plug in the Control Unit Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 130 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 133: ... HQDEOH RU GLVDEOH 672 Both switches ON STO is enabled Both switches OFF STO is locked Two switches different not permissible Figure 4 25 Terminals and switches for the STO function frame sizes FSH and FSJ 1 Connect the cable for selecting STO to terminals X41 STO_A and X41 STO_B 2 Connect the cables for STO feedback to terminals X41 FB_A and X41 FB_B 3 Attach the shield to the shield plate throug...

Page 134: ...s for the feedback of STO are correctly parameterized Setting the feedback signal for Safe Torque Off Page 298 The higher level control system monitors the selection of the STO safety function and the feedback from the converter Forced checking procedure test stop The higher level control system regularly selects the STO safety function and evaluates the converter feedback signal We recommend that...

Page 135: ...ters FSH and FSJ not permissible for FSA FSG SIRIUS 3SK2 Two channel dynamic feedback circuit MSS 3RK3 Two channel dynamic feedback circuit SIMATIC Feedback circuit monitoring in the safety program Forced checking procedure test stop every 3 months Function description SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relay 9 6WDUW 0 6 1 1 6 7 1 7 7 1 7 XWRVWDUW 0RQLWRUHG 6WDUW RJLF 672B 672B 9 9 9 9 2 1 2 20 2 1 2 20 Figure 4 ...

Page 136: ...safety relay The wiring examples are implemented using safety relays with relay enable circuits Safety relays with semiconductor enable circuits can also be used 9 6WDUW 0 6 5 86 6 RJLF 4 4 40 7 1 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 672B 672B 9 9 9 9 6 1 0 6 2 12 2 20 2 12 2 20 Figure 4 29 Connection 3SK2 inside a control cabinet for FSA FSG Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 134 Operating Ins...

Page 137: ...is sufficient for the converters FSH and FSJ Modular 3RK3 safety system You can use the following outputs to control the failsafe digital inputs in the converter The failsafe digital outputs in the central units of the 3RK3 modular safety system The failsafe digital outputs in the EM 2 4F DI 2F DO expansion module The failsafe digital outputs in the EM 4F DO expansion module The failsafe relay out...

Page 138: ...2 GHVHOHFWHG 672 GHVHOHFWHG 672 VHOHFWHG 4 1 4 1 W W W W 7 7 7 T1 30 ms In case of deviating feedback the Modular Safety System must select the STO function and indicate an error T2 20 ms Figure 4 33 Dynamic monitoring of STO feedback for FSA FSG Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 136 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 139: ...g of STO feedback at start up is sufficient for the converters FSH and FSJ SIMATIC I O modules 9 0 4 9 330 9 6 672B 672B 9 9 9 9 6 1 0 6 2 12 2 20 2 12 2 20 Figure 4 35 Connecting the SIMATIC S7 1500 in a control cabinet for FSA FSG Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 137 ...

Page 140: ...SJ Static monitoring of STO feedback for STO selection is sufficient for the converters FSH and FSJ More information Further information is provided on the Internet SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 16381 man SIRIUS 3SK2 Safety Relays https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109444336 SIRIUS 3RK3 modular safety system manual https support industry sie...

Page 141: ... about the temperature monitoring relay on the Internet Manual 3RS1 3RS2 temperature monitoring relays https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 54999309 Note Malfunction caused by incorrect switching states as the result of diagnostic flows in the off state logical state 0 In contrast to mechanical switching contacts e g emergency stop switches diagnostic flows can also flow with semicondu...

Page 142: ...tion MCZ OVP TAZ DIODE 24VDC Table 4 11 Permissible cable and wiring options Solid or finely stranded conductor Finely stranded conduc tor with non insulated end sleeve Finely stranded conduc tor with partially insula ted end sleeve Two finely stranded conductors with the same cross section with partially insulated twin end sleeves PP PP PP PP PP PP ෪ PP PP Wiring the terminal strip in compliance ...

Page 143: ...s Precondition Ring topology With MRP you get an uninterrupted switchover if you set the failure monitoring time to a value 200 ms MRPD Media redundancy bumpless Precondition IRT and the ring topology created in the control Diagnostic alarms in accordance with the error classes specified in the PROFIdrive profile Device replacement without removable data storage medium The replacement converter is...

Page 144: ...sport layer Function description DCP Discovery and configuration protocol Not rele vant 2 Ethernet II and IEEE 802 1Q and Ethertype 0x8892 PROFINET Accessible stations PROFINET Discovery and configuration DCP is used by PROFINET to determine PROFINET devices and to make basic settings DCP uses the special multicast MAC address xx xx xx 01 0E CF xx xx xx Organizationally Unique Identifier LLDP Link...

Page 145: ...ction description Implicit mes saging 2222 4 UDP Used for exchanging I O data This is inactive when delivered Is activated when selecting EtherNet IP Explicit mes saging 44818 4 TCP 4 UDP Used for parameter access writing reading This is inactive when delivered Is activated when selecting EtherNet IP Table 4 14 Connection oriented communication protocols Protocol Port number Layer 2 Link layer 4 T...

Page 146: ...n the IO controller If required load the GSDML file of the converter into the engineering software Installing GSDML Page 145 Device name In addition to the MAC address and IP address PROFINET also uses the device name to identify PROFINET devices Device name The device name must be unique across the PROFINET network You assign the device name with the IO controller engineering software The convert...

Page 147: ...our computer 3 Import the GSDML into the engineering system of the controller You have now installed the GSDML in the engineering system of the controller 4 2 11 6 Connect converter to EtherNet IP Overview To connect the converter to a control system via Ethernet proceed as follows Procedure 1 Connect the converter to the control system via an Ethernet cable 2 Create an object for data exchange Yo...

Page 148: ... you have correctly set the communication settings and can control the converter via the fieldbus Is the converter correctly connected to the EtherNet IP Is the EDS file installed in your control system Have the bus interface and IP address been correctly set Have the signals that the converter and the control system exchange been correctly interconnected 4 2 12 RS485 interface for the fieldbus Fu...

Page 149: ...ves from the fieldbus without interrupting the cable 4 2 13 Connecting to PROFIBUS 6 1 0 6 6ODYH 6 1 0 6 6ODYH 3 ODVV 0DVWHU 352 86 3 6 0 7 6 ODVV PDVWHU The PROFIBUS DP interface has the following functions Cyclic communication Acyclic communication Diagnostic alarms General information on PROFIBUS DP can be found in the Internet PROFIBUS user organization http www profibus com downloads installa...

Page 150: ...ire the appropriate engineering system to configure PROFIBUS communication in the PROFIBUS master If required load the GSD file of the converter into the engineering system Installing the GSD Page 149 Setting the address Set the address of the PROFIBUS slave Setting the address Page 206 Setting the telegram Set the same telegram in the converter as in the PROFIBUS master Interconnect the telegrams...

Page 151: ...ault without communications with the control system being interrupted 4 2 13 3 Installing the GSD Procedure 1 Save the GSD on your PC via one of the following methods With Internet access GSD http support automation siemens com WW view en 22339653 133100 Without Internet access Insert a memory card into the converter Set p0804 to 12 The converter writes the GSD as zipped file zip into directory SI...

Page 152: ...Wiring 4 2 Control interfaces SINAMICS G120X converter 150 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 153: ...irements to be met by the drive for your application Page 153 2 Restore the factory settings of the converter if necessary Page 173 3 Check if the factory setting of the converter is sufficient for your application Page 157 4 Set the following for quick commissioning of the drive The closed loop motor control The inputs and outputs The fieldbus interface Page 159 5 Check if additional converter fu...

Page 154: ...ICS G120 Smart Access are only for commissioning and thus cannot be used with the converter permanently Operating instructions of the SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Overview of the manuals Page 1109 Preventing misuse of the operator panel The operator panel does not provide protection against unauthorized access To protect the converter against unauthorized operation or changes to the settings you nee...

Page 155: ...ameplate 9ROWDJH XUUHQW 3RZHU 6SHHG UWLFOH 1R 1 0 1 0 Figure 5 1 Example of the rating plate for a standard induction motor In which region of the world is the motor to be used Europe IEC 50 Hz kW North America NEMA 60 Hz hp or 60 Hz kW How is the motor connected Pay attention to the connection of the motor star connection Y or delta connection Δ Note the appropriate motor data for connecting Comm...

Page 156: ...plate for a reluctance motor In which region of the world is the motor to be used Europe IEC 50 Hz kW North America NEMA 60 Hz hp or 60 Hz kW How is the motor connected Pay attention to the connection of the motor star connection Y or delta connection Δ Note the appropriate motor data for connecting Commissioning 5 3 Preparing for commissioning SINAMICS G120X converter 154 Operating Instructions 0...

Page 157: ...ber S ZVK5375000118 Production date May 2018 Table 5 1 Production year and month Digit Production year Digit Production month K 2018 1 9 January September L 2019 0 October M 2020 N November D December Function description Procedure for FSA FSG You form the DC link capacitors by supplying the converter with a line voltage of 100 of the rated voltage for a defined time RUPLQJ IRU VWRUDJH WLPHV RI HD...

Page 158: ...r the forming time to elapse r3381 indicates the remaining time If the line voltage is switched off before forming has been completed then you have to form the DC link again 5 The converter sets p3380 0 6 Set p0010 0 You have formed the DC link Parameter Parameter Description Factory setting p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 0 p3380 Forming activation duration 0 h r3381 Remaining forming ...

Page 159: ...2 5DPS XS WLPH 5DPS GRZQ WLPH PLQ W W Ramp up time10 s Figure 5 4 Switch motor on and off in the factory setting The ramp up and ramp down times define the maximum motor acceleration when the speed setpoint changes The ramp up and ramp down times are derived from the time between motor standstill and the maximum speed or between the maximum speed and motor standstill Traverse the motor in the jog ...

Page 160: ...nverter limits the motor speed to this value Operate the motor in the factory setting We recommend that you execute quick commissioning For quick commissioning you must adapt the converter to the connected motor by setting the motor data in the converter For basic applications you can try to operate the drive with a rated power 18 5 kW without any other commissioning steps Check whether the contro...

Page 161: ...e Operator Panel into the matching recess of the Control Unit 3 Plug the operator panel BOP 2 onto the converter until the latch audibly engages You have plugged the BOP 2 onto the converter The operator panel BOP 2 is ready for operation when you connect the converter to the power supply Commissioning 5 4 Quick commissioning using the BOP 2 operator panel SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instru...

Page 162: ...KH PRWRU GDWD LGHQWLILFDWLRQ PHWKRG 6HOHFW WKH DSSOLFDWLRQ QWHU WKH GULYH GDWD 6HOHFW WKH PRWRU FRQWURO PRGH 6HW PLQLPXP DQG PD LPXP VSHHGV UDPS XS DQG UDPS GRZQ WLPHV 3DUDPHWHUV WR EH VHW SHUW S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S 6WDQGDUG GULYH FRQWURO QDPLF GULYH FRQWURO S SHUW S S S S S S 9 N PLQ 6WDQGDUG ULYH RQWURO QDPLF ULYH RQWURO SHUW 6WDQGDUG ULYH RQWURO QDPLF ULYH RQWURO Figure 5 6 Quick co...

Page 163: ... converter must be reset to the factory settings now Proceed as follows 1 Press the OK key 2 Switchover the display using an arrow key nO YES 3 Press the OK key When selecting an application class the converter assigns the motor control with the appropriate default settings Standard Drive Control Page 163 Dynamic Drive Control Page 165 Expert Page 167 Depending on the particular Power Module the c...

Page 164: ...lications Motor power ratings 11 kW For load surges of 10 100 of the rated motor torque Dynamic Drive Control is necessary for a ramp up time 0 rated speed dependent on the rated motor power 1 s 0 1 kW 10 s 132 kW Application ex amples Pumps fans and compressors with flow characteristic Pumps and compressors with displacement machines Motors that can be operated Induction motors Induction and sync...

Page 165: ...d a motor type with motor code you must now enter the motor code The converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code If you do not know the motor code then you must set the motor code 0 and enter motor data from p0304 and higher from the rating plate 87 Hz motor operation The BOP 2 only indicates this step if you selected IEC as the motor standard EUR USA P100 kW 50 Hz R...

Page 166: ...n has been completed STILL Recommended setting Measure the motor data at standstill The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed Select this setting if the motor cannot rotate freely ROT Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed ST RT OP setting same a...

Page 167: ... deviate from the list shown above If you have selected a motor type with motor code you must now enter the motor code The converter assigns the following motor data corresponding to the motor code If you do not know the motor code then you must set the motor code 0 and enter motor data from p0304 and higher from the rating plate 87 Hz motor operation The BOP 2 only indicates this step if you sele...

Page 168: ...ication Select the method which the converter uses to measure the data of the connected motor OFF Motor data is not measured STIL ROT Recommended setting Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor rotating The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed STILL Default setting Measure the motor data at standstill The converter switches off the...

Page 169: ...esponding motor type with motor code Motors without motor code stamped on the rating plate INDUCT Third party induction motor 1L IND 1LE1 1LG6 1LA7 1LA9 induction motors Motors with motor code stamped on the rating plate 1LE1 IND 100 1LE1 9 1PC1 IND 1PC1 Depending on the converter the motor list in BOP 2 can deviate from the list shown above If you have selected a motor type with motor code you mu...

Page 170: ...nd fans with optimized efficiency The setting only makes sense for steady state operation with slow speed changes We recommend setting VEC STD if load surges in operation cannot be ruled out V LOAD Applications with high breakaway torque Select the control mode VF LIN U f control with linear characteristic VF LIN F Flux current control FCC VF QUAD U f control with square law characteristic SPD N E...

Page 171: ...e following applications Motor power ratings 11 kW For load surges of 10 100 of the rated motor torque The control mode is necessary for a ramp up time 0 Rated speed dependent on the rated motor power 1 s 0 1 kW 10 s 250 kW Application ex amples Pumps fans and compressors with flow characteristic Pumps and compressors with displacement machines Motors that can be operated Induction motors Inductio...

Page 172: ...ou have selected control mode SPD N EN but the motor cannot rotate freely You have selected U f control as control mode e g VF LIN or VF QUAD ROT Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed ST RT OP setting same as STIL ROT After the motor data identification the motor accelerates to the current setp...

Page 173: ...motor temperature falsifies the motor data identification results WARNING Unexpected machine motion while the motor data identification is in progress For the stationary measurement the motor can make several rotations The rotating measurement accelerates the motor up to the rated speed Secure dangerous machine parts before starting motor data identification Before switching on ensure that nobody ...

Page 174: ...er Depending on the setting after motor data identification has been completed the converter switches off the motor or it accelerates it to the setpoint If required switch off the motor Switch the converter control from HAND to AUTO You have completed the motor data identification Quick commissioning has been completed once the motor data identification has been successfully completed 027 Commissi...

Page 175: ...not able to complete commissioning Resetting to factory setting with the BOP 2 operator panel Procedure 1 Select the DRVRESET command from the EXTRAS menu 2 Confirm the reset using the OK key 3 Wait until the converter has been reset to the factory setting You have reset the converter to the factory settings Commissioning 5 5 Restoring the factory settings SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instru...

Page 176: ...63 9 92 7 287 U 3 1111 9 1 9 855 287 5 4 PLQ PLQ 9 PLQ PLQ 63 PLQ 5 03 1 0DF 3 U 59 33 1 Status display once the power supply for the converter has been switched on Figure 5 13 Menu of the BOP 2 3URFHGXUH IRU VZLWFKLQJ WKH PRWRU RQ DQG RII YLD WKH RSHUDWRU SDQHO 6ZLWFK RQ PRWRU 6ZLWFK RII WKH PRWRU 3UHVV 0 18 872 0DVWHU FRQWURO RI WKH LQYHUWHU LV UHOHDVHG YLD WKH 23 Q DODUP LV DFWLYH ODVKLQJ V PER...

Page 177: ...dure 2 6 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 5 06 67 1 5 7 5 3 57 7 5 U 1 Select the menu to display and change parameters Press the OK key 2 Select the parameter filter using the arrow keys Press the OK key STANDARD The converter only displays the most important parameters EXPERT The converter displays all of the parameters 3 Select the required number of a write parameter using the arrow keys Press the OK key 4 Sel...

Page 178: ...lues has its own index Procedure 2 2 3 U U U 3 3 1 Select the parameter number 2 Press the OK key 3 Set the parameter index 4 Press the OK key 5 Set the parameter value for the selected index You have now changed an indexed parameter Commissioning 5 6 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel SINAMICS G120X converter 176 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 179: ...ss the OK button You have now entered the parameter number directly Entering the parameter value directly The BOP 2 offers the option of setting the parameter value digit by digit Precondition The parameter value flashes in the BOP 2 display Procedure 3 V 6 2 2 1 Press the OK button for longer than five seconds 2 Change the parameter value digit by digit If you press the OK button then the BOP 2 j...

Page 180: ...rameter can only be adjusted during quick commissioning A parameter can only be adjusted when the motor is switched off 2 V U 5 21 2 V 3 3 9 2 V 3 5811 1 9 For each parameter the parameter list contains the operating state in which the parameter can be changed Commissioning 5 6 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel SINAMICS G120X converter 178 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 181: ...gher level control via the terminal strip or the fieldbus interface of the Control Unit The drive control defines how the converter responds to the commands Drive control Page 182 The converter can switch between different settings of the drive control Switching over the drive control command data set Page 292 Safety functions The safety functions fulfill increased requirements regarding the funct...

Page 182: ...ol The motor closed loop control ensures that the motor follows the speed setpoint You can choose between various control modes Motor control Page 376 Drive protection The protection functions prevent damage to the motor converter and driven load Drive protection Page 404 Increasing the drive availability The drive can bridge temporary power failures or be switched on while the motor is rotating D...

Page 183: ...the parameter index is shown in an abbreviated form 1XPEHU RI LQGLFHV QXPEHU RI PRWRU GDWD VHWV 0 6 3DUDPHWHUV ZLWK LQGLFHV 3DUDPHWHUV ZLWK ELWV 1XPEHU RI LQGLFHV QXPEHU RI GULYH GDWD VHWV 6 1XPEHU RI LQGLFHV QXPEHU RI FRPPDQG GDWD VHWV 6 1XPEHU 1DPH DFWRU VHWWLQJ S S S 0 S S Figure 6 1 Brief parameter description Advanced commissioning 6 2 Brief description of the parameters SINAMICS G120X conver...

Page 184: ...verter switches on the motor with the ON command The converter changes to the Operation state After the OFF1 command the converter brakes the motor down to standstill The converter switches off the motor once standstill has been reached The converter is again ready to start Precondition Functions In order to be able to respond to external commands you must set the command interface so that it fits...

Page 185: ...rrent does not flow in the motor and the motor does not generate any torque Current flows in the motor and the motor generates a torque S1 The ON command and an OFF command are active at the same time In order for the converter to exit the state you must deactivate OFF2 and OFF3 and activate the ON command again S4 The motor is switched on S2 The converter waits for a new command to switch on the ...

Page 186: ...still when at least one of the following conditions is satisfied The speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started in p1228 has expired The speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time subsequently started in p1227 has expired OFF2 Inhibit opera tion The converter switches off the motor immediately without first braking it Advanced commissioning 6 3 D...

Page 187: ...U SRZHU XS RU MRJ 0DLQ FRQWDFWRU LV 23 1 6 5HDG IRU VZLWFKLQJ RQ QDEOH RSHUDWLRQ 1R MRJ RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQWV HQDEOHG RQWUROOHU HQDEOHG 3XOVHV HQDEOHG 6 2SHUDWLRQ 2 KDV SULRULW RYHU MRJJLQJ 2 RJ RJ 1R MRJJLQJ U VDIHW HQDEOH PLVVLQJ RDVW 6WRS DUGZDUH HQDEOH DUGZDUH HQDEOH DUGZDUH HQDEOH 0RWRU DW VWDQGVWLOO 0RWRU DW VWDQGVWLOO 4XLFN 6WRS URP DOO VWDWHV DXOW ZLWK 2 RU 2 UHVSRQVH 4XLFN 6WRS 6 F RJJLQJ G...

Page 188: ...o the parameter list 6 3 2 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strips Overview In the converter the input and output signals are interconnected with specific converter functions using special parameters The following parameters are available to interconnect signals Binectors BI and BO are parameters to interconnect binary signals Connectors CI and CO are parameters to interconnect analog sig...

Page 189: ...20 S 2 20 2 12 2 1 2 U Q 2 U Q S 2 20 2 12 2 1 S 2 U Q 2 20 2 12 S 2 U Q 2 20 2 12 S S S S S S S U U S S U S S U 8 8 7 03 S U 7 03 S U 1 1 with I O Extension Module Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 187 ...

Page 190: ... digital inputs status inverted p0724 CU digital inputs debounce time 4 ms p0810 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 0 Dependent on the converter p0840 C BI ON OFF OFF1 Dependent on the converter p0844 C BI No coast down coast down OFF2 signal source 1 Dependent on the converter p0848 C BI No quick stop quick stop OFF3 signal source 1 1 p0852 C BI Enable operation inhibit operation Dependent on ...

Page 191: ...3 C BI Setpoint inversion Dependent on the converter p2103 C BI 1 Acknowledge faults Dependent on the converter p2106 C BI External fault 1 1 p2112 C BI External alarm 1 1 For further binector inputs and additional information on parameters please refer to the parameter list Parameter list Page 470 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW ...

Page 192: ... U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 9 9 S S S S S 7 7 7 7 S 7 7 S S S S S S S U S U S S S S U U U U U S 7 S S U U U U U S 7 S S U U U U PLW 2 WHQVLRQ 0RGXOH Figure 6 5 FP 2221 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter 190 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 193: ...ital input with 10 V or with 24 V NOTICE Defective analog input due to overcurrent If the analog input switch is set to Current input I a 10 V or 24 V voltage source results in an overcurrent at the analog input An overcurrent condition destroys the analog input If you use an analog input as a digital input then you must set the analog input switch to Voltage U Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive con...

Page 194: ...QDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 9ROWDJH XUUHQW 9ROWDJH XUUHQW 7HUPLQDO HERXQFH HERXQFH 6LPXODWLRQ RQ S 9 9 9 9 S 7 U U U U S U S 7 S U U U U S U 8 ದ 8 8 ದ 8 Figure 6 6 FP 2256 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter 192 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 195: ...utput you must interconnect the digital output with a binector output of your choice Binector outputs are designated in the parameter list with the prefix BO Example U S 2 1 2 12 2 20 To output converter fault messages via digital output DO 1 you must interconnect DO 1 with these fault messages Set p0731 52 3 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions ...

Page 196: ... 11 0 signal I M P limit reached 13 0 signal Alarm motor overtemperature 14 1 signal Motor clockwise rotation 15 0 signal Alarm converter overload r0053 0 11 CO BO Status word 2 00 1 signal DC braking active 02 1 signal Speed minimum speed p1080 06 1 signal Speed setpoint speed r1119 p0730 BI CU signal source for terminal DO 0 52 3 p0731 BI CU signal source for terminal DO 1 52 2 p0732 BI CU signa...

Page 197: ...HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO 1 20 12 2 1 20 12 2 U U 1 20 12 2 1 20 12 2 U U S S S 2 U S S 2 U S S S 20 12 20 12 S S S S PLW 2 WHQVLRQ 0RGXOH Figure 6 7 FP 2244 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 195 ...

Page 198: ... input 0 V 10 V p0756 1 0 Unipolar voltage input monitored 2 V 10 V 1 Unipolar current input 0 mA 20 mA 2 Unipolar current input monitored 4 mA 20 mA 3 Bipolar voltage input factory setting 10 V 10 V 4 AI 2 Unipolar current input factory setting 0 mA 20 mA p0756 2 2 Unipolar current input monitored 4 mA 20 mA 3 LG Ni1000 temperature sensor 6 Pt1000 temperature sensor 7 No sensor connected 8 DIN Ni...

Page 199: ... with the prefix CI Example U S In order to enter the supplementary setpoint via analog input AI 0 you must interconnect AI 0 with the signal source for the supplementary setpoint Set p1075 755 0 Parameters Table 6 5 Frequently used connector inputs CI of the converter Parameter Description Factory setting p1070 C CI Main setpoint Dependent on the converter p1075 C CI Supplementary setpoint 0 p225...

Page 200: ... LQSXW VLJQDO UHIHUUHG WR JURXQG O O PXVW EH FRQQHFWHG WR UHIHUHQFH SRWHQWLDO 0 7KH YROWDJH EHWZHHQ LQSXWV DQG EHWZHHQ LQSXW DQG WKH JURXQG SRLQW PXVW QRW H FHHG 9 KHQ WKH 3 VZLWFK LV LQ SRVLWLRQ WKH LQSXW YROWDJH PXVW QRW H FHHG 9 RU WKH LPSUHVVHG FXUUHQW P I WKLV LV QRW REVHUYHG WKH LQSXW ZLOO EH GDPDJHG 6FDOLQJ DUGZDUH VPRRWKLQJ XUUHQW 9ROWDJH QDORJ LQSXWV QSXW 2XWSXW 7HUPLQDOV 8 P P 9 9 S S S ...

Page 201: ...60 Parameters p0757 p0760 are assigned to an analog input via their index e g parameters p0757 0 p0760 0 belong to analog input 0 9ROWDJH LQSXW 9 9 XUUHQW LQSXW P P S S S S S S P S S S S 9 You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular application Example The converter should convert a 6 mA 12 mA signal into the value range 100 100 via analog input 0 The...

Page 202: ...puts characteristic value x2 10 p0760 0 n CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 100 p0761 0 n CU analog inputs wire break monitoring response threshold 2 p0762 0 n CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring time 100 ms 6 3 2 6 Setting the deadband Function description HDG EDQG HDG EDQG 9 P 9 P With the control enabled electromagnetic interference on the signal cable can cause the motor to slowly...

Page 203: ...hen the speed setpoint 0 Parameters Parameter Description Factory setting p0764 0 Analog inputs deadband AI 0 0 p0764 1 Analog inputs deadband AI 1 0 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 201 ...

Page 204: ...alog output function by interconnecting parameter p0771 with a connector output of your choice Parameter p0771 is assigned to the particular analog output via its index e g parameter p0771 0 is assigned to analog output 0 Example 2 U S To output the converter output current via analog output 0 you must interconnect AO 0 with the signal for the output current Set p0771 27 Parameters Table 6 6 Frequ...

Page 205: ... Absolute actual current smoothed Arms r0063 CO Speed actual value rpm You can find additional connector outputs in the parameter list Parameter list Page 470 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 203 ...

Page 206: ...HWWLQJV S 7KH LQSXW VLJQDOV DUH UHODWHG WR UHIHUHQFH YDULDEOH S U S KHQ S WKH XQLW LV 9 KHQ S WKH XQLW LV P ZLWK 2 WHQVLRQ 0RGXOH QDORJ RXWSXWV QSXW RXWSXW WHUPLQDOV y 2 1 S 9 S 9 U U S S S S PV S S P 2 1 S 9 S 9 U U S S S S PV S S P 2 1 S 9 S 9 U U S S S S PV S S P P P 9 9 P P Figure 6 9 FP 2261 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter 204 Operating Instructions 06 2019 F...

Page 207: ...0777 0 p0770 0 belong to analog output 0 You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular application Example Via analog output 0 the converter should convert a signal in the value range 0 100 into an output signal 6 mA 12 mA XUUHQW RXWSXW P P P S S S S Procedure 1 Set p0776 0 2 This defines analog output 0 as a current output 2 Set p0777 0 0 0 x1 3 Set p0...

Page 208: ...edure 1 Set the address with a commissioning tool via p0918 2 Switch off the converter power supply 3 Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark 4 Switch on the converter power supply again Your settings become effective after switching on The PROFIBUS address is set 6 3 3 2 Receive data and send data Overview Cyclic data exchange The converter receives cyclic data from the higher level control...

Page 209: ...pical applications certain telegrams are defined in the PROFIdrive profile and are assigned a fixed PROFIdrive telegram number As a consequence behind a PROFIdrive telegram number there is a defined signal composition As a consequence a telegram number uniquely describes cyclic data exchange The telegrams are identical for PROFIBUS and PROFINET 6 3 3 3 Telegrams Overview The user data of the teleg...

Page 210: ... 7HOHJUDP OHQJWK IRU WKH WUDQVPLW GDWD 67 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Unassigned interconnection and length Table 6 8 Abbreviations Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation PZD Process data PKW Parameter channel STW Control word MIST_GLATT Actual smoothed torque ZSW Status word PIST_GLATT Actual smoothed active power NSOLL_A Speed setpoint M_LIM Torque limit value NIST_A Speed actual va...

Page 211: ...n generator output to 0 p1140 0 r2090 4 1 Do not disable RFG The ramp function generator can be enabled 5 0 Stop RFG The output of the ramp function generator stops at the actual value p1141 0 r2090 5 1 Enable RFG The output of the ramp function generator fol lows the setpoint 6 0 Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp down time p1121 of the ramp function genera tor p1142 0 ...

Page 212: ...ing STW1 7 p2080 3 r2139 3 4 1 OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active p2080 4 r0899 4 5 1 OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active p2080 5 r0899 5 6 1 Switching on inhibited active It is only possible to switch on the motor after an OFF1 followed by ON p2080 6 r0899 6 7 1 Alarm active Motor remains switched on no acknowledge ment is necessary p2080 7 r2139 7 8 1 Speed deviation within ...

Page 213: ...it 3 p1023 0 r2093 3 4 1 DDS selection bit 0 Changes over between settings for different motors drive data sets p0820 r2093 4 5 1 DDS selection bit 1 p0821 r2093 5 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 1 technology controller enable p2200 0 r2093 8 9 1 enable DC braking p1230 0 r2093 9 10 Not used 11 1 Enable droop Enable or inhibit speed control ler droop p1492 0 r2093 11 12 1 torque control active 0 speed con...

Page 214: ... output at the lower limit Technology controller output p2292 11 1 technology controller output at the upper limit Technology controller out put p2291 12 Not used 13 Not used 14 Not used 15 Not used Fault word according to the VIK NAMUR definition MELD_NAMUR Bit Significance P no 0 1 Control Unit signals a fault p2051 5 r3113 1 1 line fault Phase failure or inadmissible voltage 2 1 DC link overvol...

Page 215: ...K Description Response identifier positive negative 0 No request 0 7 8 1 Request parameter value 1 2 7 8 2 Change parameter value word 1 7 8 3 Change parameter value double word 2 7 8 4 Request descriptive element 1 3 7 8 6 2 Request parameter value field 1 4 5 7 8 7 2 Change parameter value field word 1 4 7 8 8 2 Change parameter value field double word 1 5 7 8 9 Request number of field elements ...

Page 216: ...meters 05 hex Incorrect data type change request with a value that does not match the data type of the parameter 06 hex Setting not permitted only resetting change request with a value not equal to 0 without permission 07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed change request to a descriptive element error value that cannot be changed 0B hex No master control change request but with no master co...

Page 217: ...mber PNU Page index 0000 1999 0000 1999 0 hex 2000 3999 0000 1999 80 hex 6000 7999 0000 1999 90 hex 8000 9999 0000 1999 20 hex 10000 11999 0000 1999 A0 hex 20000 21999 0000 1999 50 hex 30000 31999 0000 1999 F0 hex 60000 61999 0000 1999 74 hex Subindex For indexed parameters the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value PWE Parameter value or connector Parameter values or connecto...

Page 218: ...ate the automatic restart with acknowledge all faults and restart for an ON command p1210 must be set to 26 PKE bit 12 15 AK 7 change parameter value field word PKE bit 0 10 PNU 4BA hex 1210 4BA hex no offset as 1210 1999 IND bit 8 15 subindex 0 hex parameter is not indexed IND bit 0 7 page index 0 hex offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex PWE1 bit 0 15 0 hex PWE2 Bit 0 15 1A hex 26 1A hex 3DUDPHWHU FKDQQ...

Page 219: ... Bit 0 9 2 hex Index of Parameter DI 2 2 3DUDPHWHU FKDQQHO 3 KLJK UG ZRUG 3 ORZ WK ZRUG 1 QG ZRUG 3DJH LQGH 3DUDPHWHU QXPEHU 6XELQGH 3DUDPHWHU YDOXH 3 VW ZRUG ULYH 2EMHFW QGH Figure 6 14 Parameter channel to assign digital input 2 with ON OFF1 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 217 ...

Page 220: ...reated the precondition to freely interconnect the signals transferred in the telegram Function description Interconnection of the process data 3 VHQG ZRUG 3 VHQG ZRUG 3 VHQG ZRUG 3 VHQG ZRUG 3 VHQG ZRUG 3 1R 3 1R 3 1R 3 1R 3 1R 3 1R 3 1R 3 1R 3 1R 3 1R 6HQG ZRUG YDOXH GRXEOHZRUG 6HQG ZRUG SDUDPHWHU QXPEHU GRXEOHZRUG 6HQG ZRUG YDOXH ZRUG 6HQG ZRUG SDUDPHWHU QXPEHU ZRUG U S U S S U U S S U U S S U ...

Page 221: ...50 and p2051 Freely interconnecting signals in the telegram Interconnect additional PZD send words and PZD receive words with signals of your choice via parameters r2050 and p2051 Parameter Number Name Factory setting p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection 1 r2050 0 11 CO PROFIdrive PZD receive word p2051 0 16 CI PROFIdrive PZD send word 0 or dependent on the converter r2053 0 16 PROFIdrive diagn...

Page 222: ...nd writing converter parameters Overview The converter supports the writing and reading of parameters via acyclic communication 6 3 3 7 Reading and changing parameters via data set 47 Note Values in italics Values in italics in the following tables mean that you have to adjust these values for a specific request Reading parameter values Table 6 13 Request to read parameters Data block Byte n Bytes...

Page 223: ...G120 always 1 Number of parameters m identical to the read request 2 Values parameter 1 Format 02 hex Integer8 03 hex Integer16 04 hex Integer32 05 hex Unsigned8 06 hex Unsigned16 07 hex Unsigned32 08 hex FloatingPoint 0A hex OctetString 0D hex TimeDifference 34 hex TimeOfDay without date indication 35 hex TimeDifference with date indication 36 hex TimeDifference without date indication 41 hex Byt...

Page 224: ... Unsigned 16 07 hex Unsigned 32 08 hex Floating Point 0A hex Octet String 0D hex Time Difference 34 hex TimeOfDay without date indication 35 hex TimeDifference with date indication 36 hex TimeDifference without date indication 41 hex Byte 42 hex Word 43 hex Double word Number of index values 00 hex EA hex Value of the 1st index Values parameter 2 Values parameter m Table 6 16 Response if the conve...

Page 225: ...Incorrect data type change request with a value that does not match the data type of the parameter 06 hex Setting not permitted only resetting change request with a value not equal to 0 without permission 07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed change request to a descriptive element that cannot be changed 09 hex Description data not available access to a description that does not exist param...

Page 226: ... hex Change request is not possible for internal reasons p0010 29 77 hex Change request is not possible during download 81 hex Change request is not possible during download 82 hex Accepting the master control is inhibited via BI p0806 83 hex Desired interconnection is not possible the connector output does not supply a float value although the connector input requires a float value 84 hex Convert...

Page 227: ...following parameters apply for EtherNet IP even if the parameter names seem to indicate PROFINET p8921 IP address You can find the currently valid address in r8931 p8923 subnet mask You can find the currently valid subnet mask in r8933 p8922 default gateway You can find the currently valid default gateway in r8932 p8920 name of station p8925 2 Save and activate interface configuration 2 Switch off...

Page 228: ...A AC DC Drive profile You must switch the converter power supply off and switch it on again if you wish to change the following parameters so that the changes become effective Setting the off response for the motor You set the standard off response for the converter using parameter p8981 p8981 0 OFF1 factory setting also corresponds to the setting in the SINAMICS profile p8981 1 OFF2 Setting the s...

Page 229: ...e EtherNet IP system management Identity Object Instance Number 1 hex Supported services Class Get Attribute all Get Attribute single Instance Get Attribute all Get Attribute single Reset Table 6 19 Class Attribute No Service Type Name 1 get UINT16 Revision 2 get UINT16 Max Instance 3 get UINT16 Num of Instances Table 6 20 Instance Attribute No Service Type Name Value explanation 1 get UINT16 Vend...

Page 230: ...s 1 3 Reserved 4 7 Extended De vice Status 0 Self test or status not known 1 Firmware update active 2 At least one I O connection with error 3 No I O connections 4 Incorrect configuration in the ROM 5 Fatal fault 6 At least one I O connection is active 7 All I O connections in the quiescent state 8 15 Reserved 2 8 11 Not used 12 15 Reserved Assembly Object Instance Number 4 hex Supported services ...

Page 231: ... UINT16 Revision 2 get UINT16 Max Instance 3 get UINT16 Num of Instances Table 6 25 Instance Attribute No Service Type Name Value explanation 1 get UINT16 OpenReqs Counters 2 get UINT16 OpenFormat Re jects Counters 3 get UINT16 OpenResource Rejects Counters 4 get UINT16 OpenOther Re jects Counters 5 get UINT16 CloseReqs Counters 6 get UINT16 CloseFormat Re jects Counters 7 get UINT16 CloseOther Re...

Page 232: ...current 7 get set UINT16 Rated Voltage p0304 rated motor voltage 8 get set UINT32 Rated Power p0307 rated motor power 9 get set UINT16 Rated Frequency p0310 rated motor frequency 10 get set UINT16 Rated Tempera ture p0605 motor temperature threshold 11 get set UINT16 Max Speed p0322 maximum motor speed 12 get set UINT16 Pole Count p0314 value of p0314 2 13 get set UINT32 Torque Constant p0316 moto...

Page 233: ...cage induction motor PM synchronous motor non standard motor switched reluctance motor non standard motor PM synchronous motor non standard motor non standard motor non standard motor Supervisor Object Instance Number 29 hex Supported services Class Get Attribute single Instance Get Attribute single Set Attribute single Table 6 28 Class Attribute No Serv ice Type Name 1 get UINT16 Revision 2 get U...

Page 234: ...trol 1 Control from network 0 Local control Drive Object Instance Number 2A hex Supported services Class Get Attribute single Instance Get Attribute single Set Attribute single Table 6 30 Class Attribute No Serv ice Type Name 1 get UINT16 Revision 2 get UINT16 Max Instance 3 get UINT16 Num of Instances Table 6 31 Instance Attribute No Serv ice Type Name Value explanation 3 get Bool At reference r2...

Page 235: ...d 22 get set SINT Speed Scale p8982 Ethernet IP ODVA speed scaling 29 get Bool Ref From Net Internal display of Net_Reference 0 Local 1 Network Value in p1300 Ethernet IP motor data object 0 V f with linear characteristic 1 Open loop speed frequency 1 V f with linear characteristic and FCC 0 Vendor specific mode 2 V f with parabolic characteristic 4 V f with linear characteristic and ECO 7 V f for...

Page 236: ...D D Gain p2274 technology controller differentia tion time constant 46 REAL get set PID P Gain p2280 technology controller proportion al gain 47 REAL get set PID I Gain p2285 technology controller integral time 48 REAL get set PID Up Limit p2291 technology controller maximum limiting 49 REAL get set PID Down Limit p2292 technology controller minimum limiting 50 REAL get Speed setpoint r0020 speed ...

Page 237: ...umber 7 77 UINT16 get Fault Code 8 r0947 7 fault number 8 78 REAL get Pulse Frequency r1801 pulse frequency 79 UINT16 get Alarm Code 1 r2110 0 alarm number 1 80 UINT16 get Alarm Code 2 r2110 1 alarm number 2 81 UINT16 get Alarm Code 3 r2110 2 alarm number 3 82 UINT16 get Alarm Code 4 r2110 3 alarm number 4 83 REAL get PID setpoint Output r2260 technology controller setpoint af ter the ramp functio...

Page 238: ... TCP IP Interface Object Instance Number F5 hex Supported services Class Get Attribute all Get Attribute single Instance Get Attribute all Get Attribute single Set Attribute single Table 6 36 Class Attribute No Service Type Name 1 get UINT16 Revision 2 get UINT16 Max Instance 3 get UINT16 Num of Instances Table 6 37 Instance Attribute No Service Type Name Value explanation 1 get UNIT32 Status Fixe...

Page 239: ... OM flash Remote MAC UNIT8 local OM flash ARP PDU Link Object Instance Number F6 hex Supported services Class Get Attribute all Get Attribute single Instance Get Attribute all Get Attribute single Set Attribute single Table 6 38 Class Attribute No Service Type Name 1 get UINT16 Revision 2 get UINT16 Max Instance 3 get UINT16 Num of Instances Table 6 39 Instance Attribute No Service Type Name Value...

Page 240: ...pass the FCS check UINT32 Single Collisions Structure successfully transmitted precisely one col lision UINT32 Multiple Colli sions Structure successfully transmitted several collisions UINT32 SQE Test Errors Number of SQE errors UINT32 Deferred Trans missions First transmission attempt delayed UINT32 Late Collisions Number of collisions that occurred delayed by 512 bit timers to the request UINT3...

Page 241: ... values Class 401 hex Instance 2050 802 hex corresponds to the parameter number Attribute 10 A hex corresponds to index 10 Example Parameter 1520 0 writing upper torque limit Set Attribute single function with the following values Class 401 hex Instance 1520 5F0 hex corresponds to the parameter number Attribute 0 0 hex corresponds to index 0 Data 500 0 value Supported ODVA AC DC assemblies Overvie...

Page 242: ...rol create a generic device with Ethernet IP functionality 2 In the control enter the lengths for the process data for cyclic communication in the new device which you set in the converter r2067 0 input r2067 1 output for example Standard telegram 2 2 4 ms is supported as the minimum value for RPI Requested Packet Interval 3 In the converter set the same values for IP address subnet mask default g...

Page 243: ...et IP command Set Attribute Single class F5 hex attribute 3 The following options are available via an EtherNet IP controller via an EtherNet IP commissioning tool You have now integrated the converter into Ethernet Displays r8930 Device name of the converter r8934 Operating mode PN or DHCP r8935 MAC address Additional information You can find information about parameters and messages A08565 in th...

Page 244: ...missioning 2 In the first steps of the quick commissioning confirm all of the values that have already been set 3 Select one of the following default settings 51 Modbus RTU control 52 Modbus RTU control local remote Default setting of the interfaces macros Page 107 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter 242 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 245: ...wing effect Only the ON OFF2 command is possible via the terminal strip The higher level controller cannot turn the motor on or off To turn the motor on and off via the higher level controller you need to manually interconnect the ON OFF1 and OFF2 commands with the PROFIdrive control word Set p0840 0 r2090 0 Set p0844 0 r2090 1 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Oper...

Page 246: ...ription Factory setting p2021 Fieldbus interface address 0 6 3 5 3 Parameters for setting communication via Modbus RTU General settings Fieldbus protocol selection p2030 2 Modbus RTU Baud rate p2020 7 19200 bit s Setting range 4800 bit s 187500 bit s Parity In the factory the Control Unit is set for controllers with even parity You can adapt the parity at your controller using p2031 p2031 0 No par...

Page 247: ...istics r2029 Displaying receive errors at the fieldbus interface Interconnecting analog outputs If you set communication via Modbus p2030 2 then the analog outputs of the converter are internally interconnected with the fieldbus analog outputs p0771 0 791 0 p0771 1 791 1 The values for p0791 0 and p0791 1 are written via registers 40523 and 40524 Interconnections between parameter p0791 and other ...

Page 248: ...ication via Modbus p2030 2 when restoring the factory settings the analog outputs are again interconnected with p0771 0 791 0 and p0771 1 791 1 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter 246 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 249: ...telegram W W W W W W W FKDUDFWHU GHOD WLPH ุ E WH ุ E WH DWD 0RGEXV 578 WHOHJUDP E WHV E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH E WH SSOLNDWLRQ DWD 8QLW 0RGEXV IUDPH SSOLNDWLRQ DWD 8QLW 0RGEXV IUDPH QGH GHOD 6WDUW GHOD XQFWLRQ RGH QWHU IUDPH GHOD QWHU IUDPH GHOD 6ODYH 5 ORZ 5 KLJK 5 3URWRFRO DWD 8QLW 3 8 Figure 6 17 Modbus with delay times The data area of the telegram is structured according to th...

Page 250: ...ms 8 021 ms 3 438 ms 9600 1 146 ms 4 010 ms 1 719 ms 19200 factory setting 0 573 ms 1 75 ms 0 859 ms 38400 0 286 ms 1 75 ms 0 75 ms 57600 0 191 ms 1 75 ms 0 556 ms 76800 0 143 ms 1 75 ms 0 417 ms 93750 0 117 ms 1 75 ms 0 341 ms 115200 0 095 ms 1 75 ms 0 278 ms 187500 0 059 ms 1 75 ms 0 171 ms Note The factory setting for p2024 1 and p2024 2 is 0 The converter defines the particular values dependin...

Page 251: ...ling Data parameter 40100 Control word R W 1 Process data 1 40101 Main setpoint R W 1 Process data 2 40110 Status word R 1 Process data 1 40111 Main actual value R 1 Process data 2 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 249 ...

Page 252: ...HIGH LOW r0722 5 Analog inputs 40260 AI 0 R 100 300 0 300 0 r0755 0 40261 AI 1 R 100 300 0 300 0 r0755 1 Table 6 44 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters converter data Regis ter Description Ac cess Unit Scaling ON OFF text value range Data parameter 40300 Powerstack number R 1 0 32767 r0200 40301 Converter firmware R 1 e g 470 r0018 10000 40320 Rated power R kW 100 0 327 67 r0206 40321...

Page 253: ... 1 0 32767 r2110 0 40409 Actual alarm code R 1 0 32767 r2132 40499 PRM ERROR code R 1 0 255 Table 6 46 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters technology controller Regis ter Description Ac cess Unit Scaling ON OFF text value range Data parameter 40500 Technology controller enable R W 1 0 1 p2200 r2349 0 40501 Technology controller MOP R W 100 200 0 200 0 p2240 Technology controller adjus...

Page 254: ...ol R W 40602 DS47 header R W 40603 DS47 data 1 R W 40722 DS47 data 120 R W Table 6 49 Modbus registers for multi pump control Register Last reg ister Description Ac cess Unit Scaling ON OFF text value range Data parameter 40800 Status word R 1 0 65535 p29529 40801 Motor index speed control R 1 0 3 p29538 40802 Status word service mode R 1 0 65535 p29544 40804 40805 Motor 1 operating hours R W h 10...

Page 255: ...quest length bytes Request data Activate acyclic access 2 47 Response length bytes Response data Response for a successful request 2 47 0 Error code Response for an erronous request Error codes 1 hex Invalid Length invalid length 2 hex Invalid State in the current converter state this action is not permitted 3 hex Invalid function code FC 2F hex 4 hex Response not ready the response has still not ...

Page 256: ...tructure of a read request via Modbus function code 03 FC 03 Any valid register address is permitted as the start address Via FC 03 the control can address more than one register with one request The number of addressed registers is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the read request Table 6 50 Structure of a read request via slave number 17 example Value Byte Description 11 h 0 Slave address 03 h 00 h...

Page 257: ... value The start address and the number of registers of an address are located outside of a defined register block Exception code 02 invalid data address Structure of a write request via Modbus function code 06 FC 06 Start address is the holding register address Via FC 06 with one request only precisely one register can be addressed The value which is written to the addressed register is contained...

Page 258: ...eters acyclically via FC 16 Via FC 16 with one request up to 122 registers can be written to directly one after the other while for Write Single Register FC 06 you must individually write the header data for each register Header In addition to the slave address enter the transfer type the start address and the number of the following registers in the header User data You control the access in the ...

Page 259: ...the parameter value of r0002 from slave number 17 Value Byte Description 11 h 0 Slave address 03 h 0258 h 0007 h 0010 h 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Function code read Register start address Number of registers to be read 40601 40607 Number of registers xx h xx h 8 9 CRC Low CRC High Table 6 58 Response for successful read operation Value Byte Description 11 h 0 Slave address 03 h 20 h 0002 h 2F08 h 8001 h 0101 ...

Page 260: ... 24 25 26 Function code write multiple Register start address Number of registers to be written to 40601 40610 Number of data bytes 10 registers each 2 bytes 20 bytes 40601 C1 activate request 40602 Function 2F h 47 request length 16 bytes 10 h 40603 Request reference 80 h request identifier 2 h write 40604 DO Id 1 number of parameters 1 40605 Attribute number of elements 1 40606 Parameter number ...

Page 261: ...rresponds to 16 registers 40601 DS47 Control 1 request is processed 40602 Function 2F h 47 response length 0 fault 40603 Error code 0004 Response Not Ready response has still not been issued xx h xx h 9 10 CRC Low CRC High 6 3 5 10 Communication procedure Procedure for communication in a normal case Normally the master sends a telegram to a slave address range 1 247 The slave sends a response tele...

Page 262: ...se time is the time in which the Modbus master expects a response to a request Set the same slave response time p2024 0 in the converter in the master and slave Process data monitoring time setpoint timeout p2040 Setpoint timeout F1910 is issued by the Modbus if p2040 is set to a value 0 ms and no process data is requested within this time period The Setpoint timeout only applies for access to pro...

Page 263: ...commissioning confirm all additional values that have already been set 5 Exit quick commissioning You have activated communication via USS ON OFF commands via USS Selecting the macros 54 and 55 has the following effect Only the ON OFF2 command is possible via the terminal strip The higher level controller cannot turn the motor on or off To turn the motor on and off via the higher level controller ...

Page 264: ... Overview A USS telegram comprises a series of elements with a defined sequence Each element contains 11 bits 6WDUW GHOD 866 IUDPH Q QHW GDWD LQDO LQIRUPDWLRQ HDGHU LQIRUPDWLRQ ELW GDWD LW 6WRS LW 3 HYHQ LW 6WDUW 67 5 Q Figure 6 18 Structure of a USS telegram Telegram part Description Start delay re sponse delay There is always a start and or response delay between two telegrams Telegram monitorin...

Page 265: ...egram Overview The user data of the telegram consist of the following elements Parameter channel PIV for writing and reading parameter values Process data PZD for controlling the drive 3 9 3 VWUXFWXUH DWD E WH RJ GDWD 3DUDPHWHU FKDQQHO 3 9 RJ ZRUGV YDULDEOH OHQJWK 3URFHVV GDWD 3 3 1 3 3 3 P 3 3 3 3 3 P 3 3 3 6 3 3 S S S S S S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 67 6 67 6 Figure 6 19 USS telegram user data structu...

Page 266: ...Parameter Description Factory setting p2022 Fieldbus interface USS PZD number 2 p2023 Fieldbus interface USS PKW number 127 6 3 6 5 USS process data channel PZD Function description The process data channel PZD contains the following data depending on the transmission direction Control words and setpoints for the slave Status words and actual values for the master QVZHU WR 866 PDVWHU 5HTXLUHPHQW W...

Page 267: ...on generator can be enabled 5 0 Stop RFG The output of the ramp function generator stops at the actual value p1141 0 r2090 5 1 Enable RFG The output of the ramp function generator follows the setpoint 6 0 Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp down time p1121 of the ramp function generator p1142 0 r2090 6 1 Enable setpoint Motor accelerates to the setpoint with the ramp up t...

Page 268: ... 6 7 1 Alarm active Motor remains switched on no acknowledgement is necessary p2080 7 r2139 7 8 1 Speed deviation within the tolerance range Setpoint actual value deviation within the tolerance range p2080 8 r2197 7 9 1 Master control re quested The automation system is requested to accept the converter control p2080 9 r0899 9 10 1 Comparison speed reached or exceeded Speed is greater than or equa...

Page 269: ...WHOHJUDP UXQWLPH 5HVLGXDO UXQWLPH FRPSUHVVHG WHOHJUDP RI FRPSUHVVHG WHOHJUDP UHVLGXDO UXQWLPH Q 5 67 Q 5 67 Figure 6 21 Telegram runtime as the sum of the residual runtime and character delay times The total telegram runtime is always less than 150 of the pure residual runtime Before each request telegram the master must maintain the start delay The start delay must be 2 character runtime The slav...

Page 270: ...nication via USS the converter checks bit 10 of the received control word 1 If the bit is not set when the motor is switched on Operation the converter responds with fault F07220 Parameters Parameter Description Factory setting p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time 1 000 ms 6 3 6 7 USS parameter channel Structure of the parameter channel Depending on the setting in p2023 the parameter channel h...

Page 271: ...ge parameter value field word 1 4 7 8 8 2 Change parameter value field double word 1 5 7 8 9 Request number of field elements 6 7 8 1 The required element of the parameter is specified in IND 2nd word 2 The following request IDs are identical 1 6 2 7 and 3 8 We recommend that you use identifiers 6 7 and 8 Table 6 68 Response identifiers converter control AK Description 0 No response 1 Transfer par...

Page 272: ...927 0C hex Keyword missing 11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state access is not possible for temporary reasons that are not specified 14 hex Inadmissible value change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal for other permanent reasons i e a parameter with defined individual values 65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated depending on the mo...

Page 273: ...2 Parameter value Bit 15 0 Bit 15 8 Bit 7 0 0 0 8 bit value 0 16 bit value 32 bit value Connector Bit 15 0 Bit 15 10 Bit 9 0 Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field number of the connec tor Examples Read request Read out serial number of the Power Module p7841 2 To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841 you must fill the telegram of the parameter channel with the following d...

Page 274: ...he parameter number minus the offset into the PNU PKE bit 10 0 Write the offset in the page index IND bit 15 8 Table 6 71 Offset and page index of the parameter numbers Parameter number Offset Page index Hex Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 0000 1999 0 0 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2000 3999 2000 80 hex 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6000 7999 6000 90 hex 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 8000 9999 8000 20 hex 0 0 1 ...

Page 275: ... the parameter channel with the following data PKE bit 12 15 AK 6 request parameter value field PKE bit 0 10 PNU 1841 parameter number without offset Parameter number PNU offset page index 7841 1841 6000 IND bit 8 15 page index 90 hex offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex IND bit 0 7 subindex 2 index of parameter Because you want to read the parameter value words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for r...

Page 276: ...AMICS G120 always 63 3f hex PWE2 bit 0 9 2 hex index or bit number of the parameter DI 2 r0722 2 3DUDPHWHU FKDQQHO 3 KLJK UG ZRUG 3 ORZ WK ZRUG 1 QG ZRUG 3DJH LQGH 3DUDPHWHU QXPEHU 6XELQGH 3DUDPHWHU YDOXH 3 VW ZRUG ULYH 2EMHFW QGH Figure 6 26 Telegram to assign DI 2 with ON OFF1 6 3 7 Drive control via BACnet MS TP 6 3 7 1 BACnet properties Function description In BACnet components and systems are...

Page 277: ...P 2 operator panel Page 159 2 In the first steps of the quick commissioning confirm all of the values that have already been set 3 Select the default setting 54 USS control Default setting of the interfaces macros Page 107 4 In the next steps of the quick commissioning confirm all additional values that have already been set 5 Exit quick commissioning 6 Set p2030 5 You have activated communication...

Page 278: ...onverter power supply 3 Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark 4 Switch on the converter power supply again Your settings become active after switching on You have set the bus address Parameters Parameter Description Factory setting p2021 Fieldbus interface address 0 Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter 276 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC...

Page 279: ...set the converter value changes for which an UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or ConfirmedCOV_Notification result is sent The factory setting 1 means that the converter sends an UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or ConfirmedCOV_Notification if the considered value e g for a range of 0 10 V changes by an absolute value 1 This requires an active SubscribeCOV_Service to send the relevant object instance You can...

Page 280: ...storing factory settings If you set communication via BACnet the converter switches its analog outputs with the fieldbus The control then specifies the values which the converter outputs via its analog outputs To display a converter specific value you must change the interconnection of the analog output Examples AO 0 should display the value which the control specifies in the ANALOG OUTPUT 0 objec...

Page 281: ...ty DM DDB B Device Management Dynamic Device Binding B Who Is I Am DM DOB B Device Management Dynamic Object Binding B Who Has I Have DM DCC B Device Management DeviceCommuni cationControl B DeviceCommunicationControl DS COV B Data Sharing COV B SubscribeCOV ConfirmedCOVNotification UnConfirmedCOVNotification The converter can simultaneously process up to 32 SubscribeCOV services These can all ref...

Page 282: ...n Model_Name Max_APDU_Length_Accepted 1 Firmware_Revision Segmentation_Supported 2 1 Length 480 2 not supported Properties of the other object types Property Object type Binary In put BI Binary Out put BO Binary Val ue BV Analog In put AI Analog Output AO Analog Value AV Multi State Input MSI Octet String val ues Object_Identifier X X X X X X X X Object_Name X X X X X X X X Object_Type X X X X X X...

Page 283: ...F R r0722 11 BI9 DI8 ACT Status AI 1 used as DI 12 ON OFF ON OFF R r0722 12 BI10 DO0 ACT Status DO 0 relay 1 ON OFF ON OFF R read r747 0 BI11 DO1 ACT Status DO 1 relay 2 ON OFF ON OFF R read r747 1 BI12 DO2 ACT Status DO 2 relay 3 ON OFF ON OFF R read r747 2 BI13 DO3 ACT Status DO 3 relay 2 ON OFF ON OFF R read r747 3 BI14 DO4 ACT Status DO 4 relay 3 ON OFF ON OFF R read r747 4 1 R Readable Binary...

Page 284: ...eadable Analog Output AO In stance ID Object name Description Unit Range Access type 1 Parameter AO0 ANALOG OUTPUT 0 Output signal AO 0 converter depend ent C p0791 0 AO1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Output signal AO 1 converter depend ent C p0791 1 AO2 ANALOG OUTPUT 2 Output signal AO 2 converter depend ent C p0791 2 1 C Commandable Binary Value BV Instance ID Object name Description Possible values Text ac t...

Page 285: ...of rotation when controlling via BACnet REV FWD 0 1 C r0054 11 BV22 FAULT RE SET Acknowledge fault when controlling via BACnet RESET NO 0 1 C r0054 7 BV24 CDS Changeover drive control Local Remote YES NO C r0054 15 BV26 RUN ENA CMD Enable converter operation ENA BLED DISA BLED C r0054 3 BV27 OFF2 Status OFF2 RUN STOP 0 1 C r0054 1 BV28 OFF3 Status OFF3 BV28 sets the r0054 4 r0054 5 and r0054 6 bit...

Page 286: ...or temperature C converter depend ent R r0035 AV10 KWH NR Cumulative converter energy consumption cannot be reset kWh converter depend ent R r0039 AV12 INV RUN TIME Motor s operating hours is reset by entering 0 h 0 4294967295 W p0650 AV13 INV Model Code number of Power Module converter depend ent R r0200 AV14 INV FW VER Firmware version converter depend ent R r0018 AV15 INV POWER Rated power of t...

Page 287: ...AV41 PREV WARN 2 Indication of the last but one alarm converter depend ent R r2110 2 AV5000 RAMP UP TIME Technology controller ramp up time s 0 650 W p2257 AV5001 RAMP DOWN TIME Technology controller ramp down time s 0 650 W p2258 AV5002 FILTER TIME Technology controller actual val ue filter time constant s 0 60 W p2265 AV5003 DIFF TIME Technology controller differentia tion time constant s 0 60 W...

Page 288: ... gain s 0 1000 W p11180 AV5205 INTEG TIME 1 Technology controller integral time s 0 1000 W p11185 AV5206 OUTPUT MAX 1 Technology controller 1 maxi mum limiting 200 200 W p11191 AV5207 OUTPUT MIN 1 Technology controller 1 mini mum limiting 200 200 W p11192 AV5300 RAMP UP TIME 2 Technology controller 2 ramp up time s 0 650 W p11257 AV5301 RAMP DOWN TIME 2 Technology controller 2 ramp down time s 0 6...

Page 289: ...47 5 MSI6 FAULT_7 Fault number 7 R r0947 6 MSI7 FAULT_8 Fault number 8 R r0947 7 MSI8 WARNING_1 Warning number 1 R r2110 0 MS9 WARNING_2 Warning number 2 R r2110 1 MSI10 WARNING_3 Warning number 3 R r2110 2 MSI11 WARNING_4 Warning number 4 R r2110 3 MSI12 WARNING_5 Warning number 5 R r2110 4 MSI13 WARNING_6 Warning number 6 R r2110 5 MSI14 WARNING_7 Warning number 7 R r2110 6 MSI15 WARNING_8 Warni...

Page 290: ...est via OSV0 Byte Description 2F h 0A h 80 h 01 h 01 h 01 h 10 h 01 h 0002 h 0000 h 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Function code 2F h 47 Request length 10 bytes 0A h Request reference 80 h Request identifier 1 h DO Id 1 Number of parameters 1 Attribute Number of elements 1 Parameter number 2 Subindex 0 If the request was successfully processed then you can read out the response precisely once from the...

Page 291: ...ameter content again via OSV1 Byte Description 2F h 00 h 0002 h 1 2 3 4 Function code 2F h 47 response length 0 error Error code 2 h Invalid State Overview of the error codes 1 h Invalid Length invalid length 2 h Invalid State action is not permitted in the actual converter state 3 h Invalid function Code FC 2 hex 4 h Response not ready the response has still not been issued 5 h Internal Error gen...

Page 292: ...P VSHHG RJJLQJ 6HWSRLQW MRJJLQJ 6HWSRLQW MRJJLQJ RJJLQJ S S S W W W S S Figure 6 27 Behavior of the motor when jogging After switching on the motor accelerates to the setpoint jog 1 or setpoint jog 2 The two different setpoints can for example be assigned to motor clockwise and counter clockwise rotation When jogging the same ramp function generator is active as for the ON OFF1 command Example Par...

Page 293: ... Maximum speed 1500 rpm p1110 C BI Inhibit negative direction Depending on the converter p1111 C BI Inhibit positive direction 0 p1113 C BI Setpoint inversion 0 p1120 D Ramp function generator ramp up time Depending on the converter p1121 D Ramp function generator ramp down time Depending on the converter Advanced commissioning 6 3 Drive control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2...

Page 294: ...are called the command data set You select the command data set using parameter p0810 To do this you must interconnect parameter p0810 with a control command of your choice e g a digital input Changing the number of command data sets 1 Set p0010 15 2 The number of command data sets is configured with p0170 3 Set p0010 0 You have changed the number of command data sets Copying command data sets 1 S...

Page 295: ...ia the converter digital inputs at the installation Note The converter requires approx 4 ms to switch over the command data set Parameters Number Name Factory setting p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1 r0050 CO BO Command data set CDS effective p0170 Number of command data sets CDS 2 p0809 0 2 Copy command data set CDS 0 p0810 BI Command data set selection CDS bit 0 Dependent on the conv...

Page 296: ...otor power kW hp kW r1493 Total moment of inertia scaled kgm2 lb ft2 kgm2 1 Factory setting It is only possible to change the motor standard during quick commissioning 6 3 10 2 Unit system Some physical units depend on the system of units selected SI or US for example the power kW or hp or the torque Nm or lbf ft You can select in which system of units the converter represents its physical values ...

Page 297: ...ence speed 1500 rpm fixed speed 80 corresponds to the speed 1200 rpm Reference speed 3000 rpm fixed speed 80 corresponds to the speed 2400 rpm For each parameter you can find the associated reference variable for scaling in the parameter list Example r0065 is scaled with reference variable p2000 If scaling is not specified in the parameter list then the converter always shows displays the paramete...

Page 298: ...ical unit Unit group Additional technology controller 0 p11026 p11027 9_2 Additional technology controller 1 p11126 p11127 9_3 Additional technology controller 2 p11226 p11227 9_4 Additional information is provided in the parameter list 6 3 11 Safe Torque Off STO safety function 6 3 11 1 Safe Torque Off STO safety function Overview 6HOHFW 672 672 LV DFWLYH The converter with active STO function pr...

Page 299: ...6 28 Functionality of STO when the motor is at standstill A and rotating B A When selecting STO if the motor is already stationary zero speed then STO prevents the motor from starting B If the motor is still rotating B when STO is selected it coasts down to standstill Example The STO function is suitable for applications where the motor is already at a standstill or will come to a standstill in a ...

Page 300: ...k Switch off Either completely or partially switch off hazardous voltages Prevent movement Prevent hazardous movement Classic solution 0 Switch off the drive power supply Solution with the STO safety function inte grated in the drive Not possible STO is not suitable for switching off a voltage Select STO It is not necessary to switch off the voltage to minimize risk 6 3 11 2 Setting the feedback s...

Page 301: ... for safety function STO with the digital outputs of the converter Parameters Number Name Factory setting p0730 BI CU signal source for terminal DO 0 52 3 p0731 BI CU signal source for terminal DO 1 52 7 r1838 CO BO Gating unit status word 1 03 1 signal Shutdown path STO_B is inactive 04 1 signal Shutdown path STO_A is inactive Further information is provided in the parameter list Parameters Page ...

Page 302: ...W or above Note When using the multi pump function I O Extension Module is required to support more than two pumps For information about how to wiring the I O Extension Module see Section Terminal strips Page 101 Precondition Before using the multi pump control function make sure that you have connected pumps of the same power rating Function description The converter uses six relays KP1 to KP6 wh...

Page 303: ...sensor Interconnect the signal of the pressure sensor with the actual value input of the technology controller Figure 6 30 Mains circuit 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 Figure 6 31 External relay control circuit Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 301 ...

Page 304: ...ps check r0719 1 to ensure that the I O Extension Module is recognized after installing the module Note When the multi pump control is enabled p29520 1 the values of p1274 and p1264 are set to 0 automatically and you can modify the values if required Note Motor current peaks when switching the motor from converter operation to line operation If the motor is switched from converter operation to the...

Page 305: ...mode Note If the technology controller deviation rises above the overcontrol threshold p29526 the converter skips the delay time p29524 and performs the switch in operation immediately Parameter p29522 is used to define the selection mode for switching in motors p29522 0 Selecting the next pump according to the fixed sequence The converter switches in the pump by following the sequence M1 M2 M3 M4...

Page 306: ...O VWDWXV ZRUG 0XOWL SXPS FRQWURO VWDWXV ZRUG HE SDVV GHOD WLPH 3 HUURU LW RQGLWLRQV IRU SXPS VZLWFK LQ LW LW RQYHUWHU LQH RQYHUWHU LW LW S W W W W W W S S I IBDFW S S ุ 3 ุ S W S S S S S S S S U U 3 U Figure 6 32 Pump switch in Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter 304 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 307: ...according to the fixed sequence The converters first switches off a pump OFF2 which runs in converter operation following the sequence M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 and then captures a running pump and switches it from line operation to converter operation p29522 1 Selecting the next pump according to the operating hours The converter first switches out the pump with the most absolute operating hours p29530 0...

Page 308: ...URO VWDWXV ZRUG 0XOWL SXPS FRQWURO VWDWXV ZRUG 0XOWL SXPS FRQWURO VZLWFK RXW GHOD HE SDVV GHOD WLPH RQYHUWHU LQH RQYHUWHU LW LW S S S S S U W S S W W W W W S S 3 S I S S U U S ื 3 ื S W S IBDFW S S S Figure 6 33 Pump switch out based on the fixed sequence p29522 0 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter 306 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 309: ... Pump switch out based on the absolute operating hours p29522 1 Parameters Number Name Factory setting p0730 p0735 BI Signal source for digital outputs DO0 DO6 p1080 0 n Minimum speed 0 rpm 1 p1082 0 n Maximum speed 1500 rpm p1262 0 n Bypass dead time 1 s p1263 Debypass delay time 1 s p1264 Bypass delay time 1 s p1274 0 1 Bypass switch monitoring time 1000 ms Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump contro...

Page 310: ...op All pumps running in line operation are switched off simultaneously as soon as the stop command is received The pump in converter operation stops under the control of the converter Normal stop aims to quickly stop all the pumps under emergency situations such as pipe cracks or leakages Sequence stop The pumps running in line operation stop one by one in the reverse sequence in which they are sw...

Page 311: ...d while the converter is running Otherwise the parameter value may no longer correspond to the mapping of the motors connected 0RWRU VWRS PRGH VHOHFWLRQ LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LVSOD V ZKLFK PRWRU LV FRQWUROOHG E WKH LQYHUWHU 6HTXHQFH VWRS 1RUPDO VWRS U U S U 2 2 2 S S S LW LW LW LW Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209...

Page 312: ...eters Number Name Factory setting p29533 Multi pump control switch off sequence 0 p29537 Multi pump control disconnection lockout time 0 s r29538 Multi pump control variable speed motor For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 467 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter 310 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 313: ...22 0 Selecting the next pump according to the fixed sequence The converter first switches out the pump with the most continuous operating hours p29547 0 5 and then switches in a pump following the sequence of M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 p29522 1 Selecting the next pump according to the operating hours The converter switches out the pump with the most continuous operating hours p29547 0 5 and then switches i...

Page 314: ...ossible alarms and faults With pump switchover enabled if the continuous operating hours p29547 of the pump exceed the threshold p29531 while the pump switchover is not possible r29529 18 1 alarm A52962 appears In this case increase p29531 or reset p29547 to clear the alarm Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter 312 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 315: ...pectively Pumps set to service mode are skipped in further multi pump control process WARNING Risk of electric shock due to incorrectly connected low voltage circuit breakers If a low voltage circuit breaker is not connected correctly to a pump set in service mode hazardous voltages can be present at the pump when the converter relay malfunctions Troubleshooting the service pump can result in seri...

Page 316: ...HU RQYHUWHU RQYHUWHU RQYHUWHU RQYHUWHU RQYHUWHU RQYHUWHU LQH 6HUYLFH 6HUYLFH 6HUYLFH LQH LQH LQH LQH LQH S W W W U U S U W S S S S LW LW LW LW LW LW U W LW LW W LW LW LW LW U LW LW W LW LW LW LW U LW LW Figure 6 37 Service mode Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter 314 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 317: ... alarms and faults see Section Warnings faults and system messages Page 959 Parameters Number Name Factory setting p29540 Multi pump control service mode enable 0 p29542 BO CO Multi pump control service mode interlock manually p29543 0 5 BI Multi pump control motor under repair 0 p29542 0 1 p29542 1 2 p29542 2 3 p29542 3 4 p29542 4 5 p29542 5 r29544 Multi pump control index of motors under repair ...

Page 318: ...with PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces set p29651 2090 0 and p29652 2090 1 Function description OFF1 OFF3 OFF3 disables frost protection function while OFF1 enables this function again OFF2 fault The motor stops and the frost protection function is deactivated DXOW 6SHHG S 2 21 2 2 2 2 2 S W 2 Note If you want to run frost protection make sure that Operator Panels BOP 2 or IOP 2 or G120 Smart Ac...

Page 319: ... protection enable 0 p29623 Frost protection speed 0 rpm For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 467 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 317 ...

Page 320: ...n Precondition Before enabling the condensation protection make sure that p0840 r29659 0 p0844 r29659 1 p1143 r29640 0 and p1144 r29641 Note For converters with PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces set p29651 2090 0 and p29652 2090 1 Function description OFF1 OFF3 OFF3 disables the condensation protection function while OFF1 enables this function again OFF2 fault The motor stops and the condensatio...

Page 321: ...eed p29623 0 and condensation protection current p29624 0 condensation protection is activated by applying the specified current to the motor Parameters Number Name Factory setting p29622 BI Frost protection enable 0 p29624 Condensation protection current 30 For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 467 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter Op...

Page 322: ...rning A52961 To enable cavitation protetion set p29625 1 or 2 After you have enabled cavitation protection the following preconditions should also be met to activate cavitation protection Cavitation protection threshold p29626 is set according to experience The value is lower than the normal actual flow or pressure p29626 is a percentage of feedback output for triggering a fault or warning r2272 i...

Page 323: ...7ULJJHU ZDUQLQJ 7ULJJHU IDXOW DYLWDWLRQ SURWHFWLRQ GLVDEOHG S S U U U V U 7 ุ S S Parameters Number Name Factory setting p29625 Cavitation protection enable 0 p29626 Cavitation protection threshold 40 p29627 Cavitation protection time 30 s For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 467 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instruction...

Page 324: ...he motors Parameter p29590 is used to select the deragging mode p29590 1 enabled on first run after power up p29590 2 enabled on every run p29590 3 enabled with a Binector input p29591 6SHHG W 5DPS XS WLPH 5DPS GRZQ WLPH 5HYHUVH VHWSRLQW RUZDUG VHWSRLQW 1XPEHU RI GHUDJJLQJ F FOHV 5HYHUVH WLPH RUZDUG WLPH 5DPS GRZQ WLPH 5DPS XS WLPH S S S S S S S S S 21 2 Parameters Number Name Factory setting p295...

Page 325: ...bout the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 467 Interaction with other functions Deragging signal is ignored if the converter is restarted under the command of essential service mode bypass operation automatic restart hibernation mode or multi pump switching in Deragging is interrupted if essential service mode bypass or hibernation mode is activated Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SIN...

Page 326: ...er each power up to avoid hammer effect to the pipe If the pipe filling is interrupted for example fault occurs the function continues after the converter is recovered This function is used in horizontal vertical and mixed piping systems Precondition Before enabling the pipe filling make sure that p1143 r29640 0 and p1144 r29641 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter 324 ...

Page 327: ...1 1 The converter fills the pipe according to the PID feedback from the pressure sensor The filling stops when the actual pressure r2272 the threshold p29614 for a specified time p29615 3UHVVXUH 3LSH ILOOLQJ WKUHVKROG 3LSH ILOOLQJ VSHHG 6SHHG 2SHUDWLRQ 3LSH ILOOLQJ PRQLWRULQJ WLPH S W S W S Note Priority of deragging and pipe filling The priority of functions is as follows deragging pipe filling A...

Page 328: ... speed 900 rpm p29613 Pipe filling time 50 s p29614 Pipe filling threshold 10 p29615 Pipe filling monitoring time 0 s For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 467 Advanced commissioning 6 4 Pump control SINAMICS G120X converter 326 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 329: ...he main setpoint Converter fieldbus interface Analog input of the converter Motorized potentiometer emulated in the converter Fixed setpoints saved in the converter You have the same selection options when selecting the source of the supplementary setpoint Under the following conditions the converter switches from the main setpoint to other setpoints When the technology controller is active and ap...

Page 330: ...as setpoint source Parameter Description p1070 755 0 Interconnects main setpoint with analog input 0 p1075 755 0 Interconnects supplementary setpoint with analog input 0 Parameters Number Name Factory setting r0755 0 1 CO CU analog inputs actual value in percent p1070 C CI Main setpoint Dependent on the converter p1071 C CI Main setpoint scaling 1 r1073 CO Main setpoint active rpm p1075 C CI Suppl...

Page 331: ... Parameter Description p1070 2050 1 Interconnects the main setpoint with the receive word PZD02 from the fieldbus p1075 2050 1 Interconnects the supplementary setpoint with receive word PZD02 from the field bus Parameters Number Name Factory setting p1070 C CI Main setpoint Dependent on the converter p1071 C CI Main setpoint scaling 1 r1073 CO Main setpoint active rpm p1075 C CI Supplementary setp...

Page 332: ...FDOLQJ 6FDOLQJ 6XSSOHPHQWDU VHWSRLQW S S S S S U U S U Figure 6 41 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source 023 ORZHU 023 UDLVH QPD QPD 6HWSRLQW 21 2 S U S S S S W W W W Figure 6 42 Function chart of the motorized potentiometer Example Setting with the motorized potentiometer as setpoint source Parameter Description p1070 1050 Interconnects the main setpoint with the motorized potentiometer outp...

Page 333: ... VHW WR WKH VDYHG YDOXH 7KH VHWSRLQW IRU WKH PRWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU LV QRW VDYHG DQG DIWHU 21 LV HQWHUHG XVLQJ S 6DYH LQ 195 0 DFWLYH QLWLDO URXQGLQJ RII DFWLYH XWRPDWLF PRGH 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU DFWLYH DWD VDYH DFWLYH USP 0RW SRWL VHWSRLQW 0RS UDPS XS WLPH 0RS UDPS GRZQ WLPH 0RW3 DFF VHW YDO 0RS VHW YDO 0RS QBVHW EHI 5 USP 0RS PDQXDO DXWR 0RS DXWR VHWSRLQW 0RW3 LQY 67 VHWSRLQW FKDQ 67 VHWSRLQ...

Page 334: ...Dependent on the converter p1071 C CI Main setpoint scaling 1 r1073 CO Main setpoint active rpm p1075 C CI Supplementary setpoint 0 p1076 C CI Supplementary setpoint scaling 1 Table 6 79 Extended setup of motorized potentiometer Number Name Factory setting p1030 D Motorized potentiometer configuration 0000 0110 bin p1037 D Motorized potentiometer maximum speed 0 rpm p1038 D Motorized potentiometer...

Page 335: ...y selecting a fixed speed setpoint L HG VHWSRLQW VHOHFWLRQ ELW L HG VHWSRLQW VHOHFWLRQ ELW L HG VHWSRLQW VHOHFWLRQ ELW L HG VHWSRLQW VHOHFWLRQ ELW L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VHWSRLQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW HIIHFWLYH L HG VHWSRLQW U S S S S S S S S Figure 6 45 Direct selection of the fixed speed setpoint Table 6 80 Resulting setpoint p1023 p1022 p1021 p1020 Resulting setpoint 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 p...

Page 336: ...SHHG VHWSRLQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW HIIHFWLYH L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQW U S S S S S S S S S Figure 6 46 Binary selection of the fixed speed setpoint Table 6 81 Resulting setpoint p1023 p1022 p1021 p1020 Resulting setpoint 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 p1001 0 0 1 0 p1002 0 0 1 1 p1003 0 1 0 0 p1004 0 1 0 1 p1005 0 1 1 0 p1006 0 1 1 1 p1007 1 0 0 0 p1008 1 0 ...

Page 337: ... L HG VHWSRLQW ELW L HG VHWSRLQW ELW QBVHWSBIL VWDWXV 6SHHG IL HG VHWS USP L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQWV GLUHFW VHOHFWLRQ S 6HWSRLQW FKDQQHO S S S S S U U U U U U U U S S S S U U Figure 6 47 FP 3011 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 335 ...

Page 338: ...SHHG IL HG VHWSRLQW USP L HG VSHHG VHWSRLQWV ELQDU VHOHFWLRQ S 6HWSRLQW FKDQQHO S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S U U U U U U U U S S S S S U U Figure 6 48 FP 3010 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120X converter 336 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 339: ... CO Fixed speed setpoint 14 0 rpm p1015 D CO Fixed speed setpoint 15 0 rpm p1016 Fixed speed setpoint selection mode 1 p1020 C Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0 0 p1021 C Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1 0 p1022 C Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 2 0 p1023 C Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 3 0 r1024 Fixed speed setpoint active rpm r1025 0 Fixed speed setpoint status p1070 C CI Main set...

Page 340: ...g the motor to operate briefly at specific speeds The Speed limitation function protects the motor and the driven load against excessively high speeds The Ramp function generator function prevents the setpoint from suddenly changing As a consequence the motor accelerates and brakes with a reduced torque QKLELW GLUHFWLRQ RI URWDWLRQ QYHUW 6NLS IUHTXHQF EDQGV 6HWSRLQW IRU PRWRU FRQWURO URP VHWSRLQW ...

Page 341: ...ing how a setpoint is inverted Parameter Description p1113 722 1 Digital input 1 0 Setpoint remains unchanged Digital input 1 1 Converter inverts the setpoint p1113 2090 11 Inverts the setpoint via the fieldbus control word 1 bit 11 Parameter Number Name Factory setting p1113 C BI Setpoint inversion Dependent on the converter Advanced commissioning 6 5 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G1...

Page 342: ... rotation Set parameter p1111 1 to permanently inhibit the positive direction of rotation Parameters Table 6 83 Application examples for inhibiting and enabling the direction of rotation Number Name Factory setting p1110 BI Inhibit negative direction 1 p1111 BI Inhibit positive direction 0 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120X converter 340 Operating Instructi...

Page 343: ...tion within a specific speed range Function description Minimum speed 0LQLPXP VSHHG W 0 S Speeds where the absolute value is less than the minimum speed are only possible when the motor is accelerating or braking Skip frequency bands Further information on the skip frequency bands is provided in the function block diagram Advanced commissioning 6 5 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120X ...

Page 344: ...XEVHTXHQW UXQ XS 9DOXH RI S LV OLPLWHG WR PD LPXP PRWRU VSHHG S QBOLPLW QHJ HII USP QBOLPLW SRV HII USP QBVHW DIW PLQBOLP USP QBOLPLW SRV QBOLPLW QHJ 6HWS DIWHU OLPLW USP VNLS VSHHG RI GHDFWLYDWHV WKH VNLS EDQG 0D LPXP OLPLWLQJ DFWLYH LPLWLQJ WR QHJDWLYH YDOXHV 5HIHUHQFH YDOXH IRU WKH UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 6NLS IUHTXHQF EDQGV DQG VSHHG OLPLWDWLRQV 6HWSRLQW FKDQQHO U S U Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z S S S S...

Page 345: ... limit rpm r1114 CO Setpoint after direction limiting rpm r1119 CO Ramp function generator setpoint at the input rpm r1170 CO Speed controller setpoint sum rpm Further information is provided in the parameter list Parameters Page 467 NOTICE Incorrect direction of motor rotation if the parameterization is not suitable If you are using an analog input as speed setpoint source then for a setpoint 0 V...

Page 346: ...rection Parameters Table 6 85 Parameters for the speed limitation Number Name Factory setting p1082 D Maximum speed 1500 rpm p1083 D CO Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 210000 rpm p1085 C CI Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 1083 p1086 D CO Speed limit in negative direction of rotation 210000 rpm p1088 C CI Speed limit in negative direction of rotation 1086 Advanced commis...

Page 347: ...n generator The ramp up and ramp down times of the extended ramp function generator can be set independently of each other The optimal times depend on the application and can lie in the range from a few 100 ms to several minutes 5DPS XS WLPH 5DPS GRZQ WLPH IIHFWLYH UDPS XS WLPH IIHFWLYH UDPS GRZQ WLPH 0D LPXP VSHHG W W W Initial and final rounding permit smooth jerk free acceleration and braking T...

Page 348: ...7L 7I 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU VWDWXV ELWV 5DPS GRZQ DFWLYH 5DPS XS DFWLYH 2WKHU VWDWXV ELWV 5 DFFHOHUDWLRQ UHY Vt QDEOH UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 2 HQG URXQGLQJ QWHUQDO TXLFN VWRS 5DPS IODWWHQLQJ RII UHH H UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 6HWWLQJ YDOXH 5RXQG RII W SH FFHSW VHWLQJ YDOXH QWHUQDO TXLFN VWRS QWHUQDO 5 HQDEOH UHH H UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 6HWSRLQW USP 6SHHG VHWSRLQW HQDEOH SDVV UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQH...

Page 349: ... function generator setting value 0 p1144 C CI Ramp function generator setting value 0 p1148 D Ramp function generator tolerance for ramp up and ramp down active 19 8 rpm r1149 CO Ramp function generator acceleration Further information is provided in the parameter list Setting the extended ramp function generator Procedure 1 Enter the highest possible speed setpoint 2 Switch on the motor 3 Evalua...

Page 350: ...be adequately lubricated or cooled This causes the pump to wear out more quickly To reduce wear you can use the dual ramp function The dual ramp function shortens the time it takes for the pump to operate below a critical speed Precondition Before enabling the dual ramp function adjust the ramp function generator Function description Enabling Connect the outputs of the dual ramp function with the ...

Page 351: ...D Threshold speed 3 30 rmp p29575 D Ramp down scaling 2 100 r29576 CO Ramp up scaling output r29577 CO Ramp down scaling output p29578 C CI Ramp up scaling input 1 p29579 C CI Ramp down scaling input 1 p29580 BI Dual ramp enable 0 For more information about the parameters see Chapter Parameters Page 467 Advanced commissioning 6 5 Setpoints and setpoint processing SINAMICS G120X converter Operating...

Page 352: ...r as a level controller Precondition Additional functions The U f control or the vector control have been set Tools To change the function settings you can use an operator panel for example Function description Function diagram The technology controller is implemented as a PID controller controller with proportional integral and derivative action 3 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Technology controller ...

Page 353: ...sly satisfied The technology controller supplies the main setpoint p2251 0 The ramp function generator output of the technology controller has not yet reached the start value Figure 6 53 Simplified representation of the technology controller Basic settings The settings required as a minimum are marked in gray in the function diagram Interconnect setpoint and actual values with signals of your choi...

Page 354: ...oaches the setpoint Increase the proportional component KP p2280 and reduce the integration time TI p2285 W The actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint with slight oscillation Increase the proportional component KP p2280 and reduce the rate time Td p2274 W The actual value quickly approaches the setpoint but over shoots too much Decrease the proportional component KP p2280 and increase th...

Page 355: ... 7HFBFWU IL YDO 7HFBFWU IL YDO 7HFBFWUO IL YDO 7HFBFWU L 9DO 6 7HFBFWU L 9DO HII 7HFBFWUO 1R DFW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW L HG YDOXH VHOHFWLRQ ELQDU S 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU S S S S S U U U U S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Figure 6 54 FP 7950 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Technology controller SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E...

Page 356: ... 9DO HII 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW 7HFBFWUO VHO ELW L HG YDOXH VHOHFWLRQ GLUHFW S 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU S S S S S U U U S S S S Figure 6 55 FP 7951 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Technology controller SINAMICS G120X converter 354 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 357: ...HQWHUHG DIWHU 21 2 HQDEOH PLVVLQJ 2OG YDOXH LV NHSW 7KH VHWSRLQW IRU WKH PRWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU LV VDYHG LQ D QRQ YRODWLOH IDVKLRQ IRU S 1RQ YRODWLOH GDWD VDYH QRW DFWLYDWHG LWK LQLWLDO URXQGLQJ 7KH UDPS XS GRZQ WLPH VHW LV H FHHGHG DFFRUGLQJO LWKRXW LQLWLDO URXQGLQJ 7KH VHWSRLQW IRU WKH PRWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU LV VDYHG DIWHU 2 DQG DIWHU 21 LV HQWHUHG XVLQJ U 7KH VHWSRLQW IRU WKH PRWRUL HG SRWHQW...

Page 358: ... QBOLPLW QHJ HII USP QBOLPLW SRV HII USP 7HFBFWUORXWS BVLJ 7HFKBFWUO DFWVFDO 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 7HFBFWUO DFW YDO 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 7HFBFWU LQWHJ KROG 7HFKBFWUO OLP RIIV FRPSRQHQW VWRS RQO ZKHQ U DQG U LQ VDPH GLUHFWLRQ IWHU HQDEOH RI WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU WKH VWDUW YDOXH LV SUHVHQW DV ORQJ DV WKH 5 RXWSXW UHDFKHV WKLV YDOXH 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 7HFBFWU DFW DIW OW 7HFBFWUO HQDEOH 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 7HFBFWUO PLQB...

Page 359: ...nology controller system deviation p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant 0 s p2280 Technology controller proportional gain See parameter list p2285 Technology controller integral time See parameter list p2286 BI Hold technology controller integrator 56 13 p2289 C CI Technology controller precontrol signal 0 p2306 Technology controller system deviation inversion 0 p2339 Technolo...

Page 360: ... 0 r2272 CO Technology controller actual value scaled Table 6 90 PID technology controller fixed values binary selection Number Name Factory setting p2201 D CO Technology controller fixed value 1 10 p2202 D CO Technology controller fixed value 2 20 p2203 D CO Technology controller fixed value 3 30 p2204 D CO Technology controller fixed value 4 40 p2205 D CO Technology controller fixed value 5 50 p...

Page 361: ...tiometer setpoint memory p2235 C BI Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint raise 0 p2236 C BI Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint lower 0 p2237 D Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value 100 p2238 D Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum val ue 100 p2240 D Technology controller motorized potentiometer start value 0 r2245 CO Techn...

Page 362: ...component inhibiting the I component and the control sense Enable limiting the controller output and fault response FAQ http support automation siemens com WW view en 92556266 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Technology controller SINAMICS G120X converter 360 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 363: ...r interrupts the connection between the PID technology controller and the speed controller Instead of the PID technology controller output the autotuning function specifies the speed setpoint 3XPS 0RWRU FRQWURO FWXDO YDOXH LOOLQJ OHYHO VHWSRLQW 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 3 DXWRWXQLQJ 6SHHG VHWSRLQW 3 Figure 6 58 Autotuning using closed loop level control as example The speed setpoint results from the te...

Page 364: ... p2274 and p2285 If the converter signals fault F07445 If possible double p2354 and p2355 Repeat the autotuning with the changed parameters 4 Back up the calculated values so that they are protected against power failure e g using the BOP 2 OPTIONS RAM ROM You have auto tuned the PID controller Parameters Number Name Factory setting p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant 0 0 s p...

Page 365: ...er controller setting than for p2350 1 with larger overshoot of the controlled variable W 3 Slower controller setting than for p2350 1 Overshoot of the controlled variable is to a large extent avoided W 4 Controller setting after completion of the autotuning as for p2350 1 Optimize only the P and I action of the PID con troller W 0 p2354 PID autotuning monitoring time 240 s p2355 PID autotuning of...

Page 366: ...ation Function description 3 DGDSWDWLRQ 6FDOLQJ RQILJXUDWLRQ 6FDOLQJ 3 FRPSRQHQW RI WKH WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU 7 DGDSWDWLRQ 6FDOLQJ S S S S S S S S S S S 3 7 S S S S S S Figure 6 60 Controller adaptation Advanced commissioning 6 6 Technology controller SINAMICS G120X converter 364 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 367: ...SW VFDO VBV 7Q DGDSW ORZHU YDO 7Q DGDSW XSSHU YDO S DGDSW ORZHU YDO S DGDSW XSSHU YDO S DGDSW LQS VBVUF 7Q DGDSW LQS VBVUF S 7Q DGDSWDWLRQ 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU S S S S U U S S S S S S S Figure 6 61 FP 7959 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Technology controller SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 365 ...

Page 368: ...hnology controller upper Kp adaptation transition point 100 p2315 CI Technology controller Kp adaptation scaling signal source 1 r2316 CO Technology controller Kp adaptation output p2317 CI Technology controller Tn adaptation input value signal source 0 p2318 Technology controller lower Tn adaptation value 3 s p2319 Technology controller upper Tn adaptation value 10 s p2320 Technology controller l...

Page 369: ...nology controllers allow several process variables to be simultaneously controlled using one converter Example An HVAC system with heating and cooling valves to process the air The main controller controls the speed of the fan drive The additional technology controllers control the cooling and heating via the two analog outputs Parameters Table 6 93 Parameters for the free technology controller 0 ...

Page 370: ... constant Td 0 s p11080 Free tec_ctrl 0 proportional gain KP 1 p11085 Free tec_ctrl 0 integral time TI 30 s p11091 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 maximum limit 100 p11092 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 minimum limit 0 p11093 Free tec_ctrl 0 ramp up ramp down time limit 1 s r11094 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 output signal p11097 CI Free tec_ctrl 0 maximum limit signal source 11091 0 p11098 CI Free tec_ctrl 0 minimum limit signal s...

Page 371: ...e control for the pressure in a liquid pipe Depending on the set actual variance of the technology controller the cascade control of the converter switches a maximum of three additional motors directly to the line supply via contactors Precondition To deploy the cascade control you must activate the technology controller Advanced commissioning 6 6 Technology controller SINAMICS G120X converter Ope...

Page 372: ...4 has expired The converter brakes the speed controlled motor with ramp down time p1121 to the activation deactivation speed p2378 Until the activation deactivation speed p2378 is attained the converter deactivates the technology controller temporarily 4 After switch on delay p2384 the converter connects an uncontrolled motor Deactivate uncontrolled motors M1 M2 RQWURO GHYLDWLRQ 0RWRU 0Q LV FRQQHF...

Page 373: ...M1 M1 M2 M1 M2 3 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 Parameter Number Name Factory setting p2200 Technology controller enable 0 p2251 Technology controller mode 0 p2370 Cascade control enable 0 p2371 Cascade control configuration 0 p2372 Cascade control motor selection mode 0 p2373 Cascade control activation threshold 20 p2374 Cascade control activation delay 30 s p2375 Cascade control deactivation delay 30 s p2376...

Page 374: ...cade control p2373 p2373 p2376 The activation threshold for the cascade control p2373 must be lower than the overload threshold for the cascade control p2376 It is not permissible for the main drive to be in the hibernation mode The actual speed must be higher than the restart speed for hibernation mode p1080 p2390 1 05 The value for the activation delay of the cascade control p2374 must be higher...

Page 375: ...find programs to convert from UTC to RTC e g UTC to RTC http unixtime converter com Example Saved as alarm time in the alarm buffer r2123 0 2345 ms r2145 0 14580 days Number of seconds 2345 1000 14580 86400 1259712002 Converting this number of seconds to RTC provides the date 02 12 2009 01 00 02 The times specified for alarms and faults always refer to standard time Function and settings The real ...

Page 376: ...p8402 0 8 RTC daylight saving time setting 0 r8403 RTC daylight saving time actual difference r8404 RTC weekday p8405 Activate deactivate RTC alarm A01098 1 Advanced commissioning 6 6 Technology controller SINAMICS G120X converter 374 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 377: ...XW 21 21 21 21 7 ZHHNGD DFWLYDWLRQ 7 VZLWFKLQJ WLPHV 57 S S U Figure 6 66 Example of the response of the time switch Settings for the example with DTC1 Enable parameterization of the DTC p8409 0 As long as the parameterization of the DTC is enabled the converter holds the output of all three DTC r84x3 x 1 2 3 r84x3 0 normal r84x3 1 inverted status message at LOW Activate deactivate the weekday p84...

Page 378: ... the motor data identification the converter assumes a cable resistance 20 of the stator resistance of the cold motor Function description You must correctly set the components between the converter and motor to achieve an optimum closed loop control quality Procedure 1 Set p0010 2 2 Set the cable resistance in p0352 3 Set p0230 to the appropriate value 4 Set p0235 to the appropriate value 5 Set p...

Page 379: ... the U f control The U f control is a speed feedforward control with the following properties The converter sets the output voltage on the basis of the U f characteristic The output frequency is essentially calculated from the speed setpoint and the number of pole pairs of the motor The slip compensation corrects the output frequency depending on the load and thus increases the speed accuracy The ...

Page 380: ...possible output voltage of the converter depends on the line voltage The converter can increase the output frequency even at the maximum output voltage The motor is then operated with field weakening The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency also depends on the following variables The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency p0310 also depends on the following va...

Page 381: ...ses with the speed Centrifugal pumps radi al fans axial fans com pressors Lower losses in the motor and converter than with the linear characteristic Parabolic p1300 2 Table 6 96 Characteristics for special applications Requirement Application examples Remark Characteristic Parameter Applications with a low dynamic re sponse and con stant speed Centrifugal pumps radi al fans axial fans The ECO mod...

Page 382: ...6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH FDOFXODWLRQ O LQJ UHVWDUW PRGH 9GFBFWUO FRQILJ 8BRXWSXW 9UPV 2XWSXW YROWDJH 9UPV 2XWSXW IUHTXHQF IBRXWS BPD BFWUO 8BRXWS 9UPV 6SHHG VHWSRLQW VXP USP 5 VHWS DW LQS USP IBVHW BPD 30 BPD UHGXFWLRQ 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU YROWDJH FRQWURO PD FORVHG ORRS IUHTXHQF FRQWURO PD FORVHG ORRS 8 I FRQWURO RYHUYLHZ 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO U U 0 ದ S S U U U U U U U U S S S S S S S U U U U U ...

Page 383: ...equency 0 Hz p1300 D Open loop closed loop control operating mode See parameter list p1333 D U f control FCC starting frequency 0 Hz p1334 D U f control slip compensation starting frequency 0 Hz p1335 D Slip compensation scaling 0 p1338 D U f mode resonance damping gain 0 Advanced commissioning 6 7 Motor control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 381 ...

Page 384: ...ng the voltage boost for U f control The converter boosts the voltage corresponding to the starting currents p1310 p1312 5DWHG PRWRU IUHTXHQF 0D LPXP RXWSXW YROWDJH S S U S S 8 I Figure 6 70 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example Increase parameter values p1310 p1312 in steps of 5 Excessively high values in p1310 p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off tr...

Page 385: ...motor follows the setpoint 6 If necessary increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without problem In applications with a high break loose torque you must also increase parameter p1312 in order to achieve a satisfactory motor response You have set the voltage boost Advanced commissioning 6 7 Motor control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751...

Page 386: ... DFW 6 FO ORRS FWUO 0RW BUDWHG 6 FO ORRS FWUO 5 6 2S FO OS FWUOBPRGH 9ROWDJH PD 9UPV 9ROWDJH PD 9UPV S LV RQO DFWLYH DW WKH ILUVW DFFHOHUDWLRQ DIWHU WKH PRWRU LV VZLWFKHG RQ IBVHW 3DUDEROLF 2 0RGH OX FXUUHQW FRQWURO LQHDU 8 I FRQWURO FKDUDFWHULVWLF DQG YROWDJH ERRVW 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO U S S S S U S 0 S S 0 U U U U U S U U U U S U U Figure 6 71 FP 6301 Advanced commissioning 6 7 Motor contr...

Page 387: ...W UPV I S WKH OLPLW LV y I 0RW 1ื 8 I VOLS FRPSHQVDWLRQ 8 I UHVRQDQFH GDPSLQJ 8 I FRQWURO 5HVRQDQFH GDPSLQJ DQG VOLS FRPSHQVDWLRQ 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO U U 0 U 0 U S U U S S U S S PV U I I 0RW 1 I I 0RW 1 S S PV ದ Figure 6 72 FP 6310 Advanced commissioning 6 7 Motor control SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 385 ...

Page 388: ...urrent voltage boost permanent 50 p1311 D Starting current voltage boost when accelerating 0 p1312 D Starting current voltage boost when starting 0 Further information is provided in the parameter list Advanced commissioning 6 7 Motor control SINAMICS G120X converter 386 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 389: ...reasing speed the converter changes from closed loop starting current control to U f control with load dependent voltage boost The slip compensation is activated Soft starting is not possible Reduced setting options Function description Characteristics after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control IVHW 8VHW IVHW TBVHW TBVHW 0D LPXP RXWSXW YROWDJH 7HFKQRORJLFDO DSSOLFDWLRQ 5DWHG PRWR...

Page 390: ... of the speed Eccentric worm pump compressor Linear p0501 0 The required torque increa ses with the speed Centrifugal pumps radial fans axial fans Lower losses in the motor and con verter than with the linear charac teristic Parabol ic p0501 1 Parameters Number Name Factory setting r0025 CO Output voltage smoothed Vrms r0066 CO Output frequency Hz r0071 Output voltage maximum Vrms p0310 M Rated mo...

Page 391: ...vior of the motor Precondition The ramp up time of the ramp function generator is depending on the motor rated power 1 s 1 kW 10 s 10 kW Function description Starting current boost after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control 5DWHG PRWRU IUHTXHQF 0D LPXP RXWSXW YROWDJH S S S U S S 8 I Figure 6 75 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example The converter boo...

Page 392: ...In applications with a high break loose torque you must also increase parameter p1312 in order to achieve a satisfactory motor response You have set the voltage boost Parameters Number Name Factory setting r0071 Output voltage maximum Vrms p0310 M Rated motor frequency 0 Hz p0320 M Rated motor magnetizing current short circuit current 0 Arms p1310 D Starting current voltage boost permanent 50 p131...

Page 393: ...red Figure 6 76 Simplified function diagram for sensorless vector control with speed controller Using the motor model the converter calculates the following closed loop control signals from the measured phase currents and the output voltage Current component Iq Current component Iq Speed actual value The setpoint of the current component Id flux setpoint is obtained from the motor data For speeds ...

Page 394: ... the connection type Y Δ and carry out the motor data identification routine at standstill Speed limits and torque limits In the quick commissioning set the maximum speed p1082 and current limit p0640 to match your particular application When exiting quick commissioning the converter calculates the torque and power limits corresponding to the current limit The actual torque limits are obtained fro...

Page 395: ... FRQWURO 6 2SHUDWLRQ QDEOH VSHHG FRQWUROOHU 0BPD ORZHU HII 1P 0BPD XSSHU HII 1P QBVHW BFRPS QB QBDFW 7BV 6 FWXDO VSHHG USP QBDFW VPRRWK USP QBFWUO QBVHW USP QBFWUO V V GHY USP QDPLF UHGXFWLRQ ILHOG ZHDNHQLQJ XWRPDWLF S 7Q DGDSWDWLRQ DFWLYH QBFWUO FRQILJ S 7Q DGDSWDWLRQ DFWLYH QBFWUO FRQILJ URP S 7Q DGDSWDWLRQ SBQBDGDSW 7QBQBDGDSW 7QBQBEDVLF SBQBEDVLF 6SHHG FRQWUROOHU 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO 6 Q...

Page 396: ...HU WUDQVLWLRQ SRLQW WKH S DGDSWDWLRQ DOVR FKDQJHV RYHU 6SHHG GHSHQGHQW SBQ 7QBQ DGDSWDWLRQ 7QBQBEDVLF SBQBEDVLF SBQBDGDSW 7QBQBDGDSW SBQ 7QBQ DGDSWDWLRQ 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO 7Q S S PLQ S PLQ S S U 7QBQBEDVLF SBQBEDVLF Q Q Q S Figure 6 78 FP 6050 Advanced commissioning 6 7 Motor control SINAMICS G120X converter 394 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 397: ...WUO 0BDFFHO 1P 0BDFFHO 7BVPRRWK 0BDFFHO 1P FFHOHUDWLRQ FRQWURO LV LQKLELWHG IRU S PV 1R SUH FRQWURO LI WKH 9GF FRQWUROOHU LV DFWLYH 7KH VLJQDO LV RQO HIIHFWLYH DIWHU PDJQHWL DWLRQ KDV EHHQ FRPSOHWHG U 0BPD ORZHU HII 1P 0BPD XSSHU HII 1P DOFXODWHG DFFHOHUDWLQJ WRUTXH 7RUTXH VHWSRLQW 9HFWRU FRQWURO 8 I FRQWURO S S U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U S PV U U U ุ Figure 6 79 FP 6060 Advanced co...

Page 398: ...nto opera tion Complete 6 7 3 2 Optimizing the speed controller Optimum control response post optimization not required Preconditions for assessing the controller response The moment of inertia of the load is constant and does not depend on the speed The converter does not reach the set torque limits during acceleration You operate the motor in the range 40 60 of its rated speed If the motor exhib...

Page 399: ...accelerate When necessary adapt the ramp up and ramp down times of the ramp function generator p1120 and p1121 Procedure 1 Switch on the motor 2 Enter a speed setpoint of approximately 40 of the rated speed 3 Wait until the actual speed has stabilized 4 Increase the setpoint up to a maximum of 60 of the rated speed 5 Monitor the associated characteristic of the setpoint and actual speed 6 Optimize...

Page 400: ... with an adequate dynamic performance then increase p1470 gain KP step by step Parameters Table 6 98 Encoderless speed control Number Name Factory setting p0342 M Ratio between the total and motor moments of inertia 1 p1452 Speed controller actual speed value smoothing time enco derless 10 ms p1470 D Speed controller encoderless operation P gain 0 3 p1472 D Speed controller encoderless operation i...

Page 401: ...process regenerative power Disadvantages significant increase in the motor temperature no defined braking characteristics no constant braking torque no braking torque at standstill braking energy E is lost as heat does not function when the power fails Compound braking One version of DC braking The converter brakes the motor with a defined ramp down time and superimposes a DC current on the output...

Page 402: ...tors 4 different events initiate DC braking DC braking when falling below a starting speed EUDNLQJ DFWLYH 2 6WDUW VSHHG 7LPH LQWHUYDO Q S W W Precondition p1230 1 and p1231 14 Function 1 The motor speed has exceeded the starting speed 2 The converter activates the DC braking as soon as the motor speed falls below the starting speed DC braking when a fault occurs EUDNLQJ DFWLYH 2 2 6WDUW VSHHG DXOW...

Page 403: ...he higher level control switches off the motor OFF1 or OFF3 2 The motor brakes along the down ramp to the speed for the start of DC braking 3 DC braking starts Parameters Settings for DC braking Number Name Factory setting p0347 M Motor de excitation time 0 s p1230 C BI DC braking activation 0 p1231 M Configuring DC braking 0 p1232 M DC braking braking current 0 Arms p1233 M DC braking duration 1 ...

Page 404: ...d prevents an excessive increase in the DC link voltage Note Compound braking is possible only with the U f control Compound braking does not operate in the following cases The flying restart function is active DC braking is active Vector control is selected NOTICE Overheating of the motor due to compound braking The motor will overheat if you use compound braking too frequently or for too long Th...

Page 405: ...s case the average pulse frequency is equal to the setpoint pulse frequency The pulse frequency can be varied in every current controller cycle if the cycle is constant Current measurement errors resulting from asynchronous pulse and control intervals are compensated by a correction in the actual current value Parameter p1811 0 n can be set to adjust the magnitude of variation in the pulse frequen...

Page 406: ...eaches the current limit during deceleration the I max controller extends the deceleration operation Parameter The factory setting for proportional gain and the integral time of the I max controller ensures faultless operation in the vast majority of cases The factory setting of the I max controller must only be changed in the following exceptional cases Speed or torque of the motor tend to cause ...

Page 407: ...more information about this function in function diagram 6300 and in the parameter list Advanced commissioning 6 8 Drive protection SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 405 ...

Page 408: ...escription Overload response for p0290 0 The converter responds depending on the control mode that has been set In vector control the converter reduces the output current In U f control the converter reduces the speed Once the overload condition has been removed the converter re enables the output current or speed If the measure cannot prevent a converter thermal overload then the converter switch...

Page 409: ...he converter reduces the speed Once the overload condition has been removed the converter re enables the output current or speed If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload then the converter switches off the motor with fault F30024 Overload response for p0290 3 If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency then the converter reduces its pulse frequency starting at ...

Page 410: ...es off the motor with fault F30024 Overload response for p0290 13 We recommend this setting for drives with a high starting torque If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency then the converter reduces its pulse frequency starting at the pulse frequency setpoint p1800 There is no current derating as a result of the higher pulse frequency setpoint Once the overload condition has bee...

Page 411: ...e converter cannot detect a motor overtemperature condition Connect the KTY sensor with the correct polarity Settings Temperature monitoring Overtemperature alarm A07910 motor temperature p0604 and p0610 0 Overtemperature fault F07011 The converter responds with a fault in the following cases motor temperature p0605 motor temperature p0604 and p0610 0 Sensor monitoring A07015 or F07016 Wire break ...

Page 412: ...t in the following cases motor temperature p0605 motor temperature p0604 and p0610 0 Sensor monitoring A07015 or F07016 Wire break The converter interprets a resistance 2120 Ω as a wire break and outputs the alarm A07015 After 100 milliseconds the converter changes to the fault state with F07016 Short circuit The converter interprets a resistance 603 Ω as a short circuit and outputs the alarm A070...

Page 413: ...e p0604 and p0610 0 The converter does not monitor the sensor Parameters Table 6 102 General parameters Number Name Factory setting p0335 M Type of motor cooling 0 p0601 M Motor temperature sensor type 0 p0604 M Mot_temp_mod 2 sensor alarm threshold 130 C p0605 M Mot_temp_mod 1 2 sensor threshold and temperature value 145 C p0610 M Motor overtemperature response 12 p0640 D Current limit 0 Arms Tab...

Page 414: ... W U S S S S S S U L U Figure 6 83 Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors Parameters Table 6 104 Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors Number Name Factory setting r0034 CO Thermal motor load r0068 0 1 CO Absolute actual current value Arms p0344 M Motor weight for thermal motor model 0 kg p0604 M Mot_temp_mod 2 KTY alarm threshold 130 C p0605 M Mot_temp_mod 1 2 sensor threshold and tempera...

Page 415: ... Motor stall current 0 Arms p0610 M Motor overtemperature response 12 p0611 M I2t thermal motor model time constant 0 s p0612 M Mot_temp_mod activation 0000 0010 0000 0010 bin p0613 M Mot_temp_mod 1 3 ambient temperature 20 C p0625 M Motor ambient temperature during commissioning 20 C p0627 M Motor overtemperature stator winding 80 K r0632 M Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature C p5390 M Mot_te...

Page 416: ...or The converter therefore monitors its DC link voltage and when necessary switches off the connected motor and outputs the fault DC link overvoltage Function description Protecting the motor and converter against overvoltage 9GFBPD FRQWUROOHU DFWLYH PRWRULQJ PRWRULQJ JHQHUDWLQJ 6SHHG OLQN YROWDJH U 6ZLWFK LQ OHYHO 9GFBPD FRQWUROOHU 9GFBPD U W W W Q Q Q Figure 6 85 Simplified representation of the...

Page 417: ...ller switch on level V p1243 D Vdc_max controller dynamic factor 100 p1250 D Vdc controller proportional gain 1 p1251 D Vdc controller integral time 0 ms p1252 D Vdc controller derivative action time 0 ms p1254 Vdc_max controller ON level for automatic detection 0 Further information is provided in the parameter list 6 8 6 Monitoring the driven load In many applications the speed and the torque of...

Page 418: ... each speed for pumps and fans Insufficient torque indicates that the motor and the load are no longer mechanically connected An excessive torque can indicate problems in the mechanical system of the driven load e g a mechanically blocked load Blocking protection leakage protection and dry running protection are a monitor ing method for pumps or fans The monitoring combines a torque monitoring wit...

Page 419: ...tion 5 r1746 Motor model fault signal stall detection p2178 D Motor stalled delay time 0 01 s r2198 CO BO Status word monitoring functions 2 6 8 6 2 No load monitoring Function description An inadequate motor current indicates an interruption in the power transmission from the motor to the load If the motor current for the time p2180 lies below the current level p2179 the converter signals output ...

Page 420: ...ime p2177 while the motor current reaches the current limit the converter signals Motor blocked and fault F07900 Parameters Number Name Factory settings p0045 Display values of smoothing time constant 4 ms r0063 CO Speed actual value rpm p2175 D Motor blocked speed threshold 120 rpm p2177 D Motor blocked delay time 3 s r2198 Status word monitoring functions 2 Advanced commissioning 6 8 Drive prote...

Page 421: ...onger than time p2192 the converter reacts as specified in p2181 The monitoring is not active below speed threshold 1 and above speed threshold 3 Parameters Number Name Factory setting p2181 D Load monitoring response 0 p2182 D Load monitoring speed threshold 1 150 rpm p2183 D Load monitoring speed threshold 2 900 rpm p2184 D Load monitoring speed threshold 3 1500 rpm p2185 D Load monitoring torqu...

Page 422: ...UTXH 1P U UXQQLQJ SURWHFWLRQ RU EURNHQ EHOW U UXQQLQJ SURWHFWLRQ RU EURNHQ EHOW HDNDJH SXPSV HDNDJH SXPSV ORFNHG ORFNHG If the torque and speed lie in the impermissible range longer than time p2192 the converter reacts as specified in p2181 For applications with pumps p2193 4 the converter detects the following states of the driven load Blocked Leakage Dry running For applications with fans or com...

Page 423: ... threshold 1 150 rpm p2183 D Load monitoring speed threshold 2 900 rpm p2184 D Load monitoring speed threshold 3 1500 rpm p2186 D Load monitoring torque threshold 1 lower 0 Nm p2188 D Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower 0 Nm p2190 D Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower 0 Nm p2191 D Load monitoring torque threshold no load 0 Nm p2192 D Load monitoring delay time 10 s p2193 D Load monitorin...

Page 424: ...ring motor operation If the encoder signal fails for time p2192 the converter signals fault F07936 S 7 U S W W 9 S Figure 6 86 Function plan and time response of the speed monitoring Parameters Number Name Factory setting r0722 CO BO CU digital inputs status p2192 D Load monitoring delay time 10 s p2193 D Load monitoring configuration 1 p3232 C BI Load monitoring failure detection 1 Further inform...

Page 425: ...ying restart function if the converter is simultaneously driving several motors Exception a mechanical coupling ensures that all of the motors always operate with the same speed Function description The Flying restart function comprises the following steps 1 After the on command the converter impresses the search current in the motor and increases the output frequency 2 When the output frequency r...

Page 426: ... M Motor excitation build up time 0 s p0347 M Motor de excitation time 0 s p1201 C BI Flying restart enable signal source 1 p1202 D Flying restart detection current 90 100 p1203 D Flying restart search rate factor 150 100 Advanced commissioning 6 9 Drive availability SINAMICS G120X converter 424 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 427: ...phase Unexpected movement of machine parts can result in serious injury and material damage Block off hazardous areas within the machine to prevent inadvertent access If it is possible that the motor is still rotating for a longer period of time after a power failure or after a fault then you must also activate the flying restart function Flying restart switching on while the motor is running Page...

Page 428: ... to switch on the motor is available at a digital input or via the fieldbus ON OFF1 1 p1210 14 or 16 Never 2 The converter attempts to automatically switch the motor on under the following conditions p1210 1 Never p1210 4 6 14 16 or 26 If the command to switch on the motor is available at a digital input or via the fieldbus ON OFF1 1 3 If after a flying restart and magnetization r0056 4 1 no fault...

Page 429: ... automatically starting when the fieldbus communication fails you must enter the fault number of the communication error in parameter p1206 Parameter Number Name Factory setting p1206 Automatic restart faults not active 0 p1210 Automatic restart mode 0 p1211 Automatic restart start attempts 3 p1212 Automatic restart wait time start attempts 1 s p1213 0 Automatic restart monitoring time for restart...

Page 430: ...in control intervenes at an adjustable threshold The VDC min control forces the load to go into slightly regenerative operation As a consequence the converter covers its power loss and the losses in the motor with the kinetic energy of the load The load speed decreases but the DC link voltage remains constant during the kinetic buffering After the line supply returns the converter immediately resu...

Page 431: ...rvice mode When the essential service mode is active and faults occur in the converter all warranty claims associated with the converter become null and void The faults can have the following causes Exceptionally high temperatures inside and outside the converter Open fire inside and outside the converter Emissions of light noise particles or gases Function description Activating and terminating e...

Page 432: ...struction of the converter or the motor Faults with the reaction OFF2 switch the motor off immediately In this case the converter attempts to automatically acknowledge the faults using the automatic restart function For faults that cannot be acknowledged it is possible to switch over the motor to line operation using the bypass function Automatic restart during active essential service mode The co...

Page 433: ...ase you must set the following Set p1266 3889 10 The converter switches the motor to bypass mode with r3889 10 1 Ensure that the direction of rotation does not change when switching over to bypass operation Set p1267 0 1 The converter switches the motor to bypass mode independent of the speed with control signal p1266 Commission the Bypass function Bypass Page 439 You have commissioned the essenti...

Page 434: ...LYDWHG 6SHHG VHWSRLQW LQ WHQGHG 6HUYLFH 0RGH 60 URW GLU V V 60 DFW V V FDXVHG E ZLUH EUHDNDJH LQ DVW NQRZQ VHWSRLQW 60 VHWSBVUF 3 UHFY ZRUG 8 YDOXH LQ 7HFBFWUO VWDWXV 60 VHWSBVUF DOW 7RWDO VHWSRLQW HII USP FDXVHG E ZLUH EUHDNDJH LQ VLJQDO VRXUFH RI S VVHQWLDO 6HUYLFH 0RGH 60 7HFKQRORJ IXQFWLRQV y U U U S S S S S S S ุ U U U U U U S S KH S S U U U U U S U Figure 6 91 FP 7033 Advanced commissioning ...

Page 435: ...et monitoring time for start counter 0 s p1266 BI Bypass control command 0 p1267 Bypass changeover source configuration 0000 bin p3880 BI ESM activation signal source 0 p3881 ESM setpoint source 0 p3882 ESM alternative setpoint source 0 p3883 BI ESM direction of rotation signal source 0 p3884 CI ESM technology controller setpoint 0 r3889 0 10 CO BO ESM status word Advanced commissioning 6 9 Drive ...

Page 436: ... the dynamic performance Even when efficiency optimization is active the converter closed loop motor control prevents the motor from stalling Precondition Efficiency optimization functions under the following preconditions Operation with an induction motor Vector control is set in the converter Function description ULYHQ PDFKLQH QYHUWHU 6SHHG 6SHHG VSHFLILHG 9DULDEOH OX 7RUTXH Figure 6 92 Efficien...

Page 437: ...the optimum flux from the motor thermal model Based on its thermal motor model the converter continually determines for the actual operating point of the motor the interdependency between efficiency and flux The converter then sets the flux to achieve the optimum efficiency OX IILFLHQF OX IILFLHQF IILFLHQF RSWLPL DWLRQ LV QRW DFWLYH IILFLHQF RSWLPL DWLRQ LV DFWLYH Figure 6 94 Qualitative result of...

Page 438: ...e results in higher efficiency Parameters The converter calculates the parameters for the thermal motor model based on the motor data that has been set and the motor data identification Table 6 108 Efficiency optimization method 2 Number Name Factory setting p1401 D Flux control configuration 0000 0000 0000 0110 bin p1570 D CO Flux setpoint 100 p3315 D Efficiency optimization 2 minimum flux limit ...

Page 439: ...e ramp function generator tolerance using p1148 Function description ECO mode activation When the speed setpoint is reached and remains unchanged for 5 s the converter automatically reduces its output voltage to optimize the motor s operating point ECO mode deactivation ECO mode is deactivated when the setpoint changes or if the converter s DC link voltage is too high or too low 2 OLQHDU 2 TXDGUDW...

Page 440: ...information about energy saving in vector control mode see section Efficiency optimization Page 434 Advanced commissioning 6 10 Energy saving SINAMICS G120X converter 438 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 441: ...tor and K2 line contactor are designed for switching under load The K2 line contactor is designed for switching under inductive load The K1 converter contactor and K2 line contactor are interlocked against closing at the same time The flying restart function must be activated p1200 1 or 4 Flying restart switching on while the motor is running Page 423 Advanced commissioning 6 10 Energy saving SINA...

Page 442: ...urrent 10 rated motor current can flow temporarily The current depends on the random phase shift between the converter voltage and the line voltage Switching from line operation to converter operation 1 The converter opens the K2 line contactor via a digital output 2 The converter waits for the unlocking time of the motor 3 The converter waits for the feedback that the K2 line contactor is open 4 ...

Page 443: ... signal p1267 0 1 The converter switches the motor between converter operation and line operation depending on the bypass control command p1266 Changeover depending on the speed U VLJQDO IRU LQH RSHUDWLRQ S IHHGEDFN VLJQDO RI QYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ S IHHGEDFN VLJQDO RI LQH RSHUDWLRQ U VLJQDO IRU QYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ 0RWRU UDWHG VSHHG S E SDVV WKUHVKROG U VHWSRLQW 5 SDVV VSHHG WKUHVKROG UHDFKHG SDVV VSHHG ...

Page 444: ...ter switches the motor to line operation If the speed setpoint falls below the bypass speed threshold the converter switches the motor to converter operation Advanced commissioning 6 10 Energy saving SINAMICS G120X converter 442 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 445: ...D D FRQWURO VLJQDO S LQH RSHUDWLRQ 0RQLWRULQJ WLPH IRU 6ZLWFK WBPRQLW RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ 0RQLWRULQJ WLPH IRU LQH RSHUDWLRQ HHGEDFN IURP RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ HHGEDFN IURP LQH RSHUDWLRQ 6LJQDO IRU FRQWDFWRU RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ 6LJQDO IRU FRQWDFWRU FWXDO VSHHG IURP FRQYHUWHU 0RWRU UDWHG VSHHG O LQJ UHVWDUW 3RZHU XS RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ RQYHUWHU RSHUDWLRQ 6ZLWFKRYHU SKDVH 6ZLWFKRYHU SKDVH LQH RSHUDWLRQ 6ZL...

Page 446: ...age 467 More information Interaction with other functions Essential service mode The activated Essential service mode function influences the Bypass function Essential service mode Page 429 Converter control For operation of the motor on the line supply the converter no longer responds to the OFF1 command but rather only to OFF2 and OFF3 Temperature monitoring for the motor The converter evaluates...

Page 447: ... speed setpoint you have to monitor the setpoint amount To do this set p1110 0 When the setpoint is input from the technology controller the converter monitors the technology controller deviation r2273 and switches on the motor again if the deviation of the technology controller exceeds the hibernation mode restart value p2392 In the factory setting the converter monitors the positive deviation of...

Page 448: ...nal technology controller With this operating mode you have to set the technology controller as the setpoint source p2200 and use the output of the technology controller as the main setpoint p2251 The boost can be deactivated 1RUPDO RSHUDWLRQ 1RUPDO RSHUDWLRQ 6HWSRLQW WHFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU DV PDLQ VHWSRLQW LEHUQDWLRQ PRGH RIIVHW 7HFKQRORJ FRQWUROOHU GHYLDWLRQ U 5HVWDUW VSHHG RRVW VSHHG S 6WDUW VSHH...

Page 449: ...XP VSHHG S Speed Pressure S S S S S S S W W S S W W Figure 6 102 Hibernation mode using an external setpoint with boost W S S ෪ S W UHVWDUW VSHHG S ෪ S 5HVWDUW VSHHG 6WDUW VSHHG 1RUPDO RSHUDWLRQ 1RUPDO RSHUDWLRQ FWXDO YDOXH 6HWSRLQW 6HWSRLQW LEHUQDWLRQ PRGH RIIVHW 5HVWDUW RIIVHW 5HVWDUW VSHHG 6WDUW VSHHG LEHUQDWLRQ PRGH DFWLYH 0LQLPXP VSHHG S Speed Pressure S S S S S S S W W S S W W Figure 6 103 H...

Page 450: ...xpires The hibernation mode start speed is calculated as follows Start speed p1080 p2390 p1080 minimum speed p2390 hibernation mode start speed p2391 Hibernation mode delay time 0 3599 s factory setting 120 The hibernation mode delay time starts as soon as the output frequency of the converter drops below the hibernation mode start speed p2390 If the output frequency increases above this threshold...

Page 451: ...accelerated for the time set in p2394 along the acceleration ramp but not to more than the speed set in p2395 Caution The boost may not result in any overpressure or overrun p2396 Maximum hibernation mode shutdown time 0 factory setting to 863 999 s At the latest when this time expires the converter switches to normal operation and ac celerates up to the start speed p1080 p2390 If the con verter i...

Page 452: ...98 0 01 Hibernation mode active 02 Hibernation mode delay time active 03 Hibernation mode boost active 04 Hibernation mode motor switched off 05 Hibernation mode motor switched off cyclic restart active 06 Energy saving mode motor restarts 07 Hibernation mode supplies the total setpoint of the ramp function generator 08 Hibernation mode bypasses the ramp function generator in the setpoint channel ...

Page 453: ...ctor control via DO 0 with feedback signal via DI 3 Activating the line contactor control In order for the converter to control line contactor K1 using one of its own digital outputs you must interconnect the digital output with signal r0863 1 e g for DO 0 p0730 863 1 Line contactor control with feedback signal Interconnect p0860 with the signal of the corresponding digital input p0860 722 x Feedb...

Page 454: ...le signals p0860 BI Line contactor feedback signal 863 1 p0861 Line contactor monitoring time 100 ms r0863 0 1 CO BO Drive coupling status word control word p0867 Power unit main contactor hold time after OFF1 50 ms p0869 Configuration sequence control 0000 bin p0870 BI close main contactor 0 More information is provided in the parameter list Advanced commissioning 6 10 Energy saving SINAMICS G120...

Page 455: ...priately varying the speed of the fluid flow machine By controlling the flow rate the fluid flow machine operates at the optimum efficiency for each flow rate This situation means that in the partial load range less electric power is required than when controlling the flow rate using valves and throttles LQH VXSSO QYHUWHU LQH VXSSO QYHUWHU Figure 6 107 Flow control with pump and converter Function...

Page 456: ...nergy display p0040 Reset energy consumption display 0 r0041 Energy saved r0042 0 n CO Process energy display p0043 BI Energy consumption display enabled 0 p3320 0 n Fluid flow machine power point 1 25 p3321 0 n Fluid flow machine speed point 1 0 p3322 0 n Fluid flow machine power point 2 50 p3323 0 n Fluid flow machine speed point 2 25 p3324 0 n Fluid flow machine power point 3 77 p3325 0 n Fluid...

Page 457: ...cturer p29631 0 4 five power interpolation points in kW which should spread across the converter power range Make sure that p29631 0 p29631 1 p29631 2 p29631 3 p29631 4 or otherwise the flow calculation result r29633 is zero p29632 0 4 five flow values corresponding to the power interpolation points The calculation result associated with the output power then displays in parameter r29633 It should...

Page 458: ...gy saving mode 2 Function description Behavior of the converter with active energy saving mode 2 The converter outputs alarm A08800 The RDY LED flashes green 500 ms on 3000 ms off The converter does not send any diagnostic interrupts If the higher level controller goes to stop or the bus connection to the higher level controller is interrupted the converter exits the energy saving mode and resumes...

Page 459: ...witched on An OFF1 ON command is required to switch the motor on again Maximum pause time p5606 Disable PROFIenergy If you set p5611 0 1 you disable the response of the converter to PROFIenergy control commands In this case the converter rejects the Start_Pause command with 50 hex no appropriate pause mode Transition to energy saving mode With p5611 2 0 you enable the transition to energy saving m...

Page 460: ...t_number command Get_Measurement_Values Returns the measured values requested via the measured value ID Get_Measurement_Val ues_with_object_number Returns the measured values requested via the measured value ID and the object number The object number corresponds to the drive object ID 6 10 8 3 Error values and measured values Function description Table 6 110 Error values in the parameter response ...

Page 461: ... main Class Num ber Name 34 Active power 1 12 W r0032 Active power smoothed r2004 166 Power factor 1 12 1 r0038 Power factor smoothed 0 1 200 Active energy im port 2 11 Wh r0039 1 Energy drawn Advanced commissioning 6 10 Energy saving SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 459 ...

Page 462: ... ms If you do not switch over the motor data together with the drive data sets i e same motor number in p0826 then the drive data sets can also be switched over in operation The associated parameters are indexed index 0 1 2 or 3 One of the four indexes is selected with control commands and thereby one of the four saved settings The settings in the converter with the same index are called a drive d...

Page 463: ...me Factory setting p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1 r0051 CO BO Drive data set DDS effective p0180 Drive data set DDS number 1 p0819 0 2 Copy drive data set DDS 0 p0820 C BI Drive data set DDS selection bit 0 0 p0821 C BI Drive data set DDS selection bit 1 0 p0826 M Motor changeover motor number 0 More information The converter switches the motor data set MDS and the power unit data se...

Page 464: ...RU LQSXW 3UH DVVLJQHG FRQQHFWRU RXWSXW 2 RPELQHG FRQQHFWRU RXWSXW DQG ELQHFWRU RXWSXW 2 2 DFWRU VHWWLQJ ZLWK SUHVHW ELW QXPEHU DFWRU VHWWLQJ 9DOXH UDQJH QGH 3DUDPHWHU SHUWDLQV WR WKH RPPDQG DWD 6HW 6 QGH DUHD LW QXPEHU GMXVWDEOH SDUDPHWHUV LVSOD SDUDPHWHUV 3DUDPHWHU QXPEHU 8QLW RI PHDVXUHPHQW 6RXUFH SDUDPHWHU RI VLJQDO URVV UHIHUHQFH IRU IXQFWLRQ SODQ DDDD FROXPQ E URVV UHIHUHQFH IRU IXQFWLRQ SODQ...

Page 465: ...6DPSOLQJ DQG KROGLQJ HOHPHQW 6DPSOH ROG HSHQGLQJ RQ S WKH EORFN VZLWFKHV RQH RI VHYHUDO LQSXW VLJQDOV WR WKH RXWSXW KDQJHRYHU VZLWFK PXVW KDYH WKH YDOXH ZLWKRXW LQWHUUXSWL RQ GXULQJ WKH WLPH 7 EHIRUH WKH RXWSXW FKDQJHV WR 6ZLWFK RQ GHOD 2 GHOD PXVW KDYH WKH YDOXH ZLWKRXW LQWHUUXSWL RQ GXULQJ WKH WLPH 7 EHIRUH WKH RXWSXW FKDQJHV WR LQDU VLJQDO PXVW KDYH WKH YDOXH GXULQJ WKH WLPH 7 RU WKH YDOXH GXUL...

Page 466: ...following functions are implemented in the converter Open loop and closed loop control functions Communication functions Diagnosis and operating functions Every function comprises one or several blocks that are interconnected with one another 0RWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU VHWSRLQW DIWHU WKH UDPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU 0RWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU VHWSRLQW ORZHU 0RWRUL HG SRWHQWLRPHWHU VHWSRLQW KLJKHU QSXWV 2XWSX...

Page 467: ... EORFN LQHFWRU LQSXW LQHFWRU RXWSXW LQHFWRU FRQQHFWRU RXWSXW RQQHFWRU RXWSXW RQQHFWRU LQSXW S U U U U S 2 2 2 2 Figure 6 114 Symbols for binector and connector inputs and outputs Binector connector outputs CO BO are parameters that combine more than one binector output in a single word e g r0052 CO BO status word 1 Each bit in the word represents a digital binary signal This summary reduces the nu...

Page 468: ... output signal to the BICO parameter How much care is required when you change the signal interconnection Note which changes you make A subsequent analysis of the set signal interconnections is possible only by evaluating the parameter list Where can you find additional information All the binectors and connectors are located in the Parameter list The function diagrams provide a complete overview ...

Page 469: ...PXVW EH LQ RUGHU WKDW WKH SDUDPHWHU YDOXH FDQ EH FKDQJHG 6WDQGDUG WHQGHG SHUW 6HUYLFH SDVVZRUG SURWHFWHG 7KH SDUDPHWHU LV OLVWHG LQ D IXQFWLRQ GLDJUDP ZLWK WKH VSHFLILHG QXPEHU 7KH QXPEHU RI GDWD VHWV H J 6 GHILQHV WKH QXPEHU RI LQGLFHV 30 S Figure 7 1 Parameter description Function description Parameter number The parameter number is made up of a p or r followed by a number and optionally the ind...

Page 470: ...ich group does the parameter belong Unit selection with which parameter do you switch over the unit Data type Integer8 I8 8 bit integer Integer16 I16 16 bit integer Integer32 I32 32 bit integer Unsigned8 U8 8 bit without sign Unsigned16 U16 16 bit without sign Unsigned32 U32 32 bit without sign FloatingPoint32 Float 32 bit floating point number Scaling Specification of the reference variable with ...

Page 471: ...d on the following firmware Firmware version V1 01 Firmware version of the basic system V04712708_1000102 Parameters 7 1 Explanation of the detailed parameter list SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 469 ...

Page 472: ...0840 35 Switching on inhibited carry out first commissioning p0010 41 Switching on inhibited set ON OFF1 0 p0840 42 Switching on inhibited set OC OFF2 1 p0844 p0845 43 Switching on inhibited set OC OFF3 1 p0848 p0849 44 Switching on inhibited supply STO terminal w 24 V hardware 45 Switching on inhibited remove fault acknowledge fault 46 Switching on inhibited exit commissioning mode p0010 70 Initi...

Page 473: ... drive can only be switched on outside the drive commissioning inverter enable To realize this this parameter must be set to 0 By setting p3900 to a value other than 0 the quick commissioning is completed and this parameter is automatically reset to 0 Procedure for Reset parameter Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1 Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time the motor parameters suitab...

Page 474: ...lable as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product r0018 Control Unit firmware version Firmware version Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting Description Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit Dependency See also r0197 r0198 ...

Page 475: ...onents from the slip compensation for induction motors are not included r0022 is identical to r0021 however it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over Dependency See also r0021 r0063 Note Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity The speed actual value is available smoothed r0021 r0022 and...

Page 476: ...an external 24 V power supply is connected a value of approx 24 V is displayed in the display parameter Note Smoothing time constant 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity The DC link voltage is available smoothed r0026 and unsmoothed r0070 r0026 sets itself to the lower value of the pulsating DC link voltage r0027 CO Absolute actual curr...

Page 477: ...s quantity and may only be used as a display quantity The field generating current actual value is available smoothed r0029 and unsmoothed r0076 r0030 Current actual value torque generating smoothed Iq_act smooth Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2002 Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6799 Min Arms Max Arms Factory setting Arms Descr...

Page 478: ... For firmware version 4 7 SP6 or p0612 12 0 r0034 motor model temperature 40 K p0605 40 K 100 From firmware version 4 7 SP6 and p0612 12 1 r0034 motor model temperature p0613 p0605 p0613 100 Dependency The thermal motor utilization is only determined when the motor temperature model 1 I2t is activated The following conditions are a prerequisite for additional information a temperature sensor has n...

Page 479: ...d p0600 0 or p0601 0 r0036 CO Power unit overload I2t PM overload I2t Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8021 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit I...

Page 480: ...aximum value of the rectifier temperatures r0037 11 12 The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter depletion layer or rectifier r0037 2 3 6 11 14 18 is only relevant for chassis power units In the case of a fault the particular shutdown threshold depends on the power unit and cannot be read out r0037 0 19 CO Power unit temperatures PM temperatures G120X_DP PM330 G120X_PN PM330 G12...

Page 481: ...ature of the hottest inverter depletion layer or rectifier In the case of a fault the particular shutdown threshold depends on the power unit and cannot be read out r0038 Power factor smoothed Cos phi smooth Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6799 8850 8950 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays ...

Page 482: ... and r0041 Procedure Set p0040 0 1 The displays are reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero Dependency See also r0039 Note When this display is reset p0040 then the process energy display r0042 is also reset r0041 Energy consumption saved Energy cons saved Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagra...

Page 483: ...42 Dependency See also r0042 p0045 Display values smoothing time constant Disp_val T_smooth Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6799 Min 0 00 ms Max 10000 00 ms Factory setting 4 00 ms Description Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values r0063 1 r0068 1 r0080 1 r0082 1 r0046...

Page 484: ...braking internal enable missing Yes No 21 Power unit enable missing Yes No 25 Function bypass active Yes No 26 Drive inactive or not operational Yes No 27 De magnetizing not completed Yes No 30 Speed controller inhibited Yes No 31 Jog setpoint active Yes No Dependency See also r0002 Parameters 7 2 Parameter list SINAMICS G120X converter 482 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 485: ... if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the switching on inhibited withdrawn with OFF1 0 Bit 17 1 enable signal missing if commissioning mode is selected p0010 0 there is an OFF2 fault response the drive is not operational Bit 18 1 enable signal missing if OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present Bit 19 1 internal pulse enable missing if sequence control doe...

Page 486: ...ent selected r0047 Motor data identification and speed controller optimization MotID and n_opt G120X_DP PM330 G120X_PN PM330 G120X_USS PM330 Access level 1 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 300 Factory setting Description Displays the actual status for the motor data identification stationary measurement and the...

Page 487: ...al name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DDS effective bit 0 ON OFF 01 DDS effective bit 1 ON OFF Dependency See also p0820 p0821 r0837 Note When selecting the motor data identification routine and the rotating measurement the drive data set changeover is suppressed r0052 0 15 CO BO Status word 1 ZSW 1 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selec...

Page 488: ...5 Bit 15 negated r0053 0 11 CO BO Status word 2 ZSW 2 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for status word 2 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DC braking active Yes No 01 n_act p1226 n_standstill Yes No 02 n_act p1080 n_min Yes No 03 ...

Page 489: ...01 n_act p1226 n_standstill Yes No 02 n_act p1080 n_min Yes No 03 I_act p2170 Yes No 04 n_act p2155 Yes No 05 n_act p2155 Yes No 06 n_act r1119 n_set Yes No 07 Vdc p2172 Yes No 08 Vdc p2172 Yes No 09 Ramp up ramp down completed Yes No 10 Technology controller output at the lower limit Yes No 11 Technology controller output at the upper limit Yes No NOTICE p2081 is used to define the signal sources...

Page 490: ...ter lower Yes No 15 CDS bit 0 Yes No Note The following control bits are displayed in r0054 Bit 00 r0898 Bit 0 Bit 01 r0898 Bit 1 Bit 02 r0898 Bit 2 Bit 03 r0898 Bit 3 Bit 04 r0898 Bit 4 Bit 05 r0898 Bit 5 Bit 06 r0898 Bit 6 Bit 07 r2138 Bit 7 Bit 08 r0898 Bit 8 Bit 09 r0898 Bit 9 Bit 10 r0898 Bit 10 Bit 11 r1198 Bit 11 Bit 13 r1198 Bit 13 Bit 14 r1198 Bit 14 Bit 15 r0836 Bit 0 r0055 0 15 CO BO Su...

Page 491: ...20X_DP DC braking G120X_PN DC braking G120X_USS DC braking Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2513 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for supplementary control word Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Fixed setpoint bit 0 Yes No 01 Fixed setpoint bit 1 Yes No 02 Fixed ...

Page 492: ...ting Active Inactive 6301 06 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6301 07 Frequency negative Yes No 08 Field weakening active Yes No 09 Voltage limit active Yes No 6714 10 Slip limit active Yes No 6310 11 Frequency limit active Yes No 12 Current limiting controller voltage output active Yes No 13 Current torque limiting Active Inactive 6060 14 Vdc_max controller active Yes No 6220 6320 15 Vdc_min ...

Page 493: ...0 smoothed with p0045 is additionally displayed in r0063 1 r0063 1 can be used as process variable for the appropriate smoothing time constant p0045 The speed r0063 2 calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual value r0063 0 in the steady state For U f control the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063 2 eve...

Page 494: ...t is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal protection See also p0290 p0640 r0068 0 1 CO Absolute current actual value I_act abs val Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2002 Dynamic index Unit group 6_2 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6300 6714 6799 7017 8017 8021 8022 Min Arms Max Arms Factory setting Arms De...

Page 495: ...TICE When measuring a DC link voltage 200 V for the Power Module e g PM240 a valid measured value is not supplied In this case when an external 24 V power supply is connected a value of approx 24 V is displayed in the display parameter Note The DC link voltage is available smoothed r0026 and unsmoothed r0070 r0071 Maximum output voltage Voltage max Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint...

Page 496: ...ex Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 5730 6730 6731 6799 8940 8950 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the actual modulation depth Dependency See also r0028 Note For space vector modulation 100 corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol Values above 100 indicate an overcontrol condition values below 100 have no overcontrol The phase volt...

Page 497: ...rrent setpoint Note This value is irrelevant for the U f control mode r0078 CO Current actual value torque generating Iq_act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2002 Dynamic index Unit group 6_2 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6310 6700 6714 6799 Min Arms Max Arms Factory setting Arms Description Display and connector output for the torque generating c...

Page 498: ...ting kW Description Displays the instantaneous active power Index 0 Unsmoothed 1 Smoothed with p0045 2 Electric power Dependency See also r0032 Note The mechanical active power is available smoothed r0032 with 100 ms r0082 1 with p0045 and unsmoothed r0082 0 r0083 CO Flux setpoint Flex setp Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group ...

Page 499: ...ing the commissioning and control view for various application classes Value 0 Expert 1 Standard Drive Control SDC 2 Dynamic Drive Control DDC Dependency The parameter is preset when commissioning the system for the first time and for the factory setting depending on the power unit that is connected Power unit is more than 18KW p0096 2 Power unit is less than 18KW p0096 1 Depending on the setting ...

Page 500: ...ta type Integer16 Can be changed C2 1 2 Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings e g rated motor power p0307 are expressed in kW or hp Depending on the selection the rated motor frequency p0310 is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz For p0100 0 2 the following applies The power f...

Page 501: ...tion is only possible in the delta connection type When selected the maximum speed p1082 is automatically pre assigned for a maximum output frequency of 87 Hz p0170 Number of Command Data Sets CDS CDS count Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed C2 15 Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8560 Min 2 Max 4 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the numbe...

Page 502: ... Description Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version r0198 0 BIOS version r0198 1 EEPROM data version EEPROM 0 r0198 2 EEPROM data version EEPROM 1 Dependency See also r0018 r0197 Note Example The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01 01 01 00 r0200 0 n Power unit code number actual PU code no act Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index PDS p0120 ...

Page 503: ...diagram Min 2 Max 400 Factory setting Description Displays the type of power unit found Value 2 MICROMASTER 440 3 MICROMASTER 411 4 MICROMASTER 410 5 MICROMASTER 436 6 MICROMASTER 440 PX 7 MICROMASTER 430 100 SINAMICS S 101 SINAMICS S value 102 SINAMICS S combi 103 SINAMICS S120M distributed 112 PM220 SINAMICS G120 113 PM230 SINAMICS G120 114 PM240 SINAMICS G120 S120 115 PM250 SINAMICS G120 S120 1...

Page 504: ... vector drives 1 Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives 6 S1 duty cycle for internal use 7 S6 duty cycle for internal use Dependency See also r3996 NOTICE The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored see p0010 30 p0970 When the power unit use is changed short term communication interruptions may occur Note When the parameter is changed all of the motor paramet...

Page 505: ... 1 Load duty cycle with low overload 2 Load duty cycle with high overload 3 S1 cont duty cyc 4 S6 load duty cycle Dependency IECdrives p0100 0 Units kW NEMA drives p0100 1 Units hp See also p0100 p0205 r0207 0 4 Rated power unit current PU PI_rated Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8021 Min Arms Max A...

Page 506: ...tput current of the power unit Index 0 Catalog 1 Load duty cycle with low overload 2 Load duty cycle with high overload 3 S1 load duty cycle 4 S6 load duty cycle Dependency See also p0205 p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage U_connect Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 1 V Max 63000 V Factory setting ...

Page 507: ... p0230 4 p0290 power unit overload response inhibit pulse frequency reduction p1802 modulator modes space vector modulation without overcontrol The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine wave filter and also the user must check whether they are permitted p0233 power unit motor reactor filter inductance p0234 power unit sine wave filter capacitance filter cap...

Page 508: ...e cable lengths between the drive unit and motor Index 0 Unshielded 1 Shielded Note The display value is used to provide information for service and maintenance p0233 Power unit motor reactor PU mot reactor Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 000 mH Max 1000 000 mH Factory setting 0 000 m...

Page 509: ...index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 1 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description Sets the number of reactors connected in series at the power unit output Dependency See also p0230 NOTICE The reactor inductances should be the same If the number of motor reactors connected in series does not correspond to this parameter value then this can result in an unfavorable control behavior r0238 In...

Page 510: ... 100000 h Factory setting 40000 h Description Sets the maximum operating time of the power unit fan The prealarm warning is output 500 hours before this set value The monitoring is deactivated with p0252 0 Dependency See also p0251 See also A30042 Note For PM330 power units the maximum operating time of the fan on the power unit is saved and displayed in p0252 The Restore factory setting function ...

Page 511: ...ess level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8021 Min 0 Max 13 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload heat sink temperature r0037 0 chip temperature r0037 1 power unit overload I2t r0036 Poss...

Page 512: ...l 4 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8021 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload heat sink temperature r0037 0 chip temperature r0037 1 power unit overload I2t r0036 Possible meas...

Page 513: ...pping shutdown temperature Drive If this threshold is exceeded an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290 Infeed When the threshold value is exceeded only an overload alarm is output Index 0 Overtemperature heat sink 1 Temperature rise power semiconductor chip Dependency See also r0037 p0290 See also A05000 A05001 p0294 Power unit alarm with I2t overload PU I2...

Page 514: ...ge exceeds the threshold specified here the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage Dependency See also F30002 p0300 0 n Motor type selection Mot type sel Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed C2 1 3 Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6310 Min 0 Max 603 Factory setting 0 Description Selecting the motor type The first digit of ...

Page 515: ...is set to a non Siemens motor that matches p0301 e g p0300 1 for p0301 1xxxx Write protection is automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters The motor type of a catalog motor corresponds to the upper three digits of the code number or the following assignment if the particular motor type is listed Type code number ranges 100 100xx 110xx 1...

Page 516: ...l motor model are pre assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311 CAUTION If a motor is selected which is not contained in the motor lists p0300 100 then the motor code number must be reset p0301 0 if previously a motor was parameterized from the motor list NOTICE If a catalog motor is selected p0300 100 and an associated motor code number p0301 then the parameters that are associated with this list...

Page 517: ... a catalog motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection Note When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor star delta must be taken into account Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored the parameter is p...

Page 518: ...306 it is imperative that the control parameters are adapted e g using automatic calculation with p0340 1 p3900 0 For induction motors that are connected in parallel but which are not mechanically coupled with one another then the following applies an individual motor must not be loaded beyond its stall point NOTICE If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning p0010 1 then the maximum current p0...

Page 519: ...d motor efficiency rating plate For a parameter value of 0 0 the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332 Dependency This parameter is only visible for NEMA motors p0100 1 2 See also p0100 p0308 r0332 Note The parameter is not used for synchronous motors p0310 0 n Rated motor frequency Mot f_rated Access level 1 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 3 Scaling...

Page 520: ...ctory settings have been defined accordingly the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit p0311 0 n Rated motor speed Mot n_rated Access level 1 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 3 Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0 rpm Max 210000 0 rpm Factory setting 0 0 rpm Description Sets the rated motor speed rating plate Fo...

Page 521: ...mber is automatically calculated from the rated frequency p0310 and the rated speed p0311 and displayed in r0313 NOTICE If p0314 is changed during quick commissioning p0010 1 the maximum speed p1082 which is also associated with quick commissioning is pre assigned accordingly For induction motors it is only necessary to enter the value if the rated motor slip is so high that the pole pair number r...

Page 522: ...ts the rated motor short circuit current NOTICE When selecting a catalog motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection Note The magnetizing current p0320 for induction motors is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 0 If for induction motors the magnetizing current p0320...

Page 523: ...00 000 Arms Factory setting 0 000 Arms Description Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two stage technique for pole position identification routine The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329 The two stage technique is selected with p1980 4 Dependency See also p0329 p1980 r1992 NOTICE When the motor code p0301 is changed it is possible that p0325 is not pre assigned p0325 can be pre assigne...

Page 524: ...32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0000 Arms Max 10000 0000 Arms Factory setting 0 0000 Arms Description Sets the current for the pole position identification routine p1980 1 For a two stage technique p1980 4 the current is set for the 2nd phase The current for the 1st phase is set in p0325 Dependency The following applies for vec...

Page 525: ...0308 0 this value is displayed For NEMA motors the following applies p0100 1 2 For p0309 0 the internally calculated power factor is displayed For p0309 0 this value is converted into the power factor and displayed Dependency If p0308 is not entered the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters Note The parameter is not used for synchronous motors p0300 2xx r0333 0 n Rated motor tor...

Page 526: ...on Function diagram Min Vrms Max Vrms Factory setting Vrms Description Displays the rated EMF of the motor Note EMF Electromotive force p0340 0 n Automatic calculation motor control parameters Calc auto par Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 5 Factory setting 0 Description Setting to au...

Page 527: ...0360 p0340 3 contains the calculations of p0340 4 5 p0340 4 only calculates the controller parameters p0340 5 only calculates the controller limits When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 0 p0340 is automatically set to 1 At the end of the calculations p0340 is automatically set to 0 p0341 0 n Motor moment of inertia Mot M_mom of inert Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Floati...

Page 528: ...r model Mot weight th mod Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group 27_1 Unit selection p0100 Function diagram Min 0 0 kg Max 50000 0 kg Factory setting 0 0 kg Description Sets the motor weight Dependency IEC drives p0100 0 unit kg NEMA drives p0100 1 unit lb NOTICE When selecting a catalog motor p0301 this paramete...

Page 529: ...t32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 000 s Max 20 000 s Factory setting 0 000 s Description Sets the de magnetizing time for induction motors after the inverter pulses have been canceled The inverter pulses cannot be switched in enabled within this delay time Note The parameter is calculated using p0340 1 3 For induction motors the...

Page 530: ... the power cable between the power unit and motor CAUTION The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification If it is used subsequently the difference by which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must be repeated The difference with which p0352 was manually changed must also be subtracted from reference parameter...

Page 531: ... synchronous motors p0300 2 this is the non saturated value and is therefore ideal for a low current For a controlled reluctance motor p0300 6 this is the direct axis stator inductance at the rated operating point p0357 0 n Motor stator inductance d axis Mot L_stator d Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_EQU Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Uni...

Page 532: ...vel 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6723 6838 Min 10 0 Max 800 0 Factory setting 60 0 Description The saturation characteristics flux as a function of the magnetizing current is defined using 4 points This parameter specifies the y coordinate flux for the 1st value pair of the characteristic Sets t...

Page 533: ...is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected p0300 p0365 0 n Motor saturation characteristic flux 4 Mot saturat flux 4 Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6723 6838 Min 10 0 Max 800 0 Factory setting 125 0 Description The saturation characteristics flux as a function of the magnetizin...

Page 534: ...tion current of the saturation characteristic in with reference to the rated magnetization current r0331 Dependency The following applies for the magnetizing currents p0366 p0367 p0368 p0369 See also p0363 Note When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 0 then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected p0300 p0368 0 n Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 3 Mot sat I_mag 3 ...

Page 535: ...ng Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min ohm Max ohm Factory setting ohm Description Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature p0625 The value does not include the cable resistance Dependency See also p0625 r0372 0 n Cable resistance Mot R_cable Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 U...

Page 536: ... inductance total Mot L_leak total Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6640 6714 6721 6828 6834 6836 Min mH Max mH Factory setting mH Description Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor including the motor reactor p0233 r0382 0 n Motor magnetizing inductance transformed Mot L_magn ...

Page 537: ...kW Factory setting kW Description Displays the rated motor power Note The parameter displays p0307 For p0307 0 r0394 is calculated from p0304 and p0305 only for induction motors Depending on the actual motor type deviations can occur from the actual rated motor power r0395 0 n Actual stator resistance R_stator act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic i...

Page 538: ...agram Min 0 Max 5 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the technology application The parameter influences the calculation of open loop and closed loop control parameters that is e g initiated using p0340 5 Value 0 Standard drive 1 Pumps and fans 2 Sensorless closed loop control down to f 0 passive loads 3 Pumps and fans efficiency optimization 5 Starting with a high break loose torque Dependency Fo...

Page 539: ... p3855 7 For p1750 The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors p1750 2 1 Encoderless control of the induction motor is effective down to zero frequency This operating mode is possible for passive loads These include applications where the load does not generate regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill zero speed itself when the pulses are inhibited ...

Page 540: ...ion The parameter influences the calculation of open loop and closed loop control parameters that is e g initiated using p0340 5 Value 0 Constant load linear characteristic 1 Speed dependent load parabolic characteristic Dependency See also p1300 NOTICE If the technological application is set to p0501 0 1 during commissioning p0010 1 5 30 the operating mode p1300 is pre set accordingly Note The ca...

Page 541: ... on p0205 power unit application p0502 Technological application Dynamic Drive Control Techn appl DDC G120X_DP PM330 G120X_PN PM330 G120X_USS PM330 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed C2 1 T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 3 Max 3 Factory setting 3 Description Sets the technology application for dynamic applications p0096 2 The paramete...

Page 542: ...00 Factory setting 1 000000 Description Sets the reference values for the specific scaling of BICO parameters The specific scaling is active when interconnecting with other BICO parameters and can be used in the following cases 1 Parameter with the marking Scaling p0514 2 Changing the standard scaling for parameters with the marking Scaling p2000 Scaling p2007 Relative values refer to the correspo...

Page 543: ...for the specific scaling p0516 0 parameter number p0516 1 parameter number p0516 2 parameter number p0516 19 parameter number Dependency See also p0514 p0517 0 19 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 2 Scal spec p514 2 Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory s...

Page 544: ...vel 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514 5 for the specific scaling p0520 0 parameter number p0520 1 parameter number p0520 2 parameter number p0520 19 parameter number Dependency See also p0514 p0521 0 19 S...

Page 545: ...ue in p0514 8 for the specific scaling p0523 0 parameter number p0523 1 parameter number p0523 2 parameter number p0523 19 parameter number Dependency See also p0514 p0524 0 19 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 9 Scal spec p514 9 Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 429496...

Page 546: ...umber of the bearing When setting p0301 and p0530 the code number is automatically pre assigned and is write protected The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection Dependency See also p0301 p0530 p0532 p1082 NOTICE If p0531 is changed during quick commissioning p0010 1 then the maximum speed p1082 which is also associated with quick commissioning is pre assigned appro...

Page 547: ...s NOTICE The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters e g p0305 are entered and only one drive data set exists p0180 1 This is the case during initial commissioning Once the motor and control parameters have been calculated p0340 p3900 the inhibit for the reference value calculation is automatically re activated Note If value 0 The automatic calculation p03...

Page 548: ...logy controller parameters are switched over unit group 9_1 See also p0596 Note When switching over from into another unit the following sequence applies set p0596 set p0595 to the required unit p0596 Technological unit reference quantity Tech unit ref qty Access level 1 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 01 ...

Page 549: ...peration torque errors will occur that will mean that the motor will not be able to be stopped Note For p0601 1 Tripping resistance 1650 Ohm Wire breakage and short circuit monitoring For PT100 When PT100 measurement is enabled p29700 0 the set value of p0601 is no impact p0604 0 n Mot_temp_mod 2 sensor alarm threshold Mod 2 sens A_thr Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be cha...

Page 550: ... p0611 p0612 See also F07011 A07012 NOTICE When selecting a catalog motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection Motor temperature model 1 I2t The following applies for firmware version 4 7 SP6 or p0612 8 0 p0605 also defines the final temperature of the model for r0034 100 Therefore...

Page 551: ...he motor standstill current is not parameterized up until a temperature rise of 63 of the continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached Dependency The parameter is only used for synchronous motors p0300 2xx 4 and synchronous reluctance motors p0300 6xx See also r0034 p0612 p0615 See also F07011 A07012 A07910 NOTICE This parameter is automatically pre set from the motor database for...

Page 552: ...nction Temperature model 1 operates in the standard mode Overtemperature at rated load p0605 40 C Alarm threshold p0605 Fault threshold p0615 The following applies from firmware version 4 7 SP6 bits 0 and 8 temperature model 1 operates in the extended mode Overtemperature at rated load p0627 Alarm threshold p5390 Fault threshold p5391 For bit 09 This bit is used to extend the motor temperature mod...

Page 553: ... Mot_temp_mod 1 I2t fault threshold I2t F thresh Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group 21_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8017 Min 0 0 C Max 220 0 C Factory setting 180 0 C Description Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature for motor temperature model 1 I2t The following applies for firmware ...

Page 554: ...ification of the stator resistance of induction motors after the Control Unit runs up only for vector control The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data identification p0350 to the matching ambient temperature p0625 the actual mean temperature of the stator winding is calculated The result is used to initialize the thermal moto...

Page 555: ...he drive is switched on pulse enable If a reference value for the stator resistance at an ambient temperature is entered into p0629 then the setting value for the stator temperature is generated from this value and not from p0350 When activating the measurement p0621 1 2 p0629 is determined when first starting the drive p0629 should be saved for subsequent use In order that p0629 matches the ambie...

Page 556: ...ends on the settling time of the measured current For p0622 p0346 the following applies Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346 so that p0346 represents the maximum possible magnetizing time during identification The entire measurement period magnetizing plus measurement settling time plus measuring time will always be greater than p0346 r0623 Rs identification stator r...

Page 557: ...he rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature motor temperature model 1 I2t p0612 0 1 The following applies for firmware version 4 7 SP6 or p0612 8 0 p0605 is of significance for the rated temperature The following applies from firmware version 4 7 SP6 and p0612 8 1 Overtemperature at the rated operating point motor temperature model 2 p0612 1 1 Overtemperature...

Page 558: ... than 30 C r0035 a temperature sensor is not being used p0601 See also p0621 r0623 Note The reference value to identify the stator resistance is determined at the first identification This must be realized when the motor is in a cold state as the value refers to the ambient temperature p0625 The feeder cable resistance should be entered into p0352 before the measurement The result must be saved af...

Page 559: ...ndency See also r0209 p0323 Note The parameter is part of the quick commissioning p0010 1 this means that it is appropriately pre assigned when changing p0305 The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209 The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the power unit The torque and power limits p1520 p1521 p1530 p1531 matching the current li...

Page 560: ... Dependency See also p0651 See also A01590 Note For p0651 0 the operating hours counter is disabled The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0 The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 DDS p0651 0 n Motor operating hours maintenance interval Mot t_op maint Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit g...

Page 561: ...term act val Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2201 2221 2256 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual value at the digital inputs This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode p0795 x 1 to terminal mode p0795 x...

Page 562: ...203 IO module terminal r0723 0 12 CO BO CU digital inputs status inverted CU DI status inv Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2119 2120 2121 2130 2131 2132 2133 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DI 0 X133 ...

Page 563: ...ry setting 52 3 Description Sets the signal source for terminal DO 0 NO X134 19 NC X134 18 Recommendation r0052 0 Ready for switching on r0052 1 Ready for operation r0052 2 Operation enabled r0052 3 Fault present r0052 4 Coast down active OFF2 r0052 5 Quick stop active OFF3 r0052 6 Switching on inhibited active r0052 7 Alarm present r0052 9 Control request r0052 14 Motor rotates forwards r0053 0 D...

Page 564: ...ve r0053 1 n_act p2167 n_off r0053 2 n_act p1080 n_min r0053 3 I_act p2170 r0053 4 n_act p2155 r0053 5 n_act p2155 r0053 6 n_act n_set r0053 10 Technology controller output at the lower limit r0053 11 Technology controller output at the upper limit NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed Note DO Digital Output Relay output NO normally open NC norma...

Page 565: ...nal source for terminal DO 3 CU s_s DO 3 Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 52 7 Description Sets the signal source for terminal DO 3 NO X204 95 NC X204 96 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed Note DO Digital Output X204...

Page 566: ... Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for terminal DO 5 NO x204 91 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed Note DO Digital Output X204 IO module terminal Relay output NO normally open r0747 CU digital outputs status CU DO status Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic in...

Page 567: ...4 91 Inverted Not inverted Note DO Digital Output X204 IO module terminal Relay output NO normally open NC normally closed r0751 0 11 BO CU analog inputs status word CU AI status word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2251 2252 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and binector output for the status ...

Page 568: ...mooth Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9566 9568 9576 Min 0 0 ms Max 1000 0 ms Factory setting 0 0 ms Description Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order lowpass filter for the analog inputs Index 0 AI0 X132 3 4 1 AI1 X132 10 11 2 NI 1000 0 X202 80 82 3 NI 1000 1 X202 81 82 Note AI Anal...

Page 569: ...the temperature input DIP switch AI2 must be set to TEMP Value 0 Unipolar voltage input 0 V 10 V 1 Unipolar voltage input monitored 2 V 10 V 2 Unipolar current input 0 mA 20 mA 3 Unipolar current input monitored 4 mA to 20 mA 4 Bipolar voltage input 10 V 10 V 6 Temperature sensor LG Ni1000 7 Temperature sensor PT1000 8 No sensor connected 10 Temperature sensor DIN Ni 1k 6180 ppm K Index 0 AI0 X132...

Page 570: ...re measurement r0752 p0757 p0759 are displayed in C p0756 2 3 8 No temperature sensor connected Mode for deactivating sensor monitoring alarm A03520 In addition the associated DIP switch must be set For the voltage input DIP switch AI0 1 must be set to U For the current input DIP switch AI0 1 or AI2 must be set to I For the temperature input DIP switch AI2 must be set to TEMP Value 0 Unipolar volt...

Page 571: ...log inputs is defined using 2 points This parameter specifies the x coordinate V mA C of the 1st value pair of the characteristic Index 0 AI0 X132 3 4 1 AI1 X132 10 11 2 NI 1000 0 X202 80 82 3 NI 1000 1 X202 81 82 Note The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect X202 IO module terminal p0758 0 3 CU analog inputs characteristic value y1 CU AI char y1 Access level 2 Calculate...

Page 572: ...group Unit selection Function diagram 9566 9568 9576 Min 1000 00 Max 1000 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points This parameter specifies the y coordinate percentage of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic Index 0 AI0 X132 3 4 1 AI1 X132 10 11 2 NI 1000 0 X202 80 82 3...

Page 573: ...toring of the analog inputs Index 0 AI0 X132 3 4 1 AI1 X132 10 11 2 NI 1000 0 X202 80 82 3 NI 1000 1 X202 81 82 Note AI Analog Input X202 IO module terminal p0764 0 3 CU analog inputs dead zone CU AI dead zone Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2251 Min 0 000 Max 20 000 Factory setting 0 000 Descri...

Page 574: ...lection Function diagram 9572 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs Index 0 AO0 X133 12 13 1 AO1 X202 85 86 2 AO2 X202 83 84 Note AO Analog Output X202 IO module terminal p0773 0 2 CU analog outputs smoothing time constant CU AO T_smooth Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit gr...

Page 575: ...Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs Value 0 No absolute value generation 1 Absolute value generation switched in Index 0 AO0 X133 12 13 1 AO1 X202 85 86 2 AO2 X202 83 84 Note AO Analog Output X202 IO module terminal p0776 0 2 CU analog outputs type CU AO type Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection ...

Page 576: ...OTICE This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p0776 type of analog outputs Note The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect X202 IO module terminal p0778 0 2 CU analog outputs characteristic value y1 CU AO char y1 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9572 Min...

Page 577: ...t group Unit selection Function diagram 9572 Min 20 000 V Max 20 000 V Factory setting 20 000 V Description Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points This parameter specifies the y coordinate output voltage in V or output current in mA of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic Index 0 AO0 X133 12 13 1 AO1 X2...

Page 578: ...ram Min 200 000 Max 200 000 Factory setting 0 000 Description Setting and connector output to control the analog outputs via fieldbus Index 0 AO0 X133 12 13 1 AO1 X202 85 86 2 AO2 X202 83 84 Dependency See also p0771 Note AO Analog Output The following interconnections must be established to control the analog outputs via fieldbus AO 0 p0771 0 with p0791 0 AO 1 p0771 1 with p0791 1 AO 2 p0771 2 wi...

Page 579: ...level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2201 2221 2256 Min Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DI 0 X133 5 High Low 01 DI 1 X133 6 High Low 02 DI 2 X133 7 High Low 03 DI...

Page 580: ...namic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 50 000 Max 2000 000 Factory setting 0 000 Description Sets the setpoint for the input value in the simulation mode of the analog inputs Index 0 AI0 X132 3 4 1 AI1 X132 10 11 2 NI 1000 0 X202 80 82 3 NI 1000 1 X202 81 82 Dependency The simulation of an analog input is selected using p0797 If AI x is parameterized as a voltage input p0756 th...

Page 581: ...a parameter backup from to the non volatile device memory Transfer from memory card to device memory p0804 1 sets the target of the parameter backup e g p0803 10 PS010xxx ACX is the target Transfer from non volatile device memory to memory card p0804 2 sets the source of the parameter backup e g p0803 11 PS011xxx ACX is the source Value 0 Source target standard 10 Source target with setting 10 11 ...

Page 582: ...device memory and stored as PS010xxx ACX this parameter backup can be loaded to the volatile device memory using p0010 30 and p0970 10 to permanently save in the device memory and also on the memory card this parameter backup should be saved using p0971 1 Example 3 only supported for PROFIBUS PROFINET The PROFIBUS or PROFINET device master data GSD should be transferred from the device memory to t...

Page 583: ...er backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22 p0803 0 parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0 p0804 2 start data transfer from device memory to memory card PS000xxx ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx ACX the parameter backup PS022xxx ACX on the memory card can be used for data backup Example 2 The parameter backup is to...

Page 584: ...trl inhibit Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to block the master control Dependency See also r0807 Note The commissioning software drive control panel uses the master control for example r0807 0 BO Master control active PcCtrl active Ac...

Page 585: ...20X_DP G120X_PN Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8560 Min Max Factory setting 722 4 Description Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 CDS bit 0 Dependency See also r0050 p0811 r0836 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed Not...

Page 586: ...diagram 8565 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description Copies one Drive Data Set DDS into another Index 0 Source Drive Data Set 1 Target Drive Data Set 2 Start copying procedure Dependency See also r3996 NOTICE When the drive data sets are copied short term communication interruptions may occur Note Procedure 1 In Index 0 enter which drive data set is to be copied 2 In index 1 enter the drive data...

Page 587: ... motor numbers must be used In this case the data set can only be switched when the pulse inhibit is set Note If the motor numbers are identical the same thermal motor model is used for calculation after data set changeover If different motor numbers are used different models are also used for calculating the inactive motor cools down in each case For the same motor number the correction values of...

Page 588: ... FP 00 CDS selection bit 0 ON OFF 01 CDS selection bit 1 ON OFF Dependency See also r0050 p0810 p0811 Note Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050 r0837 0 1 CO BO Drive Data Set DDS selected DDS selected Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit sele...

Page 589: ...20 the following applies BI p0840 0 signal OFF1 braking with the ramp function generator then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited For drives with closed loop torque control p1300 22 the following applies BI p0840 0 signal immediate pulse suppression For drives with closed loop torque control activated using p1501 the following applies BI p0840 0 signal No dedicated braking response but pu...

Page 590: ...TW1 1 BI p0844 0 signal or BI p0845 0 signal OFF2 immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited BI p0844 1 signal and BI p0845 1 signal no OFF2 enable is possible CAUTION When master control from PC is activated this binector input is ineffective NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p0844 0 n BI No coast down coast down OFF2 signal sour...

Page 591: ...FF2 enable is possible CAUTION When master control from PC is activated this binector input is effective p0845 0 n BI No coast down coast down OFF2 signal source 2 OFF2 S_s 2 G120X_DP PM330 G120X_PN PM330 G120X_USS PM330 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2501 8720 8820 8920 Min Max Facto...

Page 592: ... control activated using p1501 the following applies BI p0848 0 signal no dedicated braking response but pulse suppression when standstill is detected p1226 p1227 p0848 0 n BI No Quick Stop Quick Stop OFF3 signal source 1 OFF3 S_s 1 G120X_USS Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2501 Min Ma...

Page 593: ...el 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2501 Min Max Factory setting 4022 2 Description Sets the second signal source for the command No quick stop quick stop OFF3 The following signals are AND ed BI p0848 No quick stop quick stop OFF3 signal source 1 BI p0849 No quick stop quick stop OFF3 signal source...

Page 594: ... Inhibit operation suppress pulses BI p0852 1 signal Enable operation pulses can be enabled CAUTION When master control from PC is activated this binector input is ineffective NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p0854 0 n BI Control by PLC no control by PLC Master ctrl by PLC G120X_DP G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Bina...

Page 595: ...10 must be set to 1 PZD1 so that the received data is updated This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration p0922 999 p0857 Power unit monitoring time PU t_monit Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8760 8864 8964 Min 100 0 ms Max 60000 0 ms Factory...

Page 596: ...ctor monitoring time LineContact t_mon Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2634 Min 0 ms Max 5000 ms Factory setting 100 ms Description Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor This time starts each time that the line contactor switches r0863 1 If a feedback signal is not received from the line ...

Page 597: ...Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 ms Max 65000 ms Factory setting 0 ms Description Sets the debounce time for the DC circuit breaker for power units in the chassis format Dependency The parameter is only active for PM330 power units Note The following applies if p0868 65000 ms The debounce time defined internally in the power unit s EEPROM is implemented p0869 ...

Page 598: ...ignal 0 signal FP 00 ON OFF1 Yes No 01 OC OFF2 Yes No 02 OC OFF3 Yes No 03 Enable operation Yes No 04 Enable ramp function generator Yes No 05 Continue ramp function generator Yes No 06 Enable speed setpoint Yes No 08 Jog 1 Yes No 3001 09 Jog 2 Yes No 3001 10 Master control by PLC Yes No Note OC Operating condition r0899 0 11 CO BO Status word sequence control ZSW seq_ctrl Access level 2 Calculate...

Page 599: ...address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection PZD telegr_sel G120X_DP G120X_PN Access level 1 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed C2 1 T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2401 2420 Min 1 Max 999 Factory setting 1 Description Sets the send and receive telegram Value 1 Standard telegram 1 PZD 2 2 20 Standard t...

Page 600: ...corresponding product documentation Note The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 Fault buffer structure general principle r0945 0 r0949 0 r0948 0 r2109 0 actual fault case fault 1 r0945 7 r0949 7 r0948 7 r2109 7 actual fault case fault 8 r0945 8 r0949 8 r0948 8 r2109 8 1st acknowledged fault case fault 1 r0945 15 r0949 15 r0948 15 r2109 15 1st...

Page 601: ...he TimeDifference data type applies r0949 0 63 Fault value Fault value Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8050 8060 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays additional information about the fault that occurred as integer number Dependency See also r0945 r0947 r0948 r2109 r2130 r2133 r2136 r3120 r3122 Not...

Page 602: ...changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the device identification Index 0 Company Siemens 42 1 Device type 2 Firmware version 3 Firmware date year 4 Firmware date day month 5 Number of drive objects 6 Firmware patch hot fix Note Example r0964 0 42 SIEMENS r0964 1 device type see below r0964 2 403 first part of the firmwa...

Page 603: ...Device type r0964 1 5721 SINAMICS G120X PN r0964 0 6 Device identification Device ident G120X_USS Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the device identification Index 0 Company Siemens 42 1 Device type 2 Firmware version 3 Firmware date year 4 Firmware date day mon...

Page 604: ...ROFIdrive the TimeDifference data type applies p0970 Reset drive parameters Drive par reset Access level 1 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed C2 1 30 Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 300 Factory setting 0 Description The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the drive parameters Parameters p0100 p0205 are not reset The following motor para...

Page 605: ...ional is inserted and the USB interface is not used the following applies The parameters are also saved on the card and therefore overwrite any existing data NOTICE The Control Unit power supply may only be switched off after data has been saved i e after data save has been started wait until the parameter again has the value 0 Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving The progress while sav...

Page 606: ...2 0 the reset was successfully executed p0972 0 the reset was not executed r0980 0 299 List of existing parameters 1 List avail par 1 Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the parameters that exist for this drive Dependency See also r0981 r0989 Note Modified paramet...

Page 607: ...m a higher level control system e g PROFIBUS master r0990 0 99 List of modified parameters 1 List chang par 1 Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive Dependency See also r0991 r0999 Note Modif...

Page 608: ...ot displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software However they can be read from a higher level control system e g PROFIBUS master p1000 0 n Speed setpoint selection n_set sel G120X_DP G120X_PN Access level 1 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 200 Factory setting 6 Description Sets the sour...

Page 609: ...ed speed setpoint 76 Analog setpoint 2 fieldbus 77 Analog setpoint 2 analog setpoint 2 200 Analog output connection Dependency When changing this parameter the following settings are influenced See also p1070 p1071 p1075 p1076 CAUTION If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus the following BICO interconnection is set automatically p2051 1 r0063 NOTICE The parameter is possibly prot...

Page 610: ...Analog setpoint analog setpoint 23 Analog setpoint fixed speed setpoint 26 Analog setpoint fieldbus 27 Analog setpoint analog setpoint 2 30 Fixed speed setpoint no main setpoint 31 Fixed speed setpoint motor potentiometer 32 Fixed speed setpoint analog setpoint 33 Fixed speed setpoint fixed speed setpoint 36 Fixed speed setpoint fieldbus 37 Fixed speed setpoint analog setpoint 2 60 Fieldbus no mai...

Page 611: ...CE A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set p1003 0 n CO Fixed speed setpoint 3 n_set_fixed 3 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3010 Min 210000 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Descrip...

Page 612: ...a set always acts on the effective data set p1007 0 n CO Fixed speed setpoint 7 n_set_fixed 7 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3010 Min 210000 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 7 Depende...

Page 613: ...set always acts on the effective data set p1011 0 n CO Fixed speed setpoint 11 n_set_fixed 11 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3010 Min 210000 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 11 Depend...

Page 614: ...ive data set p1015 0 n CO Fixed speed setpoint 15 n_set_fixed 15 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3010 Min 210000 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 15 Dependency See also p1020 p1021 p10...

Page 615: ... for selecting the fixed speed setpoint Dependency Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 p1023 Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197 Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 15 using p1001 p1015 See also p1020 p1022 p1023 r1197 Note If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected p1020 p1023 0 r1197 0 then r1024 0 setpoint 0 p1022 0 n BI Fixed speed...

Page 616: ...t This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected e g with the main setpoint Recommendation Interconnect the signal with the main setpoint CI p1070 r1024 Dependency Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 p1023 Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197 Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 15 usi...

Page 617: ...ssive reaction when keys are pressed The jerk for the initial rounding off is independent of the ramp up time and only depends on the selected maximum speed p1082 It is calculated as follows r 0 01 p1082 1 s 0 13 2 s 2 The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached a_max p1082 1 s p1047 s and then the drive continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration The higher the m...

Page 618: ...m 2505 3020 Min Max Factory setting 0 2090 14 1 0 2 0 3 0 Description Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer The setpoint change CO r1050 depends on the set ramp down time p1048 and the duration of the signal that is present BI p1036 Dependency See also p1035 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed...

Page 619: ...se The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value see function diagram 3020 p1039 0 n BI Motorized potentiometer inversion MotP inv Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3020 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to invert the minimum spe...

Page 620: ...rce for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode Dependency See also p1041 p1043 0 n BI Motorized potentiometer accept setting value MotP acc set val Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3020 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to accept the...

Page 621: ...election Function diagram 3020 Min 0 000 s Max 1000 000 s Factory setting 10 000 s Description Sets the ramp down time for the internal ramp function generator for the motorized potentiometer The setpoint is changed from the speed velocity limit p1082 to zero within this time if no initial rounding off has been activated Dependency See also p1030 p1047 p1082 Note The deceleration time is extended ...

Page 622: ...vel 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2501 3030 Min Max Factory setting 0 0 1 722 0 2 0 3 0 Description Sets the signal source for jog 1 Recommendation When the setting for this binector input is changed the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate signal change of the source Dependen...

Page 623: ... bit 1 G120X_USS Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2501 3030 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for jog 2 Recommendation When the setting for this binector input is changed the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate signal change of the source ...

Page 624: ...lso p1082 p1083 p1085 p1086 p1088 p1070 0 n CI Main setpoint Main setpoint G120X_DP G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling p2000 Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3001 3030 Min Max Factory setting 0 2050 1 1 0 2 0 3 0 Description Sets the signal source for the main setpoint Examples r1024 Fixed speed setpoin...

Page 625: ..._1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3030 Min rpm Max rpm Factory setting rpm Description Displays the effective main setpoint The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling p1075 0 n CI Supplementary setp Suppl setp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling p2000 Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3001 3030 Min ...

Page 626: ...r non synchronous operation a setting to the maximum time difference between two setpoints is recommended For sensorless vector control interpolation should always be activated if the ramp up and ramp down times of the ramp function generator are very short The drive must be able to follow the external speed setpoint the drive does not ramp up at the torque limit Note For acceleration precontrol o...

Page 627: ...ling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3020 3050 3070 Min 0 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 1500 000 rpm Description Sets the highest possible speed Example Induction motor p0310 50 60 Hz without output filter and Blocksize power unit p1082 60 x 240 Hz r0313 vector control p1082 60 x 550 Hz r0313 U f control Dependency For vector control the ma...

Page 628: ...be changed C2 1 T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3020 3050 3070 Min 0 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 1500 000 rpm Description Sets the highest possible speed setpoint Dependency The maximum speed is limited to p1082 60 x 150 Hz r0313 See also p0230 p0310 r0313 p0322 NOTICE After the value has been modified no further parameter modif...

Page 629: ... Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3050 Min 210000 000 rpm Max 0 000 rpm Factory setting 210000 000 rpm Description Sets the speed limit for the negative direction NOTICE A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set r1087 CO Speed limit negative effective n_limit neg eff Access level 3 Calcul...

Page 630: ...1091 p1093 p1094 p1101 NOTICE Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel p1093 0 n Skip speed 3 n_skip 3 Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3050 Min 0 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Descrip...

Page 631: ...S p1101 0 n Skip speed bandwidth n_skip bandwidth Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling p2000 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3050 Min 0 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds velocities 1 to 4 Dependency See also p1091 p1092 p1093 p1094 Note The se...

Page 632: ...int using p1109 then it is not permissible to disable the interconnection to its status word r2349 4 If the hibernation mode function is activated then it is not permissible to disable the interconnection to status word r2399 p1109 0 n CI Total setpoint Total setp Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling p2000 Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit s...

Page 633: ...up 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3050 Min rpm Max rpm Factory setting rpm Description Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting Dependency See also p1091 p1092 p1093 p1094 p1101 p1113 0 n BI Setpoint inversion Setp inv G120X_DP G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function ...

Page 634: ...peed velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction r1119 CO Ramp function generator setpoint at the input RFG setp at inp Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3050 3070 6300 8022 Min rpm Max rpm Factory setting rpm Description Displays the setpoint at the input of the ...

Page 635: ... 0 n Ramp function generator ramp down time RFG ramp down time Access level 1 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3070 Min 0 000 s Max 999999 000 s Factory setting 10 000 s Description Sets the ramp down time for the ramp function generator The ramp function generator ramps down the speed setpoint f...

Page 636: ...connection with r2349 or r2399 p1123 0 n Ramp function generator minimum ramp up time RFG t_RU min Access level 4 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 000 s Max 999999 000 s Factory setting 0 000 s Description Sets the minimum ramp up time The ramp up time p1120 is limited internally to...

Page 637: ...ting 2 000 s Description Sets the initial rounding off time for the extended ramp generator The value applies to ramp up and ramp down Note Rounding off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system Rounding off is not active if the technology controller is used as main speed setpoint p2251 0 p1131 0 n Ramp function generator final rounding off time RFG t_end_delay Acc...

Page 638: ...tinuous smoothing If the setpoint is reduced while ramping up then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint For the setpoint change there is no rounding off p1135 0 n OFF3 ramp down time OFF3 t_RD Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed C2 1 T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3070 Min 0 000 s Max 5400 00...

Page 639: ...n Function diagram 3070 Min 0 000 s Max 30 000 s Factory setting 0 000 s Description Sets the final rounding off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator p1138 0 n CI Ramp function generator ramp up time scaling RFG t_RU scal Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3070 M...

Page 640: ...S Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2501 Min Max Factory setting 1 Description Sets the signal source for the command enable ramp function generator inhibit ramp function generator For the PROFIdrive profile this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 4 STW1 4 BI p1140 0 signal Inhibi...

Page 641: ...diagram 2501 Min Max Factory setting 1 Description Sets the signal source for the command continue ramp function generator freeze ramp function generator For the PROFIdrive profile this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 5 STW1 5 BI p1141 0 signal Freezes the ramp function generator BI p1141 1 signal Continue ramp function generator Dependency See also r0054 p1140 p1142 CAUTION When master ...

Page 642: ...inhibit setpoint For the PROFIdrive profile this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 STW1 6 BI p1142 0 signal Inhibits the setpoint the ramp function generator input is set to zero BI p1142 1 signal Setpoint enable Dependency See also p1140 p1141 CAUTION When master control from PC is activated this binector input is ineffective NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or...

Page 643: ...he output value of the ramp function generator is tracked corrected corresponding to the maximum possible drive acceleration The reference value is the deviation at the speed controller velocity controller input that is necessary to ensure that the motor accelerates at the torque force limit Recommendation If at least one speed setpoint filter velocity setpoint filter is activated p1414 then the r...

Page 644: ...2007 Dynamic index Unit group 39_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 3070 Min rev s Max rev s Factory setting rev s Description Displays the acceleration of the ramp function generator Dependency See also p1145 r1170 CO Speed controller setpoint sum Speed setpoint sum Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0...

Page 645: ...d Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 3001 3080 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the status word for the ramp function generator RFG Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Ramp up active Yes No 01 Ramp down active Yes No 02 RFG active Yes No 03 Ramp function generator set Yes No 04 Ramp function generator held ...

Page 646: ...lies The search is only made in the setpoint direction For U f control p1300 20 the following applies The speed can only be sensed for values above approx 5 of the rated motor speed For lower speeds it is assumed that the motor is at a standstill If p1200 is changed during commissioning p0010 0 then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be set The reason for this is that the ...

Page 647: ...r for the search speed for flying restart The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart A higher value results in a longer search time Recommendation For sensorless vector control and motor cables longer than 200 m set the factor p1203 300 CAUTION An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion For vector...

Page 648: ... No 02 Isd channel enable Yes No 03 Speed control switched out Yes No 04 Quadrature arm switched in Yes No 05 Special transformation active Yes No 06 Speed adaptation circuit set I component to 0 Yes No 07 Current control on Yes No 08 Isd_set 0 A Yes No 09 Frequency held Yes No 10 Search in the positive direction Yes No 11 Search Started Yes No 12 Current impressed Yes No 13 Search interrupted Yes...

Page 649: ... Yes No 13 Search interrupted Yes No 14 Speed adaptation circuit deviation 0 Yes No 15 Speed control activated Yes No 16 Fast flying restart w voltage model for induction motor activ Yes No 17 Fast flying restart w voltage model for induction motor exited Yes No 18 Apply VSM voltage to the monitor Yes No 19 Preassign flux ramp Yes No 20 Adaptation current controller and speed adapt controller gain...

Page 650: ...p0840 the drive is switched on as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged This also occurs after the line supply returns or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is present again This automatic switching on operation can only be interrupted by withdrawing the ON command NOTICE A change is only accepted and made in the state initialization r1214 0 and wait for alarm ...

Page 651: ...07320 is output if after several faults occur the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached After a successful start attempt i e a fault error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase the start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s If a fault re occurs the parameterized number of start attempts is again available At least one start attempt is al...

Page 652: ...wledged e g for faults that are permanently present In the case of p1210 14 16 the faults which are present must be acknowledged manually within the time in p1213 0 Otherwise fault F07320 is generated after the set time For index 1 The start counter refer to r1214 is only set back to the starting value p1211 if after successful restart the time in p1213 1 has expired The delay time is not effectiv...

Page 653: ...nd withdrawing the switch on command For bit 10 When the automatic restart function is active r1214 7 is displayed otherwise the active fault r2139 3 The bit is set if the automatic restart can no longer acknowledge a fault and cancels with fault F07320 For bits 12 15 Actual state of the start counter binary coded For bit 04 in addition For p1210 26 the system waits in this state until the switch ...

Page 654: ...p1228 has expired the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired For p1227 300 000 s the following applies Monitoring is deactivated For p1227 0 000 s the following applies With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp down time 0 the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor coasts down Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first t...

Page 655: ...nector input p1230 is ineffective If the drive speed still lies above the speed threshold p1234 then initially the drive is ramped down to this threshold demagnetized see p0347 and is then switched into DC braking for the time set in p1233 After this the drive is switched off If at OFF1 the drive speed is below p1234 then it is immediately demagnetized and switched into DC braking The system switc...

Page 656: ...king DCBRK n_start G120X_DP DC braking G120X_PN DC braking G120X_USS DC braking Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7017 Min 0 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 210000 00 rpm Description Sets the starting speed for DC braking If the actual speed falls below this threshold then DC br...

Page 657: ...ller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the minimum DC link voltage when accelerating the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link r1242 Vdc_max controller switch in level Vdc_max on_level G120X_DP Vdc_max G120X_PN Vdc_max G120X_USS Vdc_max Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p20...

Page 658: ...hat after the line supply returns the Vdc minimum control can no longer be exited r1246 Vdc_min controller switch in level kinetic buffering Vdc_min on_level G120X_DP Vdc_min G120X_PN Vdc_min G120X_USS Vdc_min Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2001 Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6220 Min V Max V Factory setting V Description Displ...

Page 659: ...d is controlled using the ramp function generator Note For fast braking where the ramp function generator tracking was active it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in the opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding off time in the ramp function generator p1131 This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller p1250 0 n Vdc controller pro...

Page 660: ...index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 000 s Max 1800 000 s Factory setting 0 000 s Description Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller kinetic buffering If this value is exceeded a fault is output the required response can be parameterized Prerequisite p1256 1 Dependency See also F07406 NOTICE If a time threshold has been parameterized the Vdc_max controller s...

Page 661: ...trol to precontrol the Vdc_max controller The lower the power limit is set the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached p1260 Bypass configuration Bypass config Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the configuration for th...

Page 662: ...ss function is only available for induction motors Note This parameter is used to define the changeover time of the contactors It should not be shorter than the de magnetizing time of the motor p0347 The total changeover time for the bypass is based on the total of p1262 plus the OFF time for the relevant switch p1274 x p1263 Debypass delay time Debypass t_del Access level 2 Calculated Data type F...

Page 663: ...roup Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for the control command to the bypass Dependency The Bypass function is only available for induction motors p1267 Bypass changeover source configuration Chngov_src config Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram M...

Page 664: ...iguration for the flying restart function function Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Fast flying restart with voltage model for induction motor Yes No 01 PLL expansion for fast flying restart w voltage model for ASM Yes No 12 Use peak current values Yes No 13 Number of current controller cycles test pulse bit 0 1 0 14 Number of current controller cycles test pulse bit 1 1 0 15 Numb...

Page 665: ...d Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6300 6320 6854 Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 1 Description Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage Vdc controller in the U f operating mode Value 0 Inhibit Vdc ctrl 1 Enable Vdc_max controller 2 Enable Vdc_min controller kinetic buffering 3 Enable Vdc_min contr...

Page 666: ... p1294 1 automatic sensing of the switch in level on then the following applies r1282 Vdc_max 50 0 V Vdc_max Overvoltage threshold of the power unit r1282 Vdc_max 25 0 V for 230 V power units NOTICE If the activation level of the Vdc_max controller is already exceeded in the deactivated state pulse inhibit by the DC link voltage then the controller can be automatically deactivated see F07401 so th...

Page 667: ...ess level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2001 Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6320 6854 Min V Max V Factory setting V Description Displays the switch in level for the Vdc_min controller kinetic buffering Note The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC link voltage rises above the threshold 1 05 r1286 and the controller outp...

Page 668: ...54 Min 0 ms Max 1000 ms Factory setting 10 ms Description Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller DC link voltage controller p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level U f Vdc_max SenseOnLev Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6320 6854 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Descriptio...

Page 669: ...10000 00 rpm Factory setting 50 00 rpm Description Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc min controller kinetic buffering If this value is exceeded a fault is output the required response can be parameterized Note Exiting the Vdc_min control before reaching motor standstill prevents the regenerative braking current from increasing significantly at low speeds and after a pulse inhibit means that the...

Page 670: ...sed loop control mode of a drive Value 0 U f control with linear characteristic 1 U f control with linear characteristic and FCC 2 U f control with parabolic characteristic 4 U f control with linear characteristic and ECO 7 U f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO 20 Speed control encoderless Dependency For Dynamic Drive Control p0096 2 only p1300 20 can be set Only operation with U f ch...

Page 671: ...arting current voltage boost permanent I_start Ua perm Access level 2 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6300 6301 6851 Min 0 0 Max 250 0 Factory setting 50 0 Description Defines the voltage boost as a referred to the rated motor current p0305 The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is...

Page 672: ... setpoint has been reached The build up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows not for field orientation Voltage boost V 1 732 p0305 rated motor current A x r0395 stator primary section resistance ohm x p1311 voltage boost when accelerating 100 Dependency The current limit p0640 limits the boost For field ori...

Page 673: ...culated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 5_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6300 Min 50 00 Vrms Max 2000 00 Vrms Factory setting 1000 00 Vrms Description Limiting the voltage setpoint This means that the output voltage can be reduced with respect to the calculated maximum voltage r0071 and the start of field weakening Note The output vo...

Page 674: ...tant motor speed regardless of the applied load The fact that the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors For synchronous motors this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case For the open loop control modes p1300 5 and 6 textile sector the slip compensation is internally disabled in order to be able to precisely set the o...

Page 675: ... diagram 6310 6853 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual compensated slip referred to r0330 rated motor slip Dependency p1335 0 Slip compensation active See also p1335 p1338 0 n U f mode resonance damping gain Uf Res_damp gain Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diag...

Page 676: ...t current is no longer reduced The drive is switched off when the overcurrent limits are exceeded Note The I_max limiting controller becomes ineffective if the ramp function generator is deactivated with p1122 1 p1341 0 I_max frequency controller deactivated and I_max voltage controller activated over the complete speed range p1341 0 n I_max frequency controller integral time I_max_ctrl Tn Access ...

Page 677: ...egral time I_max_U_ctrl Tn Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6300 7017 Min 0 000 s Max 50 000 s Factory setting 0 030 s Description Sets the integral time for the I_max voltage controller Dependency See also p1340 Note The controller settings are also used in the current con...

Page 678: ...T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6490 Min Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0010 0001 bin Description Sets the configuration for the closed loop speed control Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Automatic Kp Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040 05 Kp Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040 15 Sensorless vector control speed precontro...

Page 679: ...bit 19 20 When this bit is set speed overshoots when accelerating along the torque limit and for load surges are reduced For bit 20 The acceleration model for the speed setpoint is only active if p1496 is not zero For bit 25 When the bit is set for high dynamic starting in the I f mode the acceleration precontrol torque smoothing only has a short minimum time 4 ms p1401 0 n Flux control configurat...

Page 680: ...4 When the function is activated the following applies the optimum flux is calculated and the power loss is entered for optimization purposes the efficiency optimization p1580 is not active It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low In order to avoid oscillations if required the speed controller parameters should be adapted in...

Page 681: ...Encoderless operation active Yes No 02 Reserved 03 Speed control active Yes No 6040 05 Speed controller I component frozen Yes No 6040 06 Speed controller I component set Yes No 6040 07 Torque limit reached Yes No 6060 08 Upper torque limit active Yes No 6060 09 Lower torque limit active Yes No 6060 10 Reserved 11 Speed setpoint limited Yes No 6030 12 Ramp function generator set Yes No 13 Encoderl...

Page 682: ...operation the value that is displayed is of no relevance Note In the standard state the reference model is deactivated r1438 r1439 r1445 CO Actual speed smoothed n_act smooth Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6040 Min rpm Max rpm Factory setting rpm Description Display and connector ou...

Page 683: ...red to p1472 Dependency See also p1464 p1465 Note If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464 then the controller integral time below p1465 is adapted with p1463 This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters p1464 0 n Speed controller adaptati...

Page 684: ...amic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 5040 5042 6040 Min ms Max ms Factory setting ms Description Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller p1470 0 n Speed controller encoderless operation P gain n_ctrl SL Kp Access level 2 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagr...

Page 685: ...NING The acceleration precontrol r1518 is kept at the old value if the ramp function generator tracking r1199 5 is active or the ramp function generator output is set r1199 3 This is used to avoid torque peaks Depending on the application it may therefore be necessary to disable the ramp function generator tracking p1145 0 or the acceleration precontrol p1496 0 The acceleration precontrol is set t...

Page 686: ...e supplementary torque For closed loop speed control r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output p1517 0 n Accelerating torque smoothing time constant M_accel T_smooth Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6060 Min 0 00 ms Max 100 00 ms Factory setting 4 00 ms Description Sets the smoot...

Page 687: ...e limit Dependency See also p1520 p1522 p1523 DANGER Positive values when setting the lower torque limit p1521 0 can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable fashion NOTICE A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set Note The torque limit is limited to 400 of the rated motor torque When automatically calculating the moto...

Page 688: ...hat belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set Note This parameter can be freely interconnected The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528 p1525 0 n CO Torque limit lower scaling M_max lower scal Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selecti...

Page 689: ...for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522 DANGER For p1400 4 0 torque limiting upper lower the following applies Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p1529 0 n CI Torque limit lower scaling M_max lower scal Access lev...

Page 690: ... to 30 of the power r0206 0 For a braking resistor connected to the DC link p0219 0 the power limit when generating is automatically adapted For power units with energy recovery the parameter is limited to the negative value of r0206 2 r1533 Current limit torque generating total Iq_max total Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2002 Dynamic index Unit group 6...

Page 691: ...s see p1960 The torque limit p1520 can be re calculated using p0340 1 3 or 5 r1539 CO Lower effective torque limit M_max lower eff Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2003 Dynamic index Unit group 7_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6020 6640 Min Nm Max Nm Factory setting Nm Description Display and connector output for the actual effective lower torque...

Page 692: ...Point32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 80 0 Max 130 0 Factory setting 100 0 Description Sets the scaling of the stall limit for the start of field weakening DANGER If the stall current limit is increased then the q current setpoint can exceed the stall limit as a consequence a hysteresis effect can occur when loading and unloading ...

Page 693: ...1 9 0 r1568 0 5 CO Synchronous reluctance motor flux channel RESM flux channel Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for signals of the flux channel for a synchronous reluctance motor RESM The values are referred to the rated motor f...

Page 694: ...he setting in p1570 above rated motor torque if p1580 0 has been set The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor The scaling allows the flux setpoint to be adapted when operating with load dependent optimum flux characteristic or with constant flux setpoint p1574 0 n Voltage reserve dynamic U_reserve dyn Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be chang...

Page 695: ...an be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6791 Min 20 ms Max 5000 ms Factory setting 200 ms Description The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor Sets the time constant for reducing the flux setpoint for a load dependent optimum flux characteristic Dependency See also p1579 Note To avoid remagnetization processes for load dependent ...

Page 696: ...flux setpoint of the closed loop control is adapted as a function of the load For p1580 100 under no load operating conditions the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 of the rated motor flux Dependency See also p0500 Note It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low In order to avoid oscillations if required the speed controller para...

Page 697: ...l load situations If the start of field weakening is shifted to higher speeds the voltage reserve is appropriately reduced so that for fast load changes it can be expected that this will have a negative impact on the dynamic performance p1590 0 n Flux controller P gain Flux controller Kp Access level 4 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p...

Page 698: ...e values cause the field weakening controller to intervene earlier so that the voltage can move away from the modulation depth limit p1596 0 n Field weakening controller integral action time Field_ctrl Tn Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6723 6724 Min 10 ms Max 10000 ms Fac...

Page 699: ...E p1610 should always be set to at least 10 higher than the maximum steady state load that can occur Note For p1610 0 a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no load case ASM rated magnetizing current RESM no load magnetizing current For p1610 100 a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in th...

Page 700: ...erated from p1610 and p1611 Note This parameter is only effective in the range where current is injected for sensorless vector control r1623 0 1 Field generating current setpoint steady state Id_set stationary Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2002 Dynamic index Unit group 6_2 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6723 Min Arms Max Arms Factory setting Arm...

Page 701: ...Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6714 Min 0 000 Max 100000 000 Factory setting 0 000 Description Sets the proportional gain of the current controller This value is automatically pre set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed p1717 0 n Current controller integral action time I_ctrl Tn Access level 4 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoin...

Page 702: ...operated at the voltage limit this can result in an unstable behavior In order to avoid this the dynamic voltage reserve p1574 should be increased Note The parameter value is referred to the synchronous rated motor speed p1731 0 n Isd controller combination current time component Isd ctr I_combi T1 Access level 4 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic ...

Page 703: ...ction Function diagram Min 0 0 Max 1000 0 Factory setting 5 0 Description Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled If the error signal r1746 exceeds the parameterized error threshold then status signal r1408 12 is set to 1 Dependency If a stalled drive is detected r1408 12 1 fault F07902 is output after the delay time set in p2178 See also p2178 Note Monitoring is only ...

Page 704: ...ensorless vector control remains speed controlled ASM Bit 7 1 Use rugged switchover limits to switchover the model open loop closed loop controlled for regenerative operation ASM Bit 8 1 Open loop speed controlled operation independent of the speed setpoint except for OFF3 ASM Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Controlled start Yes No 01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No 02 Closed loop...

Page 705: ... of the current setpoint must be ensured p1610 p1611 For bit 8 1 no influence on the functionality of bits 0 1 2 The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors Changeover into open loop speed controlled operation is no longer dependent on the speed setpoint except for OFF3 but instead is essentially dependent on time condition p1758 As a consequence a drive can be started ...

Page 706: ...assed and a change is not made into open loop controlled operation For bit 7 1 The following applies for sensorless vector control of induction motors If the changeover limits are parameterized too low p1755 p1756 then they are automatically increased to rugged values by the absolute amount p1749 p1755 The effective time condition for changing over into open controlled operation is obtained from t...

Page 707: ...t 21 For a blocked synchronous motor the speed ramp function generator is held in the open loop speed controlled operating range if the torque setpoint reaches the torque limit and the speed is less than the threshold value in p2175 p1755 0 n Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation MotMod n_chgSnsorl Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_REG Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Sca...

Page 708: ...ALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 ms Max 2000 ms Factory setting 0 ms Description Sets the minimum time for a transition from open loop controlled to closed loop controlled operation after the lower changeover speed p1755 1 p1756 100 has been exceeded Dependency See also p1755 p1756 Note Wit...

Page 709: ...n be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 6730 Min rpm Max rpm Factory setting rpm Description Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation p1774 0 n Motor model offset voltage compensation alpha MotMod offs comp A Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group ...

Page 710: ...o 02 Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation Yes No 03 Select motor model PMSM kT adaptation Yes No 04 Select motor model offset adaptation Yes No 06 Select pole position identification PMSM encoderless Yes No 07 Select T valve with Rs adaptation Yes No 08 Deselect prelim meas of inductance for pole position ident Yes No 10 Filter time combination current like current ctrl integral time Yes No 11 Fas...

Page 711: ...nd is instead taken into account in the motor model In order that the correction values of the Rs and Lh adaptation selected using bit 0 bit 1 are correctly accepted when changing over the drive data set a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each different motor ASM Induction motor RESM synchronous reluctance motor p1784 0 n Motor model feedback scaling MotMod fdbk scal Access le...

Page 712: ...Description Sets the pulse frequency for the converter This parameter is pre set to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned Dependency Minimum pulse frequency p1800 12 p1082 r0313 60 See also p0230 Note The maximum and minimum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used minimum pulse frequency 2 kHz or 4 kHz When the pulse frequency is increased ...

Page 713: ...n Function diagram Min kHz Max kHz Factory setting kHz Description Display and connector output for the actual converter switching frequency Index 0 Actual 1 Modulator minimum value Note The selected pulse frequency p1800 may be reduced if the drive converter has an overload condition p0290 p1802 0 n Modulator mode Modulator mode Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type Integer16 Can b...

Page 714: ...802 0 2 10 the modulation depth must be limited using p1803 default p1803 100 The higher the overmodulation the greater the current ripple and torque ripple When changing p1802 x the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed p1803 0 n Maximum modulation depth Modulat depth max Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynami...

Page 715: ...Optimized pulse pattern r1809 CO Modulator mode actual Modulator mode act G120X_DP PM330 G120X_PN PM330 G120X_USS PM330 Access level 4 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 1 Max 9 Factory setting Description Displays the effective modulator mode Value 1 Flat top modulation FLB 2 Space vector modulation SVM 3 Edge modulat...

Page 716: ...gnal This signal is used to vary the pulse frequency to create a more pleasant sound Note p1811 0 is possible if the following applies configuration p1810 2 1 wobbulation activated pulse frequency p1800 2000 p115 0 output filter filter type p0230 3 no sine wave filter p1820 0 n Reverse the output phase sequence Outp_ph_seq rev Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling ...

Page 717: ...lated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 µs Max 3 99 µs Factory setting 0 00 µs Description Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U Note The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine p1828 Compensation valve lockout time phase U Comp t_lock ph U G120X_DP P...

Page 718: ...vel t_dead_comp I_lev Access level 4 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 0 Arms Max 10000 0 Arms Factory setting 0 0 Arms Description Sets the current level for the dead time compensation Above the current level the dead time resulting from the converter switching delays is compensated by a prev...

Page 719: ...mmand a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out and in addition a speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds p1900 2 Sets p1910 1 and p1960 0 When the drive enable signals are present a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the next switch on command Current flows through the motor which means that it can align its...

Page 720: ...ontroller optimization The motor identification should first be performed with the motor stationary p1900 1 2 also refer to p1910 Based on this additional motor and control parameters can be determined using the motor data identification with the motor rotating p1900 1 3 also refer to p1960 p1900 0 Function inhibited p1900 1 Sets p1910 1 and p1960 0 1 depending on p1300 When the drive enable signa...

Page 721: ...entification For U f control p1300 identification with speed controller optimization does not make sense e g P1900 1 p1901 Test pulse evaluation configuration Test puls config Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0000 bin Description Sets the configuration for the test p...

Page 722: ...ult is detected during the test this is displayed in r1902 2 For bit 02 0 If the test was successful once after POWER ON see r1902 0 then it is not repeated For bit 02 1 The test is not only performed after POWER ON but also each time the pulses are enabled For chassis power units the ground fault is also determined using the summed output current see p0287 r1902 Test pulse evaluation status Test ...

Page 723: ...o 19 After MotID automatically save results Yes No 20 Estimate cable resistance Yes No 21 Calibrating the output voltage measurement Yes No 22 Only identify circle Yes No 23 Deactivate circle identification Yes No 24 Circle identification with 0 and 90 degrees Yes No 26 Measure with long cable Yes No Note The following applies to permanent magnet synchronous motors Without de selection in bit 11 i...

Page 724: ... operation Yes No 19 After MotID automatically save results Yes No 20 Estimate cable resistance Yes No 21 Calibrating the output voltage measurement Yes No 26 Measure with long cable Yes No Note The following applies to permanent magnet synchronous motors Without de selection in bit 11 in the closed loop control mode the direct inductance LD and the quadrature inductance Lq are measured at a low c...

Page 725: ...s through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals during the identification routine the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution however no torque torque is generated Note To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non volatile fashion p0971 When setting p1910 the following should be observed 1 With acceptance means...

Page 726: ... command current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals during the identification routine the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution however no torque torque is generated Note To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non volatile fashion p0971 When setting p1910 the following should be observed 1 ...

Page 727: ...isplays the identified total leakage inductance Index 0 Phase U 1 Phase V 2 Phase W r1915 0 2 Identified nominal stator inductance L_stator ident Access level 4 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min mH Max mH Factory setting mH Description Displays the nominal stator inductance identified Index 0 Phase U 1 Phase V 2...

Page 728: ...namic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0001 1110 bin Description Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No 02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No 03 Re calculates the speed controller parameters Yes No 04 Speed controller optimiz...

Page 729: ...lection only has an effect on the measurement p1960 1 For the shortened measurement the magnetizing current and moment of inertia are determined with a somewhat lower accuracy p1960 Rotating measurement selection Rot meas sel Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description Sets...

Page 730: ...tor frequency Dependency See also p0310 p1959 See also F07983 Note The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load p1961 Saturation characteristic speed to determine Sat_char n determ G120X_DP PM330 G120X_PN PM330 G120X_USS PM330 Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selec...

Page 731: ...ificantly reduced with respect to the required dynamic response p1967 then this can be as a result of mechanical load oscillations If in spite of this load behavior a higher dynamic response is required then the oscillation test p1959 4 0 should be deactivated and the measurement repeated r1968 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual n_opt dyn_fact act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoin...

Page 732: ...agram Min 1 Max 10 Factory setting 4 Description Sets the pole position identification technique p1980 1 8 The current magnitude is set using p0329 p1980 4 6 The current magnitude of the first measurement section is set using p0325 the second using p0329 p1980 10 The rated motor current is impressed to align The current magnitudes are limited to the rated power unit values Value 1 Voltage pulsing ...

Page 733: ...d to measure the speed RESM Dependency See also p1980 r1992 p2000 Reference speed reference frequency n_ref f_ref Access level 2 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 6 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 1500 00 rpm Description Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency All speeds or fr...

Page 734: ...lculation p0340 1 p3900 0 if motor commissioning has been carried out first for drive data set zero and as a result overwriting of the parameter has not been blocked by setting p0573 1 See also r3996 p2002 Reference current I_ref Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 10 Arms Max 10000...

Page 735: ...ing was carried out beforehand for drive data set zero This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting using p0573 1 See also r3996 NOTICE When the reference torque is changed short term communication interruptions may occur Note Preassigned value is 2 p0333 If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities then the particular reference quantities are u...

Page 736: ... word or 4000 0000 hex double word p2010 Comm IF baud rate Comm baud Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 6 Max 12 Factory setting 12 Description Sets the baud rate for the commissioning interface USS RS232 Value 6 9600 baud 7 19200 baud 8 38400 baud 9 57600 baud 10 76800 baud 11 93750 baud 12 115200 bau...

Page 737: ...the receive errors at the commissioning interface USS RS232 Index 0 Number of error free telegrams 1 Number of rejected telegrams 2 Number of framing errors 3 Number of overrun errors 4 Number of parity errors 5 Number of starting character errors 6 Number of checksum errors 7 Number of length errors p2020 Field bus interface baud rate Field bus baud G120X_USS Access level 2 Calculated Data type I...

Page 738: ...ress of 0 or an address that is invalid for the fieldbus selected in p2030 has been set using the address switch The address is saved in a non volatile fashion using the function copy from RAM to ROM A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON Dependency See also p2030 Note Changes only become effective after POWER ON The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting The paramete...

Page 739: ...ata type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9310 Min 0 ms Max 10000 ms Factory setting 0 6000 ms 1 0 ms 2 0 ms Description Sets the time values for the fieldbus interface For Modbus the following applies p2024 0 1 Not relevant p2024 2 Telegram pause time pause time between two telegrams The following applies for BACnet p2024 0 APDU t...

Page 740: ...retries 0 39 p2025 3 Maximum master address 1 127 Index 0 Device object instance number 1 Maximum number of info frames 2 Number of APDU retries 3 Maximum master address 4 Reserved Dependency See also p2030 p2026 0 74 Fieldbus interface BACnet COV increment BACnet COV incr G120X_USS Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selecti...

Page 741: ...e 15 25 Analog Value 16 26 Analog Value 17 27 Analog Value 18 28 Analog Value 19 29 Analog Value 20 30 Analog Value 21 31 Analog Value 22 32 Analog Value 25 33 Analog Value 28 34 Analog Value 29 35 Analog Value 30 36 Analog Value 31 37 Analog Value 32 38 Analog Value 33 39 Analog Value 34 40 Analog Value 39 41 Analog Value 40 42 Analog Value 41 43 Analog Value 5000 44 Analog Value 5001 45 Analog V...

Page 742: ...election BACnet language G120X_USS Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9310 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the language for the BACnet object properties Value 0 German 1 English Note Changes only become effective after POWER ON r2029 0 7 Field bus interface error statistics Field bus error...

Page 743: ... protocol selection Field bus protocol G120X_PN Access level 1 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 9310 Min 0 Max 10 Factory setting 7 Description Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface Value 0 No protocol 7 PROFINET 10 EtherNet IP Note Changes only become effective after POWER ON The parameter is not...

Page 744: ...tive PcCtrl STW eff Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the effective control word 1 STW1 of the drive for the master control Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 ON OFF1 Yes No 01 OC OFF2 Yes No 02 OC OFF3 Yes No 03 Enable operation Yes No 04 Enable ...

Page 745: ...r16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 2 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the interface mode of the PROFIdrive control words and status words When selecting a telegram via p0922 p2079 this parameter influences the device specific assignment of the bits in the control and status words Value 0 SINAMICS 2 VIK NAMUR Dependency See also p0922 p...

Page 746: ...oup Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the PROFIBUS ident number PNO ID SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is independent of the device e g PROFIdrive VIK NAMUR with ident number 3AA0 hex Value 0 SINAMICS 1 VIK NAMUR Note Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON r2043 0 2 BO...

Page 747: ... the process data received via PROFIBUS Enables short bus faults to be compensated If no process data is received within this time then an appropriate message is output Dependency See also F01910 Note For controller STOP the additional monitoring time is not effective r2050 0 11 CO PROFIdrive PZD receive word PZD recv word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed Scaling 4000H ...

Page 748: ...ZD 8 8 PZD 9 9 PZD 10 10 PZD 11 11 PZD 12 12 PZD 13 13 PZD 14 14 PZD 15 15 PZD 16 16 PZD 17 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p2051 0 16 CI PROFIdrive PZD send word PZD send word G120X_USS Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling 4000H Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2450 247...

Page 749: ...namic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2450 2470 9370 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the PZD actual values with word format sent to the fieldbus controller Index 0 PZD 1 1 PZD 2 2 PZD 3 3 PZD 4 4 PZD 5 5 PZD 6 6 PZD 7 7 PZD 8 8 PZD 9 9 PZD 10 10 PZD 11 11 PZD 12 12 PZD 13 13 PZD 14 14 PZD 15 15 PZD 16 16 PZD 17 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Bit 0 O...

Page 750: ...s standard PB diag standard G120X_DP Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2410 Min Max Factory setting Description Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface Index 0 Master bus address 1 Master input total length bytes 2 Master output total length bytes r2060 0 10 CO PROFIdrive PZD receive double word PZD...

Page 751: ... T U Scaling 4000H Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2470 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Selects the PZD actual values with double word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller Index 0 PZD 1 2 1 PZD 2 3 2 PZD 3 4 3 PZD 4 5 4 PZD 5 6 5 PZD 6 7 6 PZD 7 8 7 PZD 8 9 8 PZD 9 10 9 PZD 10 11 10 PZD 11 12 11 PZD 12 13 12 PZD 13 14 13 PZD 14 15 14 PZD 15 16 15 PZD 16 17 De...

Page 752: ... 12 13 12 PZD 13 14 13 PZD 14 15 14 PZD 15 16 15 PZD 16 17 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Bit 0 ON OFF 01 Bit 1 ON OFF 02 Bit 2 ON OFF 03 Bit 3 ON OFF 04 Bit 4 ON OFF 05 Bit 5 ON OFF 06 Bit 6 ON OFF 07 Bit 7 ON OFF 08 Bit 8 ON OFF 09 Bit 9 ON OFF 10 Bit 10 ON OFF 11 Bit 11 ON OFF 12 Bit 12 ON OFF 13 Bit 13 ON OFF 14 Bit 14 ON OFF 15 Bit 15 ON OFF 16 Bit 16 ON OFF 17 Bit 17 ON OF...

Page 753: ..._DP Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data PZD is received Index 0 PZD 1 1 PZD 2 2 PZD 3 3 PZD 4 4 PZD 5 5 PZD 6 6 PZD 7 7 PZD 8 8 PZD 9 9 PZD 10 10 PZD 11 11 PZD 12 Note Value range 0 125 Bus address of ...

Page 754: ...alculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2410 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram controller input Index 0 PZD 1 1 PZD 2 2 PZD 3 3 PZD 4 4 PZD 5 5 PZD 6 6 PZD 7 7 PZD 8 8 PZD 9 9 PZD 10 10 PZD 11 11 PZD 12 12 PZD 13 13 PZD 14 14 PZD 15 15 PZD 16 16 PZD 17 Note Value ra...

Page 755: ... selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded Value 1 Standard telegram 1 PZD 2 2 20 Standard telegram 20 PZD 2 6 350 SIEMENS telegram 350 PZD 4 4 352 SIEMENS telegram 352 PZD 6 6 353 SIEMENS telegram 353 PZD 2 2 PKW 4 4 354 SIEMENS telegram 354 PZD 6 6 PKW 4 4 999 Free telegram configuration with BICO Dependency See also p0922 Note For p0922 999 the following applies p2079 has the same value an...

Page 756: ...al bits are combined to form status word 1 Index 0 Bit 0 1 Bit 1 2 Bit 2 3 Bit 3 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 5 6 Bit 6 7 Bit 7 8 Bit 8 9 Bit 9 10 Bit 10 11 Bit 11 12 Bit 12 13 Bit 13 14 Bit 14 15 Bit 15 Dependency See also p2088 r2089 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p2080 0 15 BI Binector connector converter status word 1 Bin con ZSW1 G120X_USS Access le...

Page 757: ... level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2472 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller The individual bits are combined to form status word 2 Index 0 Bit 0 1 Bit 1 2 Bit 2 3 Bit 3 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 5 6 Bit 6 7 Bit 7 8 Bit 8 9 Bit 9 10 Bit 10 11 Bit 11 12 Bit 12 1...

Page 758: ...it 10 11 Bit 11 12 Bit 12 13 Bit 13 14 Bit 14 15 Bit 15 Dependency See also p2088 r2089 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed p2083 0 15 BI Binector connector converter status word 4 Bin con ZSW4 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2472 Min Max F...

Page 759: ...e controller The individual bits are combined to form free status word 5 Index 0 Bit 0 1 Bit 1 2 Bit 2 3 Bit 3 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 5 6 Bit 6 7 Bit 7 8 Bit 8 9 Bit 9 10 Bit 10 11 Bit 11 12 Bit 12 13 Bit 13 14 Bit 14 15 Bit 15 Dependency See also p2088 r2089 p2088 0 4 Invert binector connector converter status word Bin con ZSW inv G120X_DP G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be cha...

Page 760: ...82 p2083 r2089 p2088 0 4 Invert binector connector converter status word Bin con ZSW inv G120X_USS Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2472 Min Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter Index 0 Status word ...

Page 761: ...00 Bit 0 ON OFF 01 Bit 1 ON OFF 02 Bit 2 ON OFF 03 Bit 3 ON OFF 04 Bit 4 ON OFF 05 Bit 5 ON OFF 06 Bit 6 ON OFF 07 Bit 7 ON OFF 08 Bit 8 ON OFF 09 Bit 9 ON OFF 10 Bit 10 ON OFF 11 Bit 11 ON OFF 12 Bit 12 ON OFF 13 Bit 13 ON OFF 14 Bit 14 ON OFF 15 Bit 15 ON OFF Dependency See also p2051 p2080 p2081 p2082 p2083 Note r2089 together with p2080 to p2084 forms five binector connector converters r2090 0...

Page 762: ... Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2468 9204 9206 Min Max Factory setting Description Binector output for bit serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIdrive controller Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Bit 0 ON OFF 01 Bit 1 ON OFF 02 Bit 2 ON OFF 03 Bit 3 ON OFF 04 Bit 4 ON OFF 05 Bit 5 ON OFF 06 Bit 6 ON OFF 07 Bit 7 ON OFF 08 Bit 8 ON O...

Page 763: ...N OFF 13 Bit 13 ON OFF 14 Bit 14 ON OFF 15 Bit 15 ON OFF r2093 0 15 BO PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit serial PZD4 recv bitw Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2468 9204 9206 Min Max Factory setting Description Binector output for bit serial interconnection of PZD4 normally control word 2 received from the PROF...

Page 764: ... 09 Bit 9 ON OFF 10 Bit 10 ON OFF 11 Bit 11 ON OFF 12 Bit 12 ON OFF 13 Bit 13 ON OFF 14 Bit 14 ON OFF 15 Bit 15 ON OFF Dependency See also p2099 r2095 0 15 BO Connector binector converter binector output Con bin outp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2468 9360 Min Max Factory setting Description Binector o...

Page 765: ...t inverted 04 Bit 4 Inverted Not inverted 05 Bit 5 Inverted Not inverted 06 Bit 6 Inverted Not inverted 07 Bit 7 Inverted Not inverted 08 Bit 8 Inverted Not inverted 09 Bit 9 Inverted Not inverted 10 Bit 10 Inverted Not inverted 11 Bit 11 Inverted Not inverted 12 Bit 12 Inverted Not inverted 13 Bit 13 Inverted Not inverted 14 Bit 14 Inverted Not inverted 15 Bit 15 Inverted Not inverted Dependency ...

Page 766: ...erization is also possible if a fault is present The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved p2101 0 19 Change fault response response Chng resp resp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8050 8075 Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the fault response for the selected fau...

Page 767: ...ess level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2441 2442 2443 2447 2475 2546 9220 9677 9678 Min Max Factory setting 0 2090 7 1 0 2 2090 7 3 2090 7 Description Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed No...

Page 768: ...knowledge faults Note A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0 1 signal p2105 0 n BI 3rd acknowledge faults 3rd acknowledge Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2546 8060 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults Note A fault acknowledgme...

Page 769: ... p3111 p3112 See also F07862 Note An external fault is triggered with a 1 0 signal p2108 0 n BI External fault 3 External fault 3 G120X_DP PM330 G120X_PN PM330 G120X_USS PM330 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2546 Min Max Factory setting 4022 1 Description Sets the signal source for e...

Page 770: ...ory setting 0 Description Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset Dependency When p2111 is set to 0 the following is initiated all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone 0 7 are transferred into the alarm history 8 63 the alarm buffer 0 7 is deleted See also r2110 r2122 r2123 r2124 r2125 Note The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON p2112 0 n BI External alarm 1 External ...

Page 771: ...l alarm 2 Dependency See also A07851 Note An external alarm is triggered with a 1 0 signal p2117 0 n BI External alarm 3 External alarm 3 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2546 Min Max Factory setting 1 Description Sets the signal source for external alarm 3 Dependency See also A07852 ...

Page 772: ...d sets the required type of message realized under the same index See also p2118 Note Re parameterization is also possible if a message is present The change only becomes effective after the message has gone The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification exception value 0 Example F12345 A Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345 In this case the message nu...

Page 773: ...econds t_alarm recv ms Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8050 8065 Min ms Max ms Factory setting ms Description Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred Dependency See also r2110 r2122 r2124 r2125 r2134 r2145 r2146 p8400 NOTICE The time comprises r2145 days and r2123 milliseconds...

Page 774: ...edge mode is to be changed Dependency Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index See also p2127 Note Re parameterization is also possible if a fault is present The change only becomes effective after the fault has been resolved p2127 0 19 Change acknowledge mode mode Chng ackn mode Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling...

Page 775: ...g Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8070 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for the trigger signals of the faults alarms set in p2128 0 15 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Trigger signal p2128 0 ON OFF 01 Trigger signal p2128 1 ON OFF 02 Trigger signal p2128 2 ON OFF 03 Trigger signal p2128 3 ON OFF 04 Trigger signal p2128 4 ON OFF 0...

Page 776: ...on Displays the code of the oldest active fault Dependency See also r3131 r3132 Note 0 No fault present r2132 CO Actual alarm code Actual alarm code Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8065 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred Note 0 No alarm present r2133 0 6...

Page 777: ...o 8016 15 Alarm power unit thermal overload Yes No 8021 r2136 0 63 Fault time removed in days t_flt resolv days Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8060 Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed Dependency See also r0945 r0947 r0948 r0949 r2109 r2130 r...

Page 778: ...ledged Yes No Note For bit 03 07 These bits are set if at least one fault alarm occurs Data is entered into the fault alarm buffer with delay This is the reason that the fault alarm buffer should only be read if after fault present or alarm present has occurred a change in the buffer was also detected r0944 r9744 r2121 For bit 06 08 These status bits are used for internal diagnostic purposes only ...

Page 779: ...eg Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8012 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for the negated enable 0 enable of the motor stall monitoring Dependency See also p2163 p2164 p2166 r2197 r2198 See also F07900 Note When interconnecting the enable signal with r2197 ...

Page 780: ...ctive for the following signals messages Speed setpoint actual value deviation within tolerance t_on BO r2199 4 Ramp up ramp down completed BO r2199 5 NOTICE The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed Note The binector input is automatically interconnected to r1199 2 as a default setting p2149 0 n Monitoring configuration Monit config Access level 3 Calculat...

Page 781: ...p2151 0 n CI Speed setpoint for messages signals n_set for msg Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling p2000 Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8011 Min Max Factory setting 1170 0 Description Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages Speed setpoint actual value deviation within tolerance ...

Page 782: ...alculated CALC_MOD_LIM_REF Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8010 8011 Min 0 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 5 00 rpm Description Sets the speed threshold value for the signal n_act speed threshold value 3 BO r2199 0 Dependency See also p2150 r2199 p2162 0 n Hysteresis speed n_act n_max Hyst n_...

Page 783: ...hanged T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8011 Min 0 00 rpm Max 200 00 rpm Factory setting 2 00 rpm Description Sets the hysteresis speed bandwidth for the speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_off signal message BO r2197 7 Dependency See also p2163 p2166 r2197 p2165 0 n Load monitoring stall monitoring upper threshold Stall_mon ...

Page 784: ...he stall monitoring of the pump or fan If in the monitored speed range from p2182 to p2165 the torque exceeds this threshold then this is evaluated as either the motor having stalled or heavy duty starting Dependency For pumps the following applies p2193 4 the leakage characteristic must lie below the torque threshold for the stall monitoring the torque threshold for dry running operation must lie...

Page 785: ...U Scaling p2001 Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 5_2 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram Min 0 V Max 2000 V Factory setting 800 V Description Sets the DC link voltage threshold value for the following messages Vdc_act Vdc_threshold p2172 BO r2197 9 Vdc_act Vdc_threshold p2172 BO r2197 10 Dependency See also p2173 p2173 0 n DC link voltage comparison delay time t_del Vdc Access level 3 Calculat...

Page 786: ...758 p2178 0 n Motor stalled delay time Mot stall t_del Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_REG Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8012 Min 0 000 s Max 10 000 s Factory setting 0 010 s Description Sets the delay time for the message Motor stalled BO r2198 7 Dependency See also r2198 Note In the open loop speed contr...

Page 787: ... 7 Pump fan load monitoring as alarm 8 Pump fan load monitoring as fault Dependency See also p2182 p2183 p2184 p2185 p2186 p2187 p2188 p2189 p2190 p2192 p2193 r2198 p3230 p3231 See also A07891 A07892 A07893 F07894 F07895 F07896 F07898 A07920 A07921 A07922 F07923 F07924 F07925 Note The response to the faults F07923 F07925 can be set This parameter setting has no effect on the generation of fault F0...

Page 788: ...T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 8013 Min 0 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 1500 00 rpm Description Sets the speed torque envelope curve for load monitoring The envelope curve upper and lower envelope curve is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds p2182 n_threshold 1 p2185 M_threshold 1 upper p2186 M_threshold 1 lower p2183 ...

Page 789: ...e envelope curve for load monitoring Dependency The following applies p2187 p2188 See also p2183 p2188 See also A07926 Note The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185 p2187 and p2189 p2188 0 n Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower M_thresh 2 lower Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 7_1 Unit selection p0505 Function...

Page 790: ... 00 Nm Max 20000000 00 Nm Factory setting 0 00 Nm Description Setting of the torque threshold to identify dry running operation for pumps or belt breakage for fans Dependency The following applies p2191 p2168 if p2168 0 See also p2181 p2182 p2184 p2193 See also A07892 F07895 A07926 Note For the setting p2191 0 the monitoring for dry running operation or belt breakage is deactivated Pre assignment ...

Page 791: ...tatus word of the monitoring functions Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 n_act n_min p1080 Yes No 8022 01 n_act speed threshold value 2 p2155 Yes No 8010 02 n_act speed threshold value 2 p2155 Yes No 8010 03 n_act 0 Yes No 8011 04 n_act n_set Yes No 8022 05 n_act n_standstill p1226 Yes No 8022 06 n_act n_max Yes No 8010 07 Speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_off Ye...

Page 792: ...2 ZSW monitor 2 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2536 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for the second status word of the monitoring functions Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 04 n_set p2161 Yes No 8011 05 n_set 0 Yes No 8011 06 Motor blocked Yes No 8012 07 Motor st...

Page 793: ...1 Tec_ctrl fix val1 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7950 7951 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 10 00 Description Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller Dependency See also p2220 p2221 p2222 p2223 r2224 r2229 NOTICE A BICO interconnection to...

Page 794: ...e data set always acts on the effective data set p2205 0 n CO Technology controller fixed value 5 Tec_ctr fix val 5 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7950 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 50 00 Description Sets the value for fixed value 5 of the technology controll...

Page 795: ...set always acts on the effective data set p2209 0 n CO Technology controller fixed value 9 Tec_ctr fix val 9 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7950 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 90 00 Description Sets the value for fixed value 9 of the technology controller Depe...

Page 796: ...a set always acts on the effective data set p2213 0 n CO Technology controller fixed value 13 Tec_ctr fix val 13 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7950 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 130 00 Description Sets the value for fixed value 13 of the technology controlle...

Page 797: ... Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7950 7951 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to select a fixed value of the technology controller Dependency See also p2221 p2222 p2223 p2221 0 n BI Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 Access level 3 Calculate...

Page 798: ... setting Description Display and BICO output for the status word of the fixed value selection of the technology controller Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Technology controller fixed value selected Yes No 7950 7951 r2229 Technology controller number actual Tec_ctrl No act Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection...

Page 799: ...e motorized potentiometer is saved in a non volatile fashion for p2230 0 1 For bit 04 When the bit is set the ramp function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable The actual output value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r2250 r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory Tec_ctrl mop mem Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be chan...

Page 800: ...gPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7954 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller Dependency See also p2237 p2240 0 n Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value Tec_ctrl mop start Access level 2 Calculated...

Page 801: ...chnology controller Dependency See also p2247 Note The time is referred to 100 When the initial rounding off is activated p2230 2 1 the ramp down is correspondingly extended r2250 CO Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG Tec_ctr mop aftRFG Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 ...

Page 802: ...hen setting the PID controller parameters p2280 p2285 The enable ramps of the PID controller are ensured in this setting by p1120 p1121 as well as rounding functions p1130 and p1131 The ramp up ramp down time of the PID controller limiting p2293 must be set appropriately shorter as otherwise this has an impact on the speed setpoint channel For bit 05 0 The integral component of the PID controller ...

Page 803: ...2 scal Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller Dependency See also p2254 p2257 Technology controller ramp up time Tec_ctrl t_ramp up Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPo...

Page 804: ...d Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram 7958 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter PT1 of the technology controller p2263 Technology controller type Tec_ctrl type Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling D...

Page 805: ...ption Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller Dependency See also p2264 p2265 p2271 See also F07426 NOTICE If the actual value exceeds this upper limit this results in fault F07426 p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value Tec_ctrl l_lim act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit gro...

Page 806: ...n 1 Inversion actual value signal CAUTION If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected then the closed loop control with the technology controller can become unstable and can oscillate Note The correct setting can be determined as follows inhibit the technology controller p2200 0 increase the motor speed and in so doing measure the actual value signal of the technology controller If the a...

Page 807: ...0 0 The proportional gain is disabled p2285 Technology controller integral time Tec_ctrl Tn Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 0 000 s Max 10000 000 s Factory setting 10 000 s Description Sets the integral time I component integrating time constant of the technology controller NOTICE The f...

Page 808: ...ts the signal source to enable the technology controller output The technology controller output is enabled with a 1 signal The technology controller output is held with a 0 signal p2291 CO Technology controller maximum limiting Tec_ctrl max_lim Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 2...

Page 809: ...n be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 100 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller p2296 0 n CI Technology controller output scaling Tec_ctrl outp scal Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index...

Page 810: ... 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7958 Min 0 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description Sets the start value for the output of the technology controller If the drive is switched on and the technology controller is already enabled see p2200 r0056 3 then its output signal r2294 first goes to the start value...

Page 811: ...ump compressor If value 1 The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases e g for cooling fans discharge pumps p2310 CI Technology controller Kp adaptation input value signal source Kp adapt inp s_s Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7959 Min Max Factory settin...

Page 812: ...point must be set higher than the lower starting point p2314 p2313 Note Kp adaptation is activated with p2252 7 1 p2314 Technology controller Kp adaptation upper starting point Kp adapt upper pt Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7959 Min 0 00 Max 400 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description S...

Page 813: ... See also p2252 p2318 p2319 p2320 p2321 r2322 Note Tn adaptation is activated with p2252 8 1 p2318 Technology controller Tn adaptation upper value Tn adapt upper val Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7959 Min 0 000 s Max 60 000 s Factory setting 3 000 s Description Sets the upper value for the ada...

Page 814: ...nt p2321 p2320 Note Tn adaptation is activated with p2252 8 1 r2322 CO Technology controller Tn adaptation output Tn adapt output Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7959 Min s Max s Factory setting s Description Display and connector output for the output signal of the adaption of integral time Tn for ...

Page 815: ...gy controller actual value limited The fault response is executed if status bit 8 or 9 in the technology controller status word r2349 is set If both status bits are zero a switch back to technology controller operation will follow Value 0 Function inhibited 1 On fault Changeover to r2344 or p2302 2 On fault Changeover to p2215 Dependency The parameterized fault response is only effective if the te...

Page 816: ... Yes No 09 Technology controller actual value at the maximum Yes No 10 Technology controller output at the minimum Yes No 11 Technology controller output at the maximum Yes No 12 Fault response active Yes No 13 Technology controller limiting enable Yes No Note While the technology controller is enabled the following applies When switching off with OFF1 OFF3 and for pulse inhibit bits 10 and 11 are...

Page 817: ...Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 60 s Max 65000 s Factory setting 240 s Description Sets the monitoring time for the PID autotuning This time is started after activating PID autotuning p2350 If within this time the control loop is not excited then the automatic setting is canceled and an appropriate fault is output Dependency See also p2350 See also F07445 p2355...

Page 818: ... During this time the technology controller is switched off Switching off the motor If the main drive is operated at minimum speed and the deviation at the technology controller input decreases further the control will disconnect external motors M1 through M3 from the line voltage At the same time the main drive is ramped up to the closed loop cascade control switch in switch out speed p2378 via t...

Page 819: ...e longer than that set in p2382 are interchanged automatically For p2372 2 3 This automatic interchange autochange is only possible if the designated motor is not in operation If all motors are in operation the interchange will not be possible and alarm A07427 appears Autochange mode is only possible if p2371 2 4 motors of the same size p2373 Closed loop cascade control switch in threshold Csc_ctr...

Page 820: ...elay time p2374 is bypassed and the motor is immediately switched in connected If the minimum speed is reached and the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold p2376 at the same time the delay time p2375 is bypassed and the motor is immediately switched out disconnected p2377 Closed loop cascade control interlocking time Csc_ctrl t_interl Access level 3 Calcul...

Page 821: ...r the external motors The display can only be reset to zero Index 0 Motor 1 1 Motor 2 2 Motor 3 p2381 Closed loop cascade control max time for continuous operation Csc_ctrl t_max Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 1 h Max 100000 0 h Factory setting 24 0 h Description Time limit for the contin...

Page 822: ...0 000 s Description Delay time once the switch in conditions have been met until the external motor is switched on The activation of the corresponding status bit r2379 for controlling the contactors or the motor starter is delayed by this time while the main motor speed already decreases down to the switch in speed p2378 p2385 Closed loop cascade control holding time switch in speed Csc_ctr t_hld ...

Page 823: ...etpoint exceeds the restart threshold Note The speed at which the hibernation mode is started is set to 4 of the nominal speed when commissioning is completed p2391 0 n Hibernation mode delay time Hib mode t_delay Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7038 Min 0 s Max 3599 s Factory setting ...

Page 824: ...he boost speed p2395 for the time set in p2394 Depending on the application this allows the hibernation intervals to be extended in time CAUTION The controller is not operational while the boost speed is being impressed As a result for example for pump applications it must be ensured that the tank does not overflow as a result of the additional boost For compressors it must be ensured that the boo...

Page 825: ...e tank does not overflow or for compressors an overpressure condition does not occur Note Automatic restart once the maximum OFF time has elapsed is deactivated by setting p2396 0 s r2397 0 1 CO Hibernation mode output speed actual Hib n_outp act Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 7038 ...

Page 826: ...on mode delay active Yes No 03 Hibernation boost active Yes No 04 Hibernation mode motor switched off Yes No 05 Hibernation mode switched off cyclic restart active Yes No 06 Hibernation motor motor restarts Yes No 07 Hibernation mode supplies total setpoint for ramp fct generator Yes No 08 Hibernation mode bypasses ramp fct generator in setpoint channel Yes No Dependency See also p2398 See also A0...

Page 827: ...Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for frequently used percentage values Index 0 Fixed value 0 1 Fixed value 5 2 Fixed value 10 3 Fixed value 20 4 Fixed value 50 5 Fixed value 100 6 Fixed value 150 7 Fixed value 200 8 Fixed value 5 9 Fixed value 10 10 Fixed value 20 11 Fixed value 50 12 Fixed value 100 13 Fixed value 150 14 Fixed value 200 Dependency See also p2900 p2901 ...

Page 828: ...ct to the direct axis current for iq 0 5 p2950 r2969 3 flux in Vsrms with respect to the direct axis current for iq p2950 For index 4 5 6 Displays the relative error of the current inversion id psid iq id p2950 r2969 4 error with respect to direct axis current for iq 0 r2969 5 error with respect to direct axis current for iq 0 5 p2950 r2969 6 error with respect to direct axis current for iq p2950 ...

Page 829: ...eration BI p2108 negated BI p3111 BI p3112 negated Dependency See also p2108 p3110 p3111 See also F07862 r3113 0 15 CO BO NAMUR message bit bar NAMUR bit bar Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for the status of the NAMUR message bit bar The faults ...

Page 830: ...rupted Check the state of the higher level control system Check the communication connection wiring Check the bus configuration clock cycles For bit 08 A safety operation monitoring function Safety has detected an error For bit 09 When evaluating the encoder signals track signals zero marks absolute values an illegal signal state was detected Check the encoder state of the encoder signals Observe ...

Page 831: ...it 2 Power Module 3 Motor Dependency See also r2110 r2122 r2123 r2124 r2125 r2134 r2145 r2146 r3123 Note The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background refer to status signal in r2139 The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122 r3122 0 63 Diagnostic attribute fault Diag_attr fault Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be change...

Page 832: ...faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 1 0 PROFIdrive message class 14 braking controller Braking Module faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 1 1 PROFIdrive message class 15 line filter faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 1 0 0 0 0 PROFIdrive message class 16 external measured value signal state outside the permissible range Bits 20 19 18 17 16 1 0 0 0 1 PROFIdrive message class 17 application technology function...

Page 833: ...e speed actual value or not available Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 0 0 PROFIdrive message class 12 internal DRIVE CLiQ communication error Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 0 1 PROFIdrive message class 13 infeed unit faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 1 0 PROFIdrive message class 14 braking controller Braking Module faulted Bits 20 19 18 17 16 0 1 1 1 1 PROFIdrive message class 15 line filter faulted Bits 20 ...

Page 834: ... p2181 p2193 p3230 See also A07920 A07921 A07922 F07923 F07924 F07925 p3232 0 n BI Load monitoring failure detection Load_moni fail_det Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 8013 Min Max Factory setting 1 Description Sets the signal source for detecting a failure Dependency See also p2192 ...

Page 835: ...Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the calculated optimum flux Dependency See also p1401 p3315 p3316 Note The function is activated via p1401 14 1 p3315 0 n Efficiency optimization 2 minimum flux limit value Min flux lim val Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 6722 6837 Min 10 0 ...

Page 836: ...ated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description For the energy saving display of a fluid flow machine a typical flow characteristic P f n with 5 points along the characteristic is required This parameter specifies the speed n of point 1 as a The characteristic comprises...

Page 837: ...ted Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 77 00 Description For the energy saving display of a fluid flow machine a typical flow characteristic P f n with 5 points along the characteristic is required This parameter specifies the power P of point 3 as a Dependency See also r0041 p3...

Page 838: ...parameter specifies the speed n of point 4 as a Dependency See also r0041 p3320 p3321 p3322 p3323 p3324 p3325 p3326 p3328 p3329 Note The reference value for power and speed is the rated power rated speed The energy saved is displayed in r0041 p3328 0 n Fluid flow machine power point 5 Fluid_mach P5 Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p01...

Page 839: ...Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2272 2273 Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for command 2 for the two wire control three wire control Dependency See also p0015 p3330 p3332 r3333 p3334 Note The mode of operation of this binector input is dependent on the wire control set in p0015 p3332 0 n BI 2 3 wire co...

Page 840: ...ee wire control enable ON reversing Dependency See also p0015 p3330 p3331 p3332 r3333 Note This value depends on the wire control set in p0015 p3340 0 n BI Limit switch start Lim switch start Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source f...

Page 841: ...ling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for the status word of the limit switch Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Limit switch ON OFF1 Yes No 01 Limit switch OFF3 No Yes 02 Limit switch axis stationary standstill Yes No 04 Plus limit switch reached Yes No 05 Minus limit switch reached Yes No Dependenc...

Page 842: ... years after their original manufacture then the DC link capacitors must be reformed before use If this is not done then the units could be damaged in operation Note The DC link capacitor forming function can only be activated online in the drive unit If switched off while forming is active the remaining time r3381 is lost and forming must be repeated for the full forming time If the forming durat...

Page 843: ...on for the DC quantity controller in the overmodulation range There is no DC quantity control for power units that can also be connected through 1 phase to the line supply r0204 15 1 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DC quantity controller on Yes No 01 Bandwidth increased Yes No 02 7th harmonic reduced Yes No 03 Filter active Yes No Dependency The modulator mode p1802 must enable o...

Page 844: ...le especially when the Vdc_max control is simultaneously active refer to p1280 Note The parameter value is entered relative to the rated motor current p0305 Compound braking is deactivated with p3856 0 p3857 0 n DC quantity controller P gain DC_ctrl Kp Access level 3 Calculated CALC_MOD_CON Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Funct...

Page 845: ...tpoint source When the essential service mode is activated the motor cannot be stopped using the OFF commands Note ESM Essential Service Mode Permissible signal sources BO r0722 x high active BO r0723 x low active x 0 5 11 12 p3881 ESM setpoint source ESM setp_src Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7033 Mi...

Page 846: ...ervice mode ESM This setpoint is used when the setpoint source set in p3881 is lost Value 0 Last known setpoint r1078 smoothed 1 Fixed speed setpoint 15 p1015 2 Maximum speed p1082 Dependency See also p3881 Note ESM Essential Service Mode The alternative setpoint source is only active for p3881 2 3 4 p3883 BI ESM direction of rotation signal source ESM rot dir s_s Access level 3 Calculated Data ty...

Page 847: ...1 Faults during the essential service mode Dependency See also p3888 Note ESM Essential Service Mode p3888 ESM reset number of activations faults ESM act F qty r Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7033 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Setting to reset the number of activations and faults that have...

Page 848: ...PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection p0922 and the interconnections via p15 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 1 p3900 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor open loop and closed loop control parameters corresponding to p0340 1 Value 0 No quick parameterization 1 Quick parameterization after parameter reset 2 Quick parameterization only for BICO and motor paramete...

Page 849: ...oltage in the context of motor data identification 0 No alternating voltages The function is deactivated 0 Automatic determination of the base voltage and wobbulation self setting based on the converter and the connected motor Otherwise Base voltage for alternating current generation in volts wobbulation active r3927 0 n Motor data identification control word MotID STW Access level 3 Calculated CA...

Page 850: ...ntroller parameters Yes No 04 Speed controller optimization vibration test Yes No 05 q leakage inductance ident for current controller adaptation Yes No 11 Do not change the controller parameters during the measurement Yes No 12 Measurement shortened Yes No 13 After measurement direct transition into operation Yes No 14 Calculate speed actual value smoothing time Yes No Dependency See also r3925 N...

Page 851: ...of the power unit 0 A5E number xxxx A5Exxxxyyyy 1 A5E number yyyy A5Exxxxyyyy 2 File version logistic 3 File version fixed data 4 File version calib data p3931 Options for electrical cabinets Opt elec cabinet Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin Description ...

Page 852: ...O CounterDevice Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this device The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults Ackn DO faults Access level 3 C...

Page 853: ... comprises the device specific and the drive specific parameters Dependency See also r0980 r0981 r0989 r3988 0 1 Boot state Boot_state Access level 4 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 800 Factory setting Description Index 0 Displays the boot state Index 1 Displays the partial boot state Value 0 Not active 1 Fata...

Page 854: ...Wait for non cyclic start 700 Save parameters 725 Wait for cyclic 740 Check the ability to operate 745 Start cyclic calculations 750 Interrupt enable 800 Initialization finished Index 0 System 1 Partial boot r3996 0 1 Parameter write inhibit status Par_write inhib st Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Ma...

Page 855: ...lection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of Power Module 330 PM330 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DI 0 X9 3 external alarm High Low 01 DI 1 X9 4 external fault High Low 02 DI 2 X9 5 Emergency Off category 0 High Low 03 DI 3 X9 6 Emergency Off category 1 High Low Dependency See also r4022 Note DI Digital Input...

Page 856: ...330 G120X_PN PM330 G120X_USS PM330 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2275 Min Max Factory setting 0000 bin Description Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode of the PM330 power unit Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 DI 0 X9 3 external alarm High Low...

Page 857: ...n diagram 8016 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and BICO output for faults and alarms of the motor temperature monitoring Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Motor temperature measurement fault active Yes No 01 Motor temperature model fault active Yes No 02 Encoder temperature measurement fault active Yes No 04 Motor temperature measurement alarm active Yes No 05 Motor tem...

Page 858: ... motor p0301 this parameter is automatically pre assigned and is write protected Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection Note The hysteresis is 2 K p5391 0 n Mot_temp_mod 1 3 fault threshold F thresh Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index MDS p0130 Unit group 21_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram 80...

Page 859: ... pause time for the energy saving mode The value is the sum of the following times Energy saving mode transition time Operating state transition time regular Energy saving mode time of minimum stay Index 0 Reserved 1 Mode 2 Note It is not permissible that the value is less than the sum of the energy saving mode transition time and the operating state transition time system properties Pe PROFIenerg...

Page 860: ...n be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 0110 bin 1 0000 bin Description Sets the mode dependent properties for energy saving Index 0 Reserved 1 Mode 2 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Reserved Yes No Note Pe PROFIenergy profiles r5613 0 1 CO BO Pe energy saving active inactive Pe save act inact G120X_PN Access level...

Page 861: ... to the List Manual r7758 0 19 KHP Control Unit serial number KHP CU ser_no Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual serial number of the Control Unit The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices For the commis...

Page 862: ...tion can be activated deactivated via p7761 on the Control Unit For bit 01 The know how protection can be activated by entering a password p7766 p7768 For bit 02 If it has already been activated know how protection can be temporarily deactivated by entering the valid password in p7766 In this case bit 1 0 and bit 2 1 offset For bit 03 Know how protection cannot be deactivated as p7766 is not enter...

Page 863: ...0 Write access independent of p7761 1 Write access dependent on p7761 Dependency See also r7760 p7761 p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 KHP OEM qty p7764 Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 1 Max 500 Factory setting 1 Description Sets the number of parameters for the OEM except...

Page 864: ...rd Yes No 02 Permit trace and measuring functions for diagnostic purposes Yes No Dependency See also p7766 p7767 p7768 Note KHP Know How Protection For copy protection the serial numbers of the memory card and or Control Unit are checked The memory card copy protection and preventing data to be traced are only effective when the know how protection has been activated For bit 00 01 If both bits are...

Page 865: ... Factory setting Description Sets the new password for know how protection Dependency See also p7766 p7768 Note KHP Know How Protection When reading p7767 0 29 42 dec ASCII character is displayed p7768 0 29 KHP password confirmation KHP passw confirm Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory se...

Page 866: ...he device 10 Error when clearing 11 Error when backing up memory card not available 12 Error when backing up insufficient memory space 13 Error when backing up 14 Error when importing memory card not available 15 Error when importing checksum error 16 Error when importing no NVRAM data available 17 Error when importing NOTICE For value 2 3 These actions are only possible when pulses are inhibited ...

Page 867: ...mber character 8 r7843 19 0 dec ASCII characters serial number character 20 r7843 20 0 dec Serial number 111923E r7844 0 2 Memory card device memory firmware version Mem_crd dev_mem FW Access level 2 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the version of the firmware stored on the m...

Page 868: ...sampling times can be used by OA applications such as DCC or FBLOCKS Note OA Open Architecture p8400 0 2 RTC time RTC time Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 59 Factory setting 0 Description Sets and displays the time on the real time clock in hours minutes and seconds The time is stored in th...

Page 869: ... displaying the fault time and alarm time the switchover to daylight saving time is not taken into account The parameter is not reset when the factory setting is restored p0010 30 p0970 RTC Real time clock p8402 0 8 RTC daylight saving time setting RTC DST Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 23...

Page 870: ...3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the actual time difference in hours for the daylight saving time Note The value is 0 if daylight saving time has not been defined using p8402 If it is presently daylight saving time according to what is defined in p8402 then the parameter in...

Page 871: ...8423 0 0 DTC3 parameters p8430 p8431 p8432 are inactive and can be set Binector output r8433 0 0 For p8409 1 the following applies DTC1 parameters p8410 p8411 p8412 are active and cannot be set Binector outputs r8413 are active DTC2 parameters p8420 p8421 p8422 are active and cannot be set Binector outputs r8423 are active DTC3 parameters p8430 p8431 p8432 are active and cannot be set Binector out...

Page 872: ...lfilled Index 0 Hour 0 23 1 Minute 0 59 Dependency See also p8409 p8410 r8413 NOTICE This parameter can only be changed when p8409 0 Note DTC Digital Time Clock timer RTC Real time clock p8412 0 1 RTC DTC1 off time RTC DTC1 t_OFF Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 59 Factory setting 0 Descriptio...

Page 873: ...ee also p8409 p8410 p8411 p8412 NOTICE This parameter can only be changed when p8409 0 Note DTC Digital Time Clock timer RTC Real time clock p8420 0 6 RTC DTC2 weekday of activation RTC DTC2 day act Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the weekday on which timer...

Page 874: ...and minutes for time switch 2 DTC2 BO r8423 0 signal The condition for the set weekday p8420 and switch off time has been fulfilled Index 0 Hour 0 23 1 Minute 0 59 Dependency See also p8409 p8420 r8423 NOTICE This parameter can only be changed when p8409 0 Note DTC Digital Time Clock timer RTC Real time clock r8423 0 1 BO RTC DTC2 output RTC DTC2 output Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned...

Page 875: ...day 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 Saturday 6 Sunday Dependency See also p8409 p8431 p8432 r8433 NOTICE This parameter can only be changed when p8409 0 Note DTC Digital Time Clock timer RTC Real time clock p8431 0 1 RTC DTC3 switch on time RTC DTC3 t_ON Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min ...

Page 876: ...ccess level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Display and binector output for the output of timer 3 DTC3 Where a weekday is deactivated the following applies p8430 the binector output for this timer is inactive r8433 0 0 Where a weekday is activated the following applies p8430 the ON...

Page 877: ... Yes No 07 Acknowledge fault Yes No 08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030 09 Jog bit 1 Yes No 3030 10 Reserved Yes No 11 Direction reversal setpoint Yes No 12 Reserved Yes No 13 Reserved Yes No 14 Reserved Yes No 15 Reserved Yes No r8541 CO Speed setpoint from the IOP in the manual mode n_set IOP Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit ...

Page 878: ...amp function generator 5 Continue ramp function generator 6 Enable speed setpoint 7 Acknowledge fault 8 Jog bit 0 9 Jog bit 1 10 Master control by PLC 11 Direction reversal setpoint 12 Enable speed controller 13 Motorized potentiometer raise 14 Motorized potentiometer lower 15 CDS bit 0 p8543 CI Active speed setpoint in the BOP IOP manual mode N_act act OP Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsig...

Page 879: ...015 Note For a value 9999999 the following applies The read operation is still running r8571 0 39 Macro Binector Input BI Macro BI Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non volatile memory Note For a value 99999...

Page 880: ...tory setting 0 Description Sets the configuration for the content of identification and maintenance 4 I M 4 p8809 Value 0 Standard value for I M 4 p8809 1 User value for I M 4 p8809 Dependency For p8805 0 if the user writes at least one value in p8809 0 53 then p8805 is automatically set to 1 When p8805 is reset 0 then the content of the factory setting is set in p8809 Note For p8805 0 PROFINET I ...

Page 881: ...I YYYY MM DD or YYYY MM DD hh mm YYYY year MM month 01 12 DD day 01 31 hh hours 00 23 mm minutes 00 59 Separators must be placed between the individual data i e a hyphen space and colon p8808 0 53 Identification and Maintenance 3 I M 3 G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting D...

Page 882: ... 0 SI change tracking time stamp checksum functional For p8809 8 53 Reserved r8854 PROFINET state PN state G120X_PN Access level 4 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting Description State display for PROFINET Value 0 No initialization 1 Fatal fault 2 Initialization 3 Send configuration 4 Receive c...

Page 883: ... firmware version V13 00 second part see index 7 r8859 5 2011 year 2011 r8859 6 2306 23rd of June r8859 7 1700 second part firmware version complete version V13 00 17 00 r8909 PN device ID PN device ID G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the PROFINET Devi...

Page 884: ...ency See also p8925 r8931 Note The interface configuration p8920 and following is activated with p8925 The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting p8922 0 3 PN Default Gateway PN Def Gateway G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting 0 Description Sets th...

Page 885: ... displayed in parameter r8934 The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting p8925 Activate PN interface configuration PN IF config G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 3 Factory setting 0 Description Setting to activate the interface configuration for the onboard PROFINE...

Page 886: ...isplays the actual default gateway for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit r8933 0 3 PN Subnet Mask actual PN Subnet Mask act G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 255 Factory setting Description Displays the actual subnet mask for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control ...

Page 887: ...V4 5 20308 hex CU320 2 PN V4 6 20407 hex CU230P 2 PN CU240x 2 PN V4 5 20408 hex CU230P 2 PN CU240x 2 PN CU250S 2 PN G110M PN V4 6 20507 hex CU250D 2 PN V4 5 20508 hex CU250D 2 PN V4 6 p8980 Ethernet IP profile Eth IP profile G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2473 Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Des...

Page 888: ...0 0 25 131 0 125 132 0 0625 133 0 03125 Dependency See also p8980 Note Changes only become effective after POWER ON The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting p8983 Ethernet IP ODVA torque scaling Eth IP ODVA M scal G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 123 Max 133 Factory set...

Page 889: ...2 Only memory access 3 USB commissioning and memory access Note COMM Commissioning A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting p9400 Safely remove memory card Mem_card rem Access level 2 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 100 Factory setting 0 ...

Page 890: ...Safe removal possible corresponds to p9400 3 Bit 1 0 1 0 Status not possible Bit 1 0 1 1 Memory card inserted corresponds to p9400 1 2 100 For bit 02 00 Bit 2 0 0 0 No memory card inserted Bit 2 0 0 1 Memory card inserted but not a SIEMENS memory card Bit 2 0 1 0 Status not possible Bit 2 0 1 1 SIEMENS memory card inserted r9406 0 19 PS file parameter number parameter not transferred PS par_no n t...

Page 891: ...cy See also r9406 r9408 Note All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter r9406 x parameter number parameter not accepted r9407 x parameter index parameter not accepted r9408 x fault code parameter not accepted r9408 0 19 PS file fault code parameter not transferred PS fault code Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit sel...

Page 892: ...ry setting Description Displays the set valid macro Note A value of 0 is displayed if a parameter set by a macro is changed p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source BICO s_s srch Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 4294967295 Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source BO CO pa...

Page 893: ...9485 and the first index r9486 r9925 0 99 Firmware file incorrect FW file incorr Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the directory and name of the file whose status as shipped from the factory was identified as impermissible Dependency See also r9926 See also A0101...

Page 894: ...4 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0000 hex Max FFFF FFFF hex Factory setting 0000 hex Description Only for service purposes p9932 Save system logbook EEPROM SYSLOG EEPROM save Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 ...

Page 895: ...l utilization Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher priority sampling times interrupts r9999 0 99 Software error internal supplementary diagnostics SW_err int diag Access level 4 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Diagnostics parameter to display addit...

Page 896: ...ler 0 Value 1 2 1 referred no dimensions 3 bar 4 C 5 Pa 6 ltr s 7 m s 8 ltr min 9 m min 10 ltr h 11 m h 12 kg s 13 kg min 14 kg h 15 t min 16 t h 17 N 18 kN 19 Nm 20 psi 21 F 22 gallon s 23 inch s 24 gallon min 25 inch min 26 gallon h 27 inch h 28 lb s 29 lb min 30 lb h 31 lbf 32 lbf ft 33 K 34 rpm 35 parts min 36 m s 37 ft s 38 ft min 39 BTU min 40 BTU h 41 mbar 42 inch wg Parameters 7 2 Paramete...

Page 897: ... Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 0 Value 0 Reserved 1 128 ms 2 256 ms 3 512 ms 4 1024 ms r11049 0 11 CO BO Free tec_ctrl 0 status word Ftec0 stat_word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 C...

Page 898: ...n Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 650 00 s Factory setting 1 00 s Description Sets the ramp down time for the free technology controller 0 Dependency See also p11057 Note The ramp down time is referred to 100 r11060 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint after ramp function generator Ftec0 setp aft RFG Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit ...

Page 899: ...ee technology controller 0 p11065 Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value smoothing time constant Ftec0 act v T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 60 00 s Factory setting 0 00 s Description Sets the smoothing time constant PT1 for the actual value of the free technology controller 0 p11067...

Page 900: ...t group 9_2 Unit selection p11026 Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 0 p11074 Free tec_ctrl 0 differentiation time constant Ftec0 D comp T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 000...

Page 901: ... be greater than the minimum limit p11091 p11092 p11092 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 limit minimum Ftec0 lim min Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 0 Dependency See also p11091 Note Th...

Page 902: ...ynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting 11092 0 Description Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 0 Dependency See also p11092 p11099 CI Free tec_ctrl 0 limit offset signal source Ftec0 lim offs Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit gr...

Page 903: ...roller 1 Value 1 2 1 referred no dimensions 3 bar 4 C 5 Pa 6 ltr s 7 m s 8 ltr min 9 m min 10 ltr h 11 m h 12 kg s 13 kg min 14 kg h 15 t min 16 t h 17 N 18 kN 19 Nm 20 psi 21 F 22 gallon s 23 inch s 24 gallon min 25 inch min 26 gallon h 27 inch h 28 lb s 29 lb min 30 lb h 31 lbf 32 lbf ft 33 K 34 rpm 35 parts min 36 m s 37 ft s 38 ft min 39 BTU min 40 BTU h 41 mbar 42 inch wg Parameters 7 2 Param...

Page 904: ...amp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 1 Value 0 Reserved 1 128 ms 2 256 ms 3 512 ms 4 1024 ms r11149 0 11 CO BO Free tec_ctrl 1 status word Ftec1 stat_word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned3...

Page 905: ...on Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 650 00 s Factory setting 1 00 s Description Sets the ramp down time of the free technology controller 1 Dependency See also p11157 Note The ramp down time is referred to 100 r11160 CO Free tec_ctrl 1 setpoint after ramp function generator Ftec1 setp aft RFG Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit ...

Page 906: ...ee technology controller 1 p11165 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value smoothing time constant Ftec1 act v T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 60 00 s Factory setting 0 00 s Description Sets the smoothing time constant PT1 for the actual value of the free technology controller 1 p11167...

Page 907: ...t group 9_3 Unit selection p11126 Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 1 p11174 Free tec_ctrl 1 differentiation time constant Ftec1 D comp T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 000...

Page 908: ... be greater than the minimum limit p11191 p11192 p11192 CO Free tec_ctrl 1 limit minimum Ftec1 lim min Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 1 Dependency See also p11191 Note Th...

Page 909: ...ynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting 11192 0 Description Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 1 Dependency See also p11192 p11199 CI Free tec_ctrl 1 limit offset signal source Ftec1 lim offs Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit gr...

Page 910: ...roller 2 Value 1 2 1 referred no dimensions 3 bar 4 C 5 Pa 6 ltr s 7 m s 8 ltr min 9 m min 10 ltr h 11 m h 12 kg s 13 kg min 14 kg h 15 t min 16 t h 17 N 18 kN 19 Nm 20 psi 21 F 22 gallon s 23 inch s 24 gallon min 25 inch min 26 gallon h 27 inch h 28 lb s 29 lb min 30 lb h 31 lbf 32 lbf ft 33 K 34 rpm 35 parts min 36 m s 37 ft s 38 ft min 39 BTU min 40 BTU h 41 mbar 42 inch wg Parameters 7 2 Param...

Page 911: ...amp Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 Max 4 Factory setting 2 Description Sets the sampling time for the free technology controller 2 Value 0 Reserved 1 128 ms 2 256 ms 3 512 ms 4 1024 ms r11249 0 11 CO BO Free tec_ctrl 2 status word Ftec2 stat_word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned3...

Page 912: ...on Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 650 00 s Factory setting 1 00 s Description Sets the ramp down time of the free technology controller 2 Dependency See also p11257 Note The ramp down time is referred to 100 r11260 CO Free tec_ctrl 2 setpoint after ramp function generator Ftec2 setp aft RFG Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit ...

Page 913: ...ee technology controller 2 p11265 Free tec_ctrl 2 actual value smoothing time constant Ftec2 act v T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 00 s Max 60 00 s Factory setting 0 00 s Description Sets the smoothing time constant PT1 for the actual value of the free technology controller 2 p11267...

Page 914: ...t group 9_4 Unit selection p11226 Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting Description Display and connector output for the system deviation of the free technology controller 2 p11274 Free tec_ctrl 2 differentiation time constant Ftec2 D comp T Access level 2 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 0 000...

Page 915: ... be greater than the minimum limit p11291 p11292 p11292 CO Free tec_ctrl 2 limit minimum Ftec2 lim min Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min 200 00 Max 200 00 Factory setting 0 00 Description Sets the minimum limit of the free technology controller 2 Dependency See also p11291 Note Th...

Page 916: ...tingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 7030 Min Max Factory setting 11292 0 Description Sets the signal source for the minimum limit of the free technology controller 2 Dependency See also p11292 p11299 CI Free tec_ctrl 2 limit offset signal source Ftec2 lim offs Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be c...

Page 917: ...nteger16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 6 Factory setting 0 Description Selects the number of motors that will be used as multi pump control Value 0 NONE 1 M1 1X 2 M1 1X M2 1X 3 M1 1X M2 1X M3 1X 4 M1 1X M2 1X M3 1X M4 1X 5 M1 1X M2 1X M3 1X M4 1X M5 1X 6 M1 1X M2 1X M3 1X M4 1X M5 1X M6 1X Note 1X means motor power that configured in P3...

Page 918: ...er the system deviation of the technology controller has exceeded the threshold value p29523 and the motor has reached the maximum speed Dependency refer to P29523 Note If the deviation at the technology controller input exceeds the overcontrol threshold p29526 the delay time is bypassed p29525 Multi pump control switch out delay Mpc sw_out del Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned16 Can be...

Page 919: ...ulated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram Min 0 0 rpm Max 21000 0 rpm Factory setting 100 0 rpm Description Sets the speed offset which pluses p1080 as the speed threshold If the system deviation of the technology controller has exceeded the threshold p29523 for p29525s or exceeded the threshold p29526 and the mot...

Page 920: ...tinuous operation is measured starting from when a motor is ON and It ends when a motor is OFF p29533 Multi pump control switch off sequence Mpc sw_off seq Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 Max 1 Factory setting 0 Description Selection of the response used to stop the motors when the OFF command is ...

Page 921: ... switchover function 0 Pump switchover function inhibited 1 Pump switchover function enabled Value 0 Disable switchover 1 Enable switchover Note With pump switchover enabled the converter monitors the operation status of all running pumps If the continuous operating hours of the pump in converter operation exceed the threshold the converter switches off the pump and then switches in an idle pump t...

Page 922: ... motor 6 locked Yes No p29543 0 5 BI Multi pump control motor under repair Mpc mtr_und_ser Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 29542 0 1 29542 1 2 29542 2 3 29542 3 4 29542 4 5 29542 5 Description Sets the signal source digital input or p29542 for service mode The signal ...

Page 923: ...eviation threshold Mpc devia thres Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling PERCENT Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 20 00 Description If the system deviation p2273 at the PID technology controller exceeds the threshold p29546 and no more motor is available alarm A52963 occurs p29547 0 5 Multi pump co...

Page 924: ...roup 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram Min 0 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 30 00 rpm Description Defines the threshold 2 for comparing the speed actual value with the speed threshold p29572 0 n Ramp up scaling 2 RmpUpScaling2 Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 Ma...

Page 925: ...9999999 00 Factory setting 100 00 Description Sets the ramp down scaling 2 for dual ramp function Note The linear deceleration time from speed p29574 to speed 0 can be calculated via formula p29574 p1082 p1121 p29575 If p1131 is not equal to 0 the time will be adapted r29576 CO Ramp up scaling output RmpUpScale output Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed Scaling PERCE...

Page 926: ...29579 will function p29580 0 n BI Dual ramp enable DualRmp En Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Binary Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index CDS p0170 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source to enable the dual ramp function p29590 0 n Deragging mode Derag mod Access level 3 Calculated Data type Integer16 Can be changed T...

Page 927: ...rag rev spd Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 3_1 Unit selection p0505 Function diagram Min 210000 00 rpm Max 210000 00 rpm Factory setting 500 00 rpm Description Defines reverse speed setpoint for deragging Note The actual speed setpoint is limited by minimal P1080 and maximum P1082 value If both reverse speed P29593 an...

Page 928: ...loatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 s Max 1000 00 s Factory setting 5 00 s Description Defines the duration time at reverse speed for deragging p29598 0 n Number of deragging cycles Derag cycs Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group Unit selection Funct...

Page 929: ...tion Function diagram Min 0 50 s Max 10000 00 s Factory setting 50 00 s Description Sets the duration time for the pipe filling p29614 0 n Pipe filling threshold PF thresh Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index DDS p0180 Unit group 9_1 Unit selection p0595 Function diagram Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 10 00 Description Defines the threshol...

Page 930: ...05 Function diagram Min 210000 000 rpm Max 210000 000 rpm Factory setting 0 000 rpm Description Specifies the speed applied to the motor when frost protection is active And this parameter can t be changed when the frost or condensation function is active Dependency See also p29622 p29624 0 n Condensation protection current Cond current Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be cha...

Page 931: ...ex Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Displays the status word for application bit 0 1 pipe filling is active 0 pipe filling is not active bit 2 1 0 1 condesation protection is active 1 1 frost protection is active 0 0 frost and condensation protections are not active 1 0 not used Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 Pipe filling Active Inac...

Page 932: ...ad across the full power range of the converter User should guarantee values in all indexes is increasing in sequence p29631 0 p29631 1 p29631 2 Otherwise the calculated flow value will be 0 p29632 0 4 Flow meter pump flow FlowM_flow Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 m h Max 340 28235E36 ...

Page 933: ...int of the ramp function generator p29643 CI Ramp function generator setpoint input Total Setpoint Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling p2000 Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting 0 Description Sets the signal source for inputting the setpoint of the ramp function generator p29650 0 n DI selection for ON ...

Page 934: ...tion Sets the signal source for the command ON OFF2 OFF2 r29659 0 1 CO BO Command word Cmd word Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned32 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min Max Factory setting Description Command status is for ON OFF1 OFF2 which can connect to p0840 p0844 Bit field Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP 00 ON OFF1 Active Inactive...

Page 935: ...he analog input e g r755 x which is the AI channel of the sensor connected p29704 Equivalent wire resistance TempSen R_wire Access level 3 Calculated Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T U Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 ohm Max 3000 00 ohm Factory setting 0 00 ohm Description Sets the equivalent wire resistance for temperature sensor If the wire res...

Page 936: ...ling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Min 0 00 Max 100 00 Factory setting 50 00 Description Sets the exciting current of temperature sensor p60000 PROFIdrive reference speed reference frequency PD n_ref f_ref G120X_DP G120X_PN Access level 2 Calculated CALC_MOD_ALL Data type FloatingPoint32 Can be changed T Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram Mi...

Page 937: ...erted into a percentage value via the pre specified scaling 4000 0000 hex This percentage value is converted to the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed p60000 r61000 0 239 PROFINET Name of Station PN Name of Station G120X_PN Access level 3 Calculated Data type Unsigned8 Can be changed Scaling Dynamic index Unit group Unit selection Function diagram 2410 Min Max Factory setting Descri...

Page 938: ...osing single quotation mark 40 28 Opening parenthesis 41 29 Closing parenthesis 42 2A Asterisk 43 2B Plus 44 2C Comma 45 2D Hyphen minus 46 2E Period decimal point 47 2F Slash slant 0 48 30 Digit 0 9 57 39 Digit 9 58 3A Colon 59 3B Semicolon 60 3C Less than 61 3D Equals 62 3E Greater than 63 3F Question mark 64 40 Commercial At A 65 41 Capital Letter A Z 90 5A Capital letter Z 91 5B Opening bracke...

Page 939: ...ingle quotation mark a 97 61 Small letter a z 122 7A Small Letter z 123 7B Opening brace 124 7C Vertical line 125 7D Closing brace 126 7E Tilde Parameters 7 3 ASCII table SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 937 ...

Page 940: ...Parameters 7 3 ASCII table SINAMICS G120X converter 938 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 941: ...recommend that you additionally back up the settings on a storage medium outside the converter Without backup your settings could be lost if the converter develops a defect The following storage media are available for your settings Memory card Operator panel SINAMICS G120 Smart Access SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 939 ...

Page 942: ...are either not possible or only with some restrictions when using memory cards from other manufacturers Know how protection is only possible with one of the recommended memory cards In certain circumstances memory cards from other manufacturers do not support writing or reading data from to the converter 8 1 2 Saving setting on a memory card Overview We recommend that you insert the memory card be...

Page 943: ...mpletely loaded and damaged The converter cannot be operated with corrupt firmware Before inserting the memory card ascertain whether it also contains converter firmware Do not switch off converter power supply during an operating system update Firmware upgrade and downgrade Page 1073 Note Accidental overwrite of the converter settings When the supply voltage is switched on the converter automatic...

Page 944: ...n the memory card 6 2 6 9 1 3 U 6 21 1 Start data transfer with OK 72 5 G2Q Wait until the converter has backed up the settings to the memory card You have backed up the settings of the converter to the memory card 8 1 3 Transferring the setting from the memory card 8 1 3 1 Automatic transfer Precondition The converter power supply has been switched off Saving the settings and series commissioning...

Page 945: ...erring Requirement The converter power supply has been switched on A memory card is inserted in the converter Function description Procedure with the BOP 2 237 216 520 5 In the OPTIONS menu select FROM CRD 3 5 0 6 7 Set the number of your data backup You can back up 99 different settings on the memory card Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 1 Memory card SINAMICS G120X converter Operat...

Page 946: ...on the memory card The data on the memory card are lost The memory card will only function again after formatting Only remove the memory card using the safe removal function Function description Procedure with the BOP 2 3 5 06 67 1 5 7 5 3 ැ 1 Set p9400 2 If a memory card is inserted p9400 1 3 3 2 The converter sets p9400 3 or p9400 100 p9400 3 You may remove the memory card from the converter p94...

Page 947: ... higher level control that a memory card is not inserted connect parameter r9401 to the send data of the fieldbus interface Deactivate message Procedure 1 Set p2118 x 1101 x 0 1 19 2 Set p2119 x 3 Message A01101 for a memory card that is not inserted is deactivated Parameter Parameter Explanation Factory setting p2118 0 19 Change message type message number 0 p2119 0 19 Change message type type 0 ...

Page 948: ... data transfer with OK 6 9 1 3 U 6 3 Wait until the converter has backed up the settings to the BOP 2 3 1 6 21 1 72 23 G2Q You have backed up the settings to the BOP 2 8 2 2 Transfer to the converter Precondition The converter power supply has been switched on Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 2 Operator panel SINAMICS G120X converter 946 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E447...

Page 949: ...81 3 1 6 520 23 G2Q 4 Switch off the converter power supply 5 Wait until all converter LEDs are dark 6 Switch on the converter power supply again Your settings become active after switching on You have transferred the settings to the converter Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 2 Operator panel SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 947 ...

Page 950: ...e memory card you can back up 99 other settings in addition to the default setting Additional information is available on the Internet Memory options http support automation siemens com WW view en 43512514 Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 3 Other ways to back up settings SINAMICS G120X converter 948 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 951: ...are version as the source converter Function description Procedure 1 Commission the first converter 2 Back up the settings of the first converter to an external storage medium 3 Transfer the settings from the first converter to another converter via the data storage medium Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 4 Series commissioning SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 ...

Page 952: ...el Acc_level p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter Drv comm par_filt p0124 0 n CU detection using LED CU detect LED p0970 Reset drive parameters Drive par reset p0971 Save parameters Sav par p0972 Drive unit reset Drv_unit reset p2111 Alarm counter Alarm counter p3950 Service parameter Serv par p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults Ackn DO faults p3985 Master control mode selection PcCtrl mod...

Page 953: ...aster fieldbus systems e g BACnet or Modbus RTU in spite of write protection being activated parameters can still be changed So that write protection is also active when accessing via these fieldbuses you must additionally set p7762 to 1 Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 5 Write protection SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 951 ...

Page 954: ...Recommended memory cards Page 940 Know how protection with extended copy pro tection Function description The active know how protection provides the following With just a few exceptions the values of all adjustable parameters p are invisible Several adjustable parameters can be read and changed when know how protection is active In addition you can define an exception list of adjustable parameter...

Page 955: ...basic copy protection After replacing a converter to be able to operate the new converter with the settings of the replaced converter without knowing the password the memory card must be inserted in the new converter Know how protection with extended copy protection It is not possible to insert and use the memory card in another converter without knowing the password Commissioning know how protect...

Page 956: ...ly remove memory card Mem_card rem p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source BICO S_src srch Table 8 4 Parameters that can be read with active know how protection Number Name p0015 Macro drive unit Macro drv unit p0100 IEC NEMA Standards IEC NEMA Standards p0170 Number of Command Data Sets CDS CDS count p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets DDS DDS count p0300 0 n Motor type selection Mot type se...

Page 957: ...you can additionally enter the adjustable parameters in the exception list which must still be able to be read and changed by end users even if know how protection has been activated You do not need to change the exception list if with exception of the password you do not require additional adjustable parameters in the exception list Absolute know how protection If you remove password p7766 from t...

Page 958: ... activated Deactivating know how protection 1 Enter the password for the know how protection in p7766 Each index of p7766 corresponds with a character in the ASCII format 2 Complete entry of the password with p7766 29 0 The know how protection for the converter is deactivated Parameter Parameter Description Factory setting r7758 0 19 KHP Control Unit serial number p7759 0 19 KHP Control Unit refer...

Page 959: ...o guarantee know how protection after activating know how protection we recommend that you insert a new empty memory card For memory cards that have already been written to previously backed up data that was not encrypted can be reconstructed Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 6 Know how protection SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 957 ...

Page 960: ...Saving the settings and series commissioning 8 6 Know how protection SINAMICS G120X converter 958 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 961: ...mber The converter signals alarms and faults via the following interfaces Fieldbus Terminal strip with the appropriate setting Interface to the BOP 2 or IOP 2 operator panel Interface to SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Identification maintenance data I M If requested the converter sends data to the higher level control via PROFINET Converter specific data Plant specific data SINAMICS G120X converter Op...

Page 962: ...e supply voltage is switched on The converter is free of faults Commissioning or reset to factory settings A fault is active Firmware update is active Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a firmware update Table 9 3 PROFINET fieldbus LNK Explanation Communication via PROFINET is error free Device naming is active No communication via PROFINET Warnings ...

Page 963: ...vated with p2040 0 the BF LED remains dark independent of the communication state Table 9 5 PROFINET fieldbus BF Explanation Data exchange between the converter and control system is active Fieldbus interface is not being used The fieldbus is improperly configured RDY In conjunction with a synchronously flashing LED RDY Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again a...

Page 964: ...ystem runtime comprises r2114 0 milliseconds and r2114 1 days System runtime r2114 1 days r2114 0 milliseconds If r2114 0 has reached a value of 86 400 000 ms 24 hours r2114 0 is set to the value 0 and the value of r2114 1 is increased by 1 Example Parameter Description r2114 0 System runtime ms r2114 1 System runtime days You cannot reset the system runtime Parameters Parameter Description Factor...

Page 965: ...t to the value generated by the machine if p8805 0 is used p8809 0 53 Values of r9781 0 and r9782 0 When requested the converter transfers its I M data to a higher level control or to a PC PG with installed STEP 7 or TIA Portal I M0 Designation Format Example for the content Valid for PRO FINET Valid for PRO FIBUS Manufacturer specific u8 10 00 00 hex MANUFACTURER_ID u16 42d hex Sie mens ORDER_ID ...

Page 966: ...INAMICS G120 Smart Access Alarm code or alarm value describe the cause of the alarm Alarm buffer ROG QHZ ODUP FRGH ODUP YDOXH ODUP WLPH UHFHLYHG ODUP WLPH UHPRYHG D V D V U U U U U U U IORDW PV PV Figure 9 1 Alarm buffer The converter saves incoming alarms in the alarm buffer An alarm includes an alarm code an alarm value and two alarm times Alarm code r2122 Alarm value r2124 in fixed point format...

Page 967: ...etely full the converter will delete the oldest alarms 2 The converter moves the removed alarms from the alarm buffer to the now freed up positions of the alarm history Alarms that have not been removed remain in the alarm buffer 3 The converter closes gaps in the alarm buffer that occurred when the removed alarms were shifted in the alarm history by shifting the alarms that have not been removed ...

Page 968: ...Alarm time removed in days Table 9 7 Extended settings for alarms Parameter Description Factory setting You can change up to 20 different alarms into a fault or suppress alarms p2118 0 19 Change message type message number 0 p2119 0 19 Change message type type 1 Further information is provided in the parameter list Warnings faults and system messages 9 4 Alarms alarm buffer and alarm history SINAM...

Page 969: ... Fault buffer 2OG 1HZ DXOW FRGH DXOW YDOXH DXOW WLPH UHFHLYHG DXOW WLPH UHPRYHG D V D V U U U U U U U IORDW PV PV Figure 9 3 Fault buffer The converter saves incoming faults in the fault buffer A fault includes a fault code a fault value and two fault times Fault code r0945 The fault code and fault value describe the cause of the fault Fault value r0949 in fixed point format I32 r2133 in floating ...

Page 970: ...e fault causes in the fault buffer has been removed and you acknowledge the faults the following takes place 1 The converter shifts the values previously saved in the fault history by eight indexes The converter deletes the faults that were saved in the indexes 56 63 before the acknowledgement 2 The converter copies the contents of the fault buffer to the memory locations 8 15 in the fault history...

Page 971: ...3 Fault time removed in days Extended settings for faults Parameter Description Factory setting p2100 0 19 Changing the fault reaction fault number 0 p2101 0 19 Changing the fault reaction reaction 0 p2118 0 19 Change message type message number 0 p2119 0 19 Change message type type 1 p2126 0 19 Changing the acknowledge mode fault number 0 p2127 0 19 Changing the acknowledge mode 1 Further informa...

Page 972: ...nternal software error has occurred Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy evaluate fault buffer r0945 carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on for all components if required check the data on the non volatile memory e g memory card upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support replace the Control Unit F01001 FloatingPoint exception ...

Page 973: ... internal software error has occurred Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on for all components upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support F01003 Acknowledgment delay when accessing the memory Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A memory area was accessed that does not return a READ...

Page 974: ...is defective xxxx 0092 hex 146 dec This SW or HW does not support the selected function xxxx 009C hex 156 dec Component with the specified component number is not available p7828 xxxx Additional values Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy Save a suitable firmware file or EEPROM file for upload or download in folder ee_sac on the memory card A01009 N CU Control module overtemperature Re...

Page 975: ...9926 See also r9925 r9926 A01017 Component lists changed Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause On the memory card one file in the directory SIEMENS SINAMICS DATA or ADDON SINAMICS DATA has been illegally changed with respect to that supplied from the factory No changes are permitted in this directory Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal zyx dec x Problem y Directory z File name x 1 File does not exi...

Page 976: ...le size for the system logbook to the internal RAM disk p9930 See also p9930 System logbook activation A01021 Removable data medium as USB data storage medium from the PC used Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The removable data medium is used as USB data storage medium from a PC As a consequence the drive cannot access the removable data medium When backing up the configuration data cannot be ...

Page 977: ...LY Cause When changing over the units to the referred representation type it is not permissible for any of the required reference parameters to be equal to 0 0 Fault value r0949 parameter Reference parameter whose value is 0 0 See also p0505 p0595 Remedy Set the value of the reference parameter to a number different than 0 0 See also p0304 p0305 p0310 p0596 p2000 p2001 p2002 p2003 r2004 F01034 Uni...

Page 978: ... parameters p0971 1 or copy RAM to ROM See also p0971 Save parameters F01036 A ACX Parameter back up file missing Reaction NONE OFF1 OFF2 OFF3 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause When downloading the device parameterization a parameter back up file PSxxxyyy ACX associated with a drive object cannot be found Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Byte 1 yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy ACX yyy 000 consiste...

Page 979: ... one parameter back up file PSxxxyyy in the non volatile memory was unsuccessful in the directory USER SINAMICS DATA at least one parameter back up file PSxxxyyy has the read only file attribute and cannot be overwritten there is not sufficient free memory space available the non volatile memory is defective and cannot be written to Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal dcba hex a yyy in the fil...

Page 980: ...ot be changed 2 Lower or upper value limit exceeded 3 Sub index incorrect 4 No array no sub index 5 Data type incorrect 6 Setting not permitted only resetting 7 Descriptive element cannot be changed 9 Descriptive data not available 11 No master control 15 No text array available 17 Task cannot be executed due to operating state 20 Illegal value 21 Response too long 22 Parameter address illegal 23 ...

Page 981: ...otating or is there a message signal carefully note any other messages signals and remove their cause boot from previously saved files switch off switch on or p0970 F01044 CU Descriptive data error Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause An error was detected when loading the descriptive data saved in the non volatile memory Remedy Replace the memory card or Control Unit A01045 Configuring data i...

Page 982: ...21005 DCC or r20005 FBLOCKS if necessary the assignment of the run time group p21000 p20000 can be changed in order to increase the sampling time r21001 r20001 if necessary reduce the number of cyclically calculated blocks DCC and or function blocks FBLOCKS A01066 Buffer memory 70 fill level reached or exceeded Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The non volatile buffer memory for parameter chang...

Page 983: ...with compatible parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON insert a memory card without parameter backup and carry out a POWER ON if required withdraw the memory card and carry out POWER ON save the parameters p0971 1 F01072 Memory card restored from the backup copy Reaction NONE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The Control Unit was switched off while writing to the memory card This is why the visible...

Page 984: ...the number of data sets F01107 Save to memory card unsuccessful Reaction NONE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A data save to the memory card was not able to be successfully carried out Memory card defective insufficient space on memory card Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 The file on the RAM was not able to be opened 2 The file on the RAM was not able to be read 3 A new directory could not be ...

Page 985: ...edge POWER ON Cause Insufficient computation time Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy Contact Technical Support F01250 CU CU EEPROM incorrect read only data Reaction NONE OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause Error when reading the read only data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Only for internal Siemens troublesho...

Page 986: ...y The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all read transfers 2yy The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE CLiQ connection on the Control Unit is not sufficient for all write transfers 3yy Cyclic communication is fully utilized 4yy The DRIVE CLiQ cycle starts before the earliest end of the application An additional dead time must be a...

Page 987: ...cle on a line all clock cycles of all drive objects in the previously mentioned parameters apply which have components on the line involved For fault value 9yy in addition check the clock cycles settings p0112 p0115 p4099 The lower the numerical value difference between two clock cycles the higher the lowest common multiple This behavior has a significantly stronger influence the higher the numeri...

Page 988: ...O input or the normalized units are the same but the reference values are different Example 1 BICO output with voltage normalized unit BICO input with current normalized unit BICO output and BICO input lie in different drive objects This means that the factor p2002 p2001 is calculated between the BICO output and the BICO input p2002 contains the reference value for current p2001 contains the refer...

Page 989: ...ck whether an impermissible voltage is connected at one of the digital outputs check whether a digital output is loaded with an impermissible current upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support A01900 F PROFIBUS Configuration telegram error Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram Alarm value r...

Page 990: ...A01945 PROFIBUS Connection to the Publisher failed Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause For PROFIBUS peer to peer data transfer the connection to at least one Publisher has failed Alarm value r2124 interpret binary Bit 0 1 Publisher with address in r2077 0 connection failed Bit 15 1 Publisher with address in r2077 15 connection failed Remedy Check the PROFIBUS cables See also r2077 PROFIBUS diagno...

Page 991: ...e See also p4721 Trace recording time Remedy Check the selected recording time and if necessary adjust A02056 Trace Recording cycle too short Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The selected recording clock cycle is lower than the basic clock cycle 500µs See also p4720 Trace recording cycle Remedy Increase the value for the trace cycle A02057 Trace Time slice clock cycle invalid Reaction NONE Ack...

Page 992: ...dy specify the signal to be traced check whether the relevant signal can be traced A02061 Trace Invalid signal Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause the specified signal does not exist the specified signal can no longer be traced recorded See also p4730 p4731 p4732 p4733 Remedy specify the signal to be traced check whether the relevant signal can be traced A02062 Trace Invalid trigger signal Reacti...

Page 993: ...race trace recorder 0 measuring function long time trace trigger condition immediate recording start IMMEDIATE trigger condition start with function generator FG_START Remedy if required deactivate the multiple trace p4840 0 0 deactivate function or setting that is not permissible See also p4840 MTrace cycle number setting A02096 MTrace 0 cannot be saved Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause It is ...

Page 994: ...card is not inserted or is blocked by a mounted USB drive 3 data save operation to slow a second trace has been completed before the measurement results of the first trace were able to be saved writing the measurement result files to the card is blocked by the parameter save 4 Data save operation canceled for instance the file required for the data save operation was not able to be found See also ...

Page 995: ...alue r0949 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on for all components upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support replace the Control Unit Note OA Open Architecture See also r4950 r4955 p4956 r4957 F02152 A OA Insufficient memory Reaction OFF1 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY POWER ON Cause Too many functions have been...

Page 996: ... monitoring for an analog input has responded The input value of the analog input has undershot the threshold value parameterized in p0761 0 3 p0756 0 Analog input 0 p0756 1 Analog input 1 p0756 2 Analog input 2 Fault value r0949 interpret decimal yxxx dec y analog input 0 analog input 0 AI 0 1 analog input 1 AI 1 2 analog input 2 AI 2 xxx component number p0151 Note For the following analog input...

Page 997: ...re heat sink AC inverter Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heat sink has been reached The response is set using p0290 If the heat sink temperature exceeds the value set in p0292 0 then fault F30004 is output Remedy Check the following is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values have the load conditions and the load duty cycl...

Page 998: ... the rectifier has been reached The response is set using p0290 If the temperature of the rectifier increases by an additional 5 K then fault F30037 is triggered Remedy Check the following is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned has the fan failed Check the direction of rotation has a phase of the li...

Page 999: ...heck the line supply voltage See also p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage A06921 N Braking resistor phase asymmetry Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause the three resistors of the braking chopper are not symmetrical DC link voltage oscillations caused by fluctuating loads of the connected drives Remedy check the feeder cables to the braking resistors if required increase the value for detecting a...

Page 1000: ...ve Motor temperature model 1 3 overtemperature Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The motor temperature model 1 3 identified that the alarm threshold was exceeded Hysteresis 2K Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal 200 Motor temperature model 1 I2t temperature too high 300 Motor temperature model 3 temperature too high See also r0034 p0351 p0605 p0611 p0612 p0613 Remedy check the motor load and if...

Page 1001: ...ce too low PTC R 20 Ohm KTY R 50 Ohm PT1000 R 603 Ohm Note If alarm A07015 is present the time in p0607 is started If the fault is still present after this time has expired then fault F07016 is output however at the earliest 50 ms after alarm A07015 See also p0607 Temperature sensor fault timer Remedy make sure that the sensor is connected correctly check the parameterization p0601 induction motor...

Page 1002: ...S dependent parameter 39 No index was set for an indexed parameter 41 A bit operation is only permissible for parameters with the parameter format DISPLAY_BIN 42 A value not equal to 0 or 1 was set for a BitOperation 43 Reading the parameter to be changed by the BitOperation was unsuccessful 51 Factory setting for DEVICE may only be executed on the DEVICE 61 The setting of a value was unsuccessful...

Page 1003: ...pe FloatingPoint In these cases when the minimum limit is violated then the parameter value is rounded up and when the maximum limited is violated the parameter value is rounded down Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Diagnostics parameter r9451 to display all parameters whose value had to be adapted See also p0100 p0505 p0595 Remedy Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct See ...

Page 1004: ...2 NONE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause the line contactor was not able to be closed within the time in p0861 the line contactor was not able to be opened within the time in p0861 the line contactor dropped out during operation the line contactor has closed although the drive converter is switched off Remedy check the setting of p0860 check the feedback circuit from the line contactor increase the mo...

Page 1005: ... actual number of starting attempts is displayed in r1214 increase the delay time in p1212 and or the monitoring time in p1213 either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power unit p0857 reduce the delay time to reset the start counter p1213 1 so that fewer faults are registered in the time interval A07321 Drive Automatic restart active Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The automatic...

Page 1006: ... not required Note A flying restart at speeds above 3000 rpm should be avoided A07352 Drive Limit switch signals not plausible Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause Limit switch signals are not plausible Possible causes BICO interconnections are not OK p3342 p3343 sensors are not supplying a valid signal both supply a 0 signal Remedy check the BICO interconnections for the limit switch signals chec...

Page 1007: ...6 p1240 p1280 Remedy If the controller is not to intervene increase the ramp down times switch off the Vdc_max controller p1240 0 for vector control p1280 0 for U f control If the ramp down times are not to be changed use a chopper or regenerative feedback unit A07401 N Drive DC link voltage maximum controller deactivated Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The Vdc_max controller can no longer ma...

Page 1008: ... was activated because the current limit was exceeded Remedy The alarm is automatically withdrawn after one of the following measures increase current limit p0640 reduce the load slow down the ramp up to the setpoint speed F07410 Drive Current controller output limited Reaction OFF2 NONE OFF1 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The condition I_act 0 and Uq_set_1 longer than 16 ms at its limit is present...

Page 1009: ... fault cause 1 Quick magnetizing p1401 6 for soft starting p1401 0 2 Quick magnetizing for flux build up control p1401 2 3 Quick magnetizing p1401 6 for Rs identification after restart p0621 2 Remedy For fault cause 1 Shut down soft start p1401 0 0 Shut down quick magnetizing p1401 6 0 For fault cause 2 switch on flux build up control p1401 2 1 Shut down quick magnetizing p1401 6 0 For fault cause...

Page 1010: ...or was stopped p1141 An internal setting command of the ramp function generator output caused the set setpoint speed to be frozen Remedy deactivate the holding command for the ramp function generator p1141 suppress the fault p2101 p2119 This is necessary if the ramp function generator is held using jogging and the speed setpoint is simultaneously inhibited r0898 6 F07436 A Free tec_ctrl 0 actual v...

Page 1011: ... check the scaling of the actual value signal check the signal source setting for the actual value p11264 See also p11264 p11267 p11268 A07444 PID autotuning is activated Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause Automatic setting of the PID controller parameters PID autotuning was activated p2350 See also p2350 Enable PID autotuning Remedy Not necessary This alarm is automatically withdrawn after the ...

Page 1012: ... f operation Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high U f operation Short circuit in the motor cable or ground fault U f operation Motor current does not match current of power unit Switch to rotating motor without flying restart function p1200 Note Limit current 2 x minimum p0640 4 x p0305 x p0306 2 x p0305 x p0306 Remedy check the current limits p0640 vector control Check the current co...

Page 1013: ...n be reduced so that the fault is no longer triggered F07807 Drive Short circuit ground fault detected Reaction OFF2 NONE Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A phase phase short circuit or ground fault was detected at the motor side output terminals of the converter Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 Short circuit phase UV 2 Short circuit phase UW 3 Short circuit phase VW 4 Ground fault with overcurr...

Page 1014: ... NONE Cause The condition for External alarm 1 is satisfied Note The External alarm 1 is initiated by a 1 0 edge via binector input p2112 See also p2112 External alarm 1 Remedy Eliminate the causes of this alarm A07851 F External alarm 2 Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The condition for External alarm 2 is satisfied Note The External alarm 2 is initiated by a 1 0 edge via binector input p2116...

Page 1015: ...dge fault A07891 Drive Load monitoring pump fan blocked Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan p2193 4 5 The monitoring function detects when the pump fan is blocked It is possible that the blocking torque threshold p2168 is set too low e g heavy duty starting See also p2165 p2168 p2181 p2193 Remedy check whether the pump fan is blocked and if bloc...

Page 1016: ...ding to the load p2165 p2168 F07895 Drive Load monitoring pump fan no load condition Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 OFF3 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The load monitoring is configured for a pump or fan p2193 4 5 The monitoring function detects when the pump fan is operating under no load conditions The pump is running in the dry state no medium to be pumped or the fan has a broken belt It is possible th...

Page 1017: ...m motor speed p0322 and the maximum speed p1082 of the setpoint channel F07902 N A Drive Motor stalled Reaction OFF2 IASC DCBRK NONE OFF1 OFF3 STOP2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The system has identified that the motor has stalled for a time longer than is set in p2178 Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 Reserved 2 Stall detection using r1408 12 p1745 or via r0084 r0083 See also p2178 Motor sta...

Page 1018: ...old of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal 11 No output current reduction 12 Output current reduction active See also p0604 p0610 Remedy check the motor load check the motor ambient temperature check KTY84 PT1000 check overtemperatures of the motor temperature model 2 p0626 p0628 See also p0612 p0617 p0618 p0619 p0625 p0626 p0627 p0628 A07920 Drive To...

Page 1019: ...responding to the load F07924 Drive Torque speed too high Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 OFF3 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause For p2193 1 The torque deviates from the torque speed envelope characteristic too high For p2193 2 The speed signal from the external encoder refer to p3230 deviates from the speed r2169 too high Remedy check the connection between the motor and load adapt the parameterization corre...

Page 1020: ...inector input p1230 with the DC braking set p1230 4 Braking current p1232 is injected until this binector input becomes inactive Remedy Not necessary The alarm automatically disappears once DC braking has been executed A07929 F Drive No motor detected Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The absolute current value is so small after enabling the inverter pulses that no motor is detected Note in the...

Page 1021: ...ge IMMEDIATELY Cause A fault has occurred during the Lq Ld measurement Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 10 Stage 1 The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low 12 Stage 1 The maximum current was exceeded 15 Second harmonic too low 16 Drive converter too small for the measuring technique 17 Abort due to pulse inhibit Remedy For fault value 10 Check whether the motor is corr...

Page 1022: ...r p0325 When selecting p1980 1 Increase the value for p0329 Check whether the motor is correctly connected Replace the power unit involved For fault value 11 Increase the value for p0329 Check whether the motor is correctly connected Replace the power unit involved For fault value 12 When selecting p1980 4 Reduce the value for p0325 When selecting p1980 1 Reduce the value for p0329 Check whether m...

Page 1023: ...esent establish missing enable signals See also r0002 r0046 F07983 Drive Rotating measurement saturation characteristic Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A fault has occurred while determining the saturation characteristic Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 The speed did not reach a steady state condition 2 The rotor flux did not reach a steady state condition 3 The adaptati...

Page 1024: ...routine can be disabled using p1959 1 See also p1959 F07984 Drive Speed controller optimization moment of inertia Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A fault has occurred while identifying the moment of inertia Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 The speed did not reach a steady state condition 2 The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active...

Page 1025: ... or 4 For fault value 10 check the moment of inertia p0341 p0342 After the change Calculate p0340 3 For fault value 11 reduce the moment of inertia of the motor p0341 e g factor of 0 2 or increase e g factor of 5 and repeat the measurement Note The moment of inertia identification routine can be disabled using p1959 2 See also p1959 F07985 Drive Speed controller optimization oscillation test React...

Page 1026: ...surement See also p1959 F07986 Drive Rotating measurement ramp function generator Reaction OFF1 NONE OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause During the rotating measurements problems with the ramp function generator occurred Fault value r0949 interpret decimal 1 The positive and negative directions are inhibited Remedy For fault value 1 Enable the direction p1110 or p1111 F07988 Drive Rotating measurem...

Page 1027: ...Percentage values are referred to the rated motor impedance Zn Vmot nom sqrt 3 Imot nom Remedy For fault value 1 40 check whether motor data have been correctly entered in p0300 p0304 p0311 is there an appropriate relationship between the motor power rating and that of the power unit The ratio of the power unit to the rated motor current should not be less than 0 5 and not be greater than 4 check ...

Page 1028: ...nit F08501 N A PROFINET Setpoint timeout Reaction OFF3 IASC DCBRK NONE OFF1 OFF2 STOP2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The reception of setpoints from PROFINET has been interrupted bus connection interrupted controller switched off controller set into the STOP state Remedy Restore the bus connection and set the controller to RUN if the error is repeated check the update time set in the bus configura...

Page 1029: ...or was detected when activating the configuration p8925 for the PROFINET interface The currently set configuration has not been activated Alarm value r2124 interpret decimal 0 general consistency error 1 error in the IP configuration IP address subnet mask or standard gateway 2 Error in the station names 3 DHCP was not able to be activated as a cyclic PROFINET connection already exists 4 a cyclic ...

Page 1030: ...ed 1 An invalid memory card is inserted not SIEMENS 2 An invalid memory card is inserted 3 The memory card is being used in another Control Unit 12 An invalid memory card is inserted OEM input incorrect p7769 13 The memory card is being used in another Control Unit OEM input incorrect p7759 See also p7765 KHP configuration Remedy For fault value 0 1 insert the correct memory card and carry out POW...

Page 1031: ...1 Power unit Overcurrent Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The power unit has detected an overcurrent condition closed loop control is incorrectly parameterized motor has a short circuit or fault to ground frame U f operation Up ramp set too low U f operation rated current of motor much greater than that of power unit High discharge and post charging current for line supply voltage inter...

Page 1032: ...mended in U f operation to relieve the DC link voltage controller with rapid ramp down times of the ramp function generator Activate the DC link voltage controller p1240 p1280 adapt the dynamic response of the DC link voltage controller p1243 p1247 p1283 p1287 check the line supply and DC link voltage set p0210 as low as possible also see A07401 p1294 0 check and correct the phase assignment at th...

Page 1033: ... integral time of the current limiting controller p1341 See also r0036 r0206 p0307 F30011 Power unit Line phase failure in main circuit Reaction OFF2 OFF1 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause At the power unit the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value Possible causes a line phase has failed the 3 line phases are inadmissibly asymmetrical the capacitance of the DC link capacitor ...

Page 1034: ... 6 Bit 8 Rectifier 1 Bit 9 Rectifier 2 Remedy Contact the manufacturer F30015 N A Power unit Phase failure motor cable Reaction OFF2 NONE OFF1 OFF3 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A phase failure in the motor feeder cable was detected The signal can also be output in the following cases the motor is correctly connected but the drive has stalled in U f control In this case a current of 0 A is possibl...

Page 1035: ...ck the motor load check the power cable connections check the power cables for short circuit or ground fault check the length of the power cables replace power unit F30021 Power unit Ground fault Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The power has detected a ground fault Possible causes ground fault in the power cables ground fault at the motor CT defective when the brake closes this causes ...

Page 1036: ...etween the heat sink and chip has exceeded the permissible limit value the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained insufficient cooling fan failure overload ambient temperature too high pulse frequency too high See also r0037 Remedy adapt the load duty cycle check whether the fan is running check the fan elements check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range check the mo...

Page 1037: ...s higher than the rated pulse frequency Notice This fault can only be acknowledged after the alarm threshold for alarm A05001 has been undershot See also r0037 F30027 Power unit Precharging DC link time monitoring Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Warnings faults and system messages 9 6 List of fault codes and alarm codes SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E4475...

Page 1038: ...dy for precharging 8 Precharging started DC link voltage less than the minimum switch on voltage 9 Precharging DC link voltage end of precharging still not detected 10 Wait for the end of the de bounce time of the main contactor after precharging has been completed 11 Precharging completed ready for pulse enable 12 Reserved xxxx Missing internal enable signals power unit inverted bit coded FFFF he...

Page 1039: ... permissible range Notice This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below A30031 Power unit Hardware current limiting in phase U Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause Hardware current limit for phase U responded The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period closed loop control is incorrectly parameterized fault in the motor or...

Page 1040: ... cables exceed the maximum permissible length motor load too high power unit defective Note Alarm A30031 is always output if for a Power Module the hardware current limiting of phase U V or W responds Remedy check the motor data and if required recalculate the control parameters p0340 3 As an alternative run a motor data identification p1910 1 p1960 1 check the motor circuit configuration star del...

Page 1041: ...he fan elements check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range Notice This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been fallen below F30037 Power unit Rectifier overtemperature Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause The temperature in the rectifier of the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit insufficient cooli...

Page 1042: ... Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause A short circuit at the motor holding brake terminals has been detected Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy check the motor holding brake for a short circuit check the connection and cable for the motor holding brake F30052 EEPROM data error Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause EEPROM data error of the power unit mo...

Page 1043: ...eaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause The voltage measurement is not supplying any plausible values Alarm value r2124 interpret bitwise binary Bit 1 Phase U Bit 2 Phase V Bit 3 Phase W Remedy Deactivate voltage measurement p0247 0 0 Deactivate flying restart with voltage measurement p0247 5 0 and deactivate fast flying restart p1780 11 0 F30068 Power unit undertemperature inverter heat sink Reaction...

Page 1044: ...t was inserted on a Power Module which has another code number 20B hex The Control Unit was inserted on a Power Module which although it has the same code number has a different serial number The Control Unit executes an automatic warm restart to accept the new calibration data Remedy For fault value 0 and 20A hex Insert the Control Unit on an appropriate Power Module and continue operation If req...

Page 1045: ...or current limitation closed loop control is incorrectly parameterized motor has a short circuit or fault to ground frame U f operation Up ramp set too low U f operation rated current of motor much greater than that of power unit power cables are not correctly connected power cables exceed the maximum permissible length power unit defective Fault value r0949 interpret bitwise binary Bit 0 Phase U ...

Page 1046: ...y for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support F30664 Error while booting Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause An error has occurred during booting Fault value r0949 interpret hexadecimal Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on upgrade firmware...

Page 1047: ... the setpoint telegram is identified by the end ID Such an end ID was not found Remedy carry out a POWER ON switch off switch on for all components upgrade firmware to later version contact Technical Support A30810 F Power unit Watchdog timer Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause When booting it was detected that the cause of the previous reset was an SAC watchdog timer overflow Remedy carry out a ...

Page 1048: ... OFF2 Acknowledge POWER ON Cause An internal software error has occurred Fault value r0949 interpret decimal Information about the fault source Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting Remedy if necessary upgrade the firmware in the power unit to a later version contact Technical Support A30999 F N Power unit Unknown alarm Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause An alarm occurred on the power unit t...

Page 1049: ...gure the station via the Edit Ethernet node screen form e g with STARTER commissioning software See also p8925 Activate PN interface configuration A50011 F Ethernet IP configuration error Reaction NONE Acknowledge NONE Cause An EtherNet IP controller attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram The telegram length set in the controller does not match the parameterizat...

Page 1050: ... Mpc no motor available Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause All motors are under service or locked manually Remedy Repair or unlock set p29542 0 motors F52966 Mpc motor quantity not matched Reaction OFF2 Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY Cause p29521 and digital output settings do not match Remedy Case 1 without I O extended module Change p29521 or digital output p0730 p0731 p0732 p0733 settings to ...

Page 1051: ...following persons to repair the converter Siemens customer service A repair center that has been authorized by Siemens Specialist personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating procedures contained in this manual Only use original spare parts when carrying out repairs CAUTION Burns due to touching hot surfaces Certain components e g the heat sink or line reactor can be...

Page 1052: ...st not differ too much Ratio of the rated powers of the motor and the converter 1 4 WARNING Unexpected machine motion caused by incorrect inappropriate converter settings Replacing converters of different types can result in incomplete or incorrect inappropriate converter settings As a consequence unexpected machine motion e g speed oscillation overspeed or incorrect direction of rotation Unexpect...

Page 1053: ...erter 7 Connect all of the cables to the converter NOTICE Damage from swapping the motor s connection lines The direction in which the motor rotates switches if you exchange the two phases of the motor line Connect the three phases of the motor lines in the right order After replacing the converter check the direction in which the motor rotates 8 Reconnect the line voltage to the converter 9 The c...

Page 1054: ...ator Panel onto the converter or connect the handheld device of the Operator Panel to the converter 8 Transfer the settings from the operator panel to the converter 9 Wait until the transfer is complete 10 After loading check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028 Alarm A01028 The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter Clear the alarm with p0971 1 and recommission the drive No a...

Page 1055: ... Install the new converter 5 Connect all of the cables to the converter 6 Switch on the line voltage again 7 Recommission the drive Converter replacement has been completed once it has been commissioned Corrective maintenance 10 1 Replacing the converter SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1053 ...

Page 1056: ...deration in special installation situations e g allow sufficient reserve regarding the cable length 10 2 2 Spare parts overview The look of the spare part can differ from the picture Spare parts Frame size Article number CU spare part kit consisting of 4 sets of labels 1 CU cover 1 ESD cover 2 U clamps 1 functional grounding clamp 2 STO connectors 1 RS485 connector and 1 set of I O connectors FSA ...

Page 1057: ...00 0SE01 0AA0 FSJ 6SL3200 0SE02 0AA0 10 2 3 Fan units The average service life of the fan is 40 000 hours In practice however the service life may deviate from this value Especially a dusty environment can block up the fan The defective fan must be replaced timely to ensure that the converter is ready for operation When must the fan unit be replaced A defective fan in operation results in an overt...

Page 1058: ...ply has been switched off it takes up to 5 minutes until the capacitors in the converter have discharged so that the residual charge is at a non hazardous level Therefore touching the converter immediately after powering off can result in electric shock due to residual charge in the power components Check the voltage at the converter connections before you replace the fan unit Corrective maintenan...

Page 1059: ...e replacing the fan unit 3 Use a screwdriver to remove the fan unit from the converter as shown below 4 Install the new fan unit in the inverse sequence as shown below By inserting the fan unit you have established the electrical connection between the converter and fan unit 5 For a push through mounted converter you must also mount the top push through mounting frame back You have replaced the fa...

Page 1060: ...rter as shown below Use a screwdriver if necessary 3 Install the new fan unit in the inverse sequence as shown below By inserting the fan unit you have established the electrical connection between the converter and fan unit You have replaced the fan unit Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter 1058 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 1061: ... position 2 to position 1 this is marked on the housing The connector is simultaneously released 4 Remove the fan unit from the converter 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to remove the other fan unit 6 Install the new fan units in the inverse sequence tightening torque for the captive fixing screws 1 8 Nm 15 9 lbf in You have replaced the fan unit Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G1...

Page 1062: ...e wrench for TX 25 screws Function description Removing the fan 1 Remove the screws TX 25 of the upper and lower terminal cover FSH 3 screws FSJ 4 screws 7 1P 7 7 2 Remove the terminal covers Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter 1060 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 1063: ...TX 25 of the front cover 1P 7 7 4 Remove the front cover 5 Remove the fan connector Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1061 ...

Page 1064: ...25 3 Plug the fan connector 4 Mount the front cover 5 Tighten 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover 6 Mount the terminal covers 7 Tighten the screws TX 25 of the upper and lower terminal cover The fan is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter 1062 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 1065: ...ench for the following screws TX 20 TX 25 Function description Removing the power supply board 1 Remove the screws TX 25 of the upper and lower terminal cover FSH 3 screws FSJ 4 screws 7 1P 7 7 2 Remove the terminal covers Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1063 ...

Page 1066: ...ve the connectors on the power supply board 6 Remove 5 screws TX 20 7 7 1P 7 7 7 7 Remove the power supply board The power supply board is removed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter 1064 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 1067: ... supply board 4 Mount the front cover 5 Tighten 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover 6 Mount the terminal covers 7 Tighten the screws TX 25 of the upper and lower terminal cover The power supply board is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1065 ...

Page 1068: ...or the following screws TX 20 TX 25 Function description Removing the FPI board 1 Remove the screws TX 25 of the upper and lower terminal cover FSH 3 screws FSJ 4 screws 7 1P 7 7 2 Remove the terminal covers Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter 1066 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 1069: ...Remove the front cover 5 Remove the connectors on the FPI board 6 Open the locking devices of the IPD 7 Remove the IPD Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1067 ...

Page 1070: ...e IPD 4 Close the locking devices of the IPD 5 Plug the connectors onto the FPI board 6 Mount the front cover 7 Tighten 2 screws TX 25 of the front cover 8 Mount the terminal covers 9 Tighten the screws TX 25 of the upper and lower terminal cover The FPI board is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter 1068 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E447...

Page 1071: ...wing screws TX 20 TX 25 TX 30 Function description Removing the current sensor 1 Remove screws TX 25 of the upper and lower terminal cover FSH 3 screws FSJ 4 screws 7 1P 7 7 2 Remove the terminal covers Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1069 ...

Page 1072: ...pen the front door 5 Remove the IP20 cover TX 25 1P 7 6 Remove the upper copper bar TX30 and TX 25 1P 1P 1P 7 7 7 7 7 7 Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter 1070 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 1073: ...t sensor is removed Installing the current sensor 1 Mount the current sensor 2 Plug the connector of the current sensor 3 Mount the lower copper bar TX 25 4 Mount the upper copper bar TX30 and TX25 5 Mount the IP20 cover Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1071 ...

Page 1074: ...over 8 Mount the terminal covers 9 Tighten the screws TX 25 of the upper and lower terminal cover The current sensor is installed Corrective maintenance 10 2 Replacing spare parts SINAMICS G120X converter 1072 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 1075: ...QFDUG YHUVLRQLQYHUWHU HV LUPZDUH GRZQJUDGH 7KH LQYHUWHU ORDGV WKH ILUPZDUH 7KH LQYHUWHU VLJQDOV DWD KDV EHHQ GRZQORDGHG IURP WKH PHPRU FDUG 1R 7KH LQYHUWHU LPSRUWV WKH GDWD EDFNXS IURP WKH PHPRU FDUG DWD EDFNXS DYDLODEOH RQ WKH PHPRU FDUG 1R HV 7KH LQYHUWHU VDYHV LWV GDWD ำ IDFWRU VHWWLQJ RQ WKH PHPRU FDUG User actions Converter response Figure 10 2 Overview of the firmware upgrade and firmware do...

Page 1076: ...r PC 3 Transfer the unzipped files into the root directory of the memory card Figure 10 3 Example of memory card contents after the file transfer Depending on the firmware the filenames and the number of files may differ from the display above The USER directory does not exist on unused memory cards After the memory card is plugged in for the first time the converter creates a new USER directory Y...

Page 1077: ...ly again 5 PLQ 5 The converter transfers the firmware from the memory card into its memory The transfer takes approximately 5 10 minutes While data is being transferred the LED RDY on the con verter stays red The LED BF flashes orange with a vari able frequency 6 At the end of the transfer the LED RDY and BF slowly flash red 0 5 Hz Power supply failure during transfer The converter firmware will b...

Page 1078: ...rom the memory card in step 9 9 Switch on the converter power supply again 5 10 If the firmware upgrade was successful after several seconds the converter LED RDY turns green If the memory card is still inserted depending on the previous content of the memory card one of the two following cases has occurred The memory card contains a data backup The converter has taken the settings from the memory...

Page 1079: ...witch on the converter power supply again 5 PLQ 5 The converter transfers the firmware from the memory card into its memory The transfer takes approximately 5 10 minutes While data is being transferred the LED RDY on the con verter stays red The LED BF flashes orange with a vari able frequency 6 At the end of the transfer the LED RDY and BF slowly flash red 0 5 Hz Power supply failure during trans...

Page 1080: ...s still inserted depending on the previous content of the memory card one of the two following cases has occurred The memory card contains a data backup The converter has taken the settings from the memory card There was no data backup on the memory card The converter has the factory setting 11 If the memory card did not contain a data backup of the converter settings then you must transfer your s...

Page 1081: ...he lit LED BF Function description You can check the following to correct an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade Have you correctly inserted the card Does the card contain the correct firmware Repeat the firmware upgrade or downgrade Corrective maintenance 10 3 Firmware upgrade and downgrade SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1079 ...

Page 1082: ...plement the hardware version in the converter data Replacing the motor with an identi cal pole pair number No change Replace the gearbox with an iden tical ratio Replacing safety related I O devi ces e g Emergency Stop switch No Only check the control of the safety functions affected by the components that have been replaced No change Converter firmware update No Supplement firmware version in the...

Page 1083: ...es 24 V max 250 mA 10 V max 10 mA Setpoint resolution 0 01 Hz Digital inputs 6 DI 0 DI 5 Electrically isolated Type 3 in accordance with EN 61131 2 Voltage for low state 5 V Voltage for high state 11 V Current for 24 V input voltage 4 mA Minimum current for the high state 2 5 mA Maximum input voltage 30 V PNP NPN switchable Compatible to SIMATIC outputs 10 ms response time for debounce time p0724 ...

Page 1084: ... V 13 ms 1 ms response time for debounce time p0724 0 Digital outputs 2 DO 0 DO 1 250 V AC 2 A 30 V DC 2 A for resistive inductive or capacitive load For FSA FSC the maximum current is 0 5 A to be UL compliant Type C relay Update time 2 ms Overvoltage category III Not for corner grounded network 380 480V AC or power supply network 600V AC without electrical isolation 1 Switching cycle 1 Hz Only on...

Page 1085: ...ory cards Recommended memory cards Page 940 1 Overvoltage category III is only supported on the G120X converter with FS version 02 02 FSA FSG 02 FSH FSJ or higher Note Short term voltage dips in the external 24 V supply 3 ms and 95 of the rated voltage When the mains voltage of the converter is switched off the converter responds to short term voltage dips in the external 24 V supply with fault F3...

Page 1086: ... current Permissible output current for a High Overload load cycle HO base load power Rated power based on the HO base load output current If not specified otherwise the power and current data in the technical data always refer to a load cycle according to Low Overload Load cycles and typical applications Low Overload load cycle The Low Overload load cycle assumes a uniform base load with low requ...

Page 1087: ...RDG 2 3HUPLVVLEOH RYHUORDG IRU LJK 2YHUORDG 2 DVH ORDG 2 DVH ORDG 2 Note that the rated ambient temperature for the above load cycles is 45 C Note Permissible converter overload for converter FSH FSJ When converter FSH FSJ is operated in low overload either 135 overload or 110 overload is permissible but not together Technical data 11 2 Load cycles and overload capability SINAMICS G120X converter ...

Page 1088: ...2 0 75 0 93 Line impedance uk 4 Inrush current 2 peak input current The converter can withstand 100 000 power cycles with an inverval of 120 s Overvoltage category According to IEC 61800 5 1 III for Power Module III for Control Unit Not for corner grounded network 380 480V AC or power supply network 600V AC without electrical isolation 1 Line harmonics The converter fulfils the requirements of IEC...

Page 1089: ...time the converter was decommissioned Degree of protection IP20 UL Open Type IP21 UL Open Type can be realized for converters FSA FSG with an IP21 top cover Maximum short circuit current SCCR or Icc When using fuses 100 kA rms You can find the data for further overcurrent protection devices on the Internet Branch protection and short circuit strength according to UL and IEC https support industry ...

Page 1090: ...ical sub stances Protected according to EN 60721 3 3 FSA FSG Class 3C2 Class 3C3 available for converters with PROFINET fieldbus only 3 FSH FSJ Class 3C2 Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800 5 1 Sound pressure level LPA 1 m 74 dB A 4 Cooling method Air forced cooling Cooling air Clean and dry air 1 Overvoltage category III is only supported on the G1...

Page 1091: ...5 40 18 5 25 38 35 38 34 0 72 0 73 16 6 18 3 30 40 57 49 60 52 22 30 47 41 45 40 0 83 0 84 16 6 18 3 37 50 70 61 75 65 30 40 62 54 60 52 1 10 1 11 18 8 19 5 FSE 45 60 86 74 90 77 37 50 78 69 75 65 1 33 1 34 17 6 18 3 55 75 104 91 110 96 45 60 94 80 90 77 1 73 1 71 26 7 28 7 FSF 75 100 140 120 145 124 55 75 117 102 110 96 1 97 2 00 61 67 5 90 125 172 151 178 156 75 100 154 132 145 124 2 57 2 61 61 ...

Page 1092: ... 80 0 80 16 6 18 3 37 40 40 40 42 42 30 30 36 6 36 6 35 35 0 97 0 98 18 8 19 5 FSE 45 50 50 50 52 52 37 40 44 4 44 4 42 42 1 11 1 12 17 6 18 3 55 60 59 59 62 62 45 50 54 4 54 4 52 52 1 35 1 36 26 7 28 7 FSF 75 75 78 78 80 80 55 60 66 4 66 4 62 62 1 41 1 41 61 68 90 100 97 97 100 100 75 75 85 2 85 2 80 80 1 80 1 82 61 68 110 125 121 121 125 125 90 100 106 3 106 3 100 100 2 22 2 25 66 5 71 132 150 1...

Page 1093: ...rload With out fil ter With fil ter With out fil ter With fil ter FSJ 500 540 591 520 546 450 450 461 501 444 482 8 13 236 560 600 602 665 580 610 500 500 494 543 476 523 8 83 236 630 700 675 737 650 679 560 500 552 602 532 580 9 94 246 For systems according to UL 500 V 600 V not applicable Technical data 11 4 Technical data dependent on the power SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06...

Page 1094: ...above sea level the following applies Connection to a TN line system with grounded neutral point is permissible TN systems with grounded line conductor are not permitted The TN line system with grounded neutral point can also be supplied using an isolation transformer The phase to phase voltage does not have to be reduced Note Using converters connected to TN line supplies with voltages 600 V for ...

Page 1095: ...LHQW WHPSHUDWXUH ഒ 2XWSXW FXUUHQW PELHQW WHPSHUDWXUH ഒ 6 6 3URILQHW 6 6 6 6 866 3URILEXV 3 Note that Operator Panel can restrict the maximum permissible operating ambient temperature of the converter Technical data 11 5 Derating data SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1093 ...

Page 1096: ...n of the converter can reduce the current or the pulse frequency above 415 V or 480 V respectively Figure 11 1 Current derating as a function of the input voltage for FSA FSG QSXW YROWDJH 9 2XSXW FXUUHQW 9ROWDJH UDQJH Figure 11 2 Current derating as a function of the input voltage for FSH FSJ Technical data 11 5 Derating data SINAMICS G120X converter 1094 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5...

Page 1097: ...derating as a function of the input voltage for FSA FSG QSXW YROWDJH 9 2XSXW FXUUHQW 9ROWDJH UDQJH Figure 11 4 Current derating as a function of the input voltage for FSH FSJ Technical data 11 5 Derating data SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1095 ...

Page 1098: ...5 38 2 31 5 27 22 5 20 2 18 30 60 60 51 42 36 30 27 24 37 75 75 63 7 52 5 45 37 5 33 7 30 FSE 45 90 90 76 5 63 54 45 40 5 36 55 110 110 93 5 77 66 55 49 5 44 FSF 75 145 145 123 2 101 5 87 72 5 65 2 58 90 178 178 151 124 6 107 89 80 1 71 2 110 205 143 5 103 82 132 250 175 125 100 FSG 160 302 211 4 151 121 200 370 259 185 148 250 477 334 239 191 FSH 315 585 468 1 355 655 524 1 400 735 588 1 FSJ 450 ...

Page 1099: ...3 1 The rated output currents in bold refer to the default pulse frequency at 45 C ambient temperature 1 In the factory setting the converter starts with a pulse frequency of 4 kHz and reduces automatically the pulse frequency to the associated required frequencies when loaded When the load decreases the pulse frequency is increased automatically up to 4 kHz The values of the rated current refer t...

Page 1100: ...n output frequency 0 Hz Only operate the converter in the permissible operating range RQWLQXRXV RSHUDWLRQ 6SRUDGLF VKRUW WLPH GXW 6KRUW WLPH GXW 2XWSXW IUHTXHQF 3HUPLVVLEOH RXWSXW FXUUHQW ื V ื V ื V Continuous operation green area in the figure Operating state that is permissible for the complete operating time Short time duty yellow area in the figure Operating state that is permissible for less...

Page 1101: ...ower loss in partial load operation in the Internet Partial load operation http support automation siemens com WW view en 94059311 Technical data 11 7 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1099 ...

Page 1102: ...rements for these environments First environment Residential buildings or locations at which the drive is directly connected to the public low voltage system without an intermediate transformer Second environment An environment that includes all other equipment which is not connected directly to a public low voltage line supply for residential buildings These are basically industrial areas that ha...

Page 1103: ...ce emissions are complied with The following requirements must be met for this purpose Operation on TN or TT line supply with star point grounded Permissible motor cable length Maximum permissible motor cable length Page 82 Shielded motor cable with low capacitance Pulse frequency factotory setting With line filter external or internal Converters with integrated C2 line filter or C3 line filter Un...

Page 1104: ...ine filter FSH FSJ converters with external C2 line filter and line reactor Note If devices without integrated C2 filters or filters other than those listed above are used the machine builder or plant engineer must certify that the emitted interference does not exceed the limit values of category C2 Separate line filters for each device or a shared line filter for several devices can be used 11 8 ...

Page 1105: ...Influence by ripple control signals Ripple control signals in public supply systems can affect the operation of the drive system in unfavorable cases and cause fault shutdowns e g undervoltage or phase failure This particularly applies to FSA C devices if they are operated in the factory set U f control mode If ripple control signals are exerting unwanted influence replace the U f control mode Sta...

Page 1106: ...eets the limits of IEC 61800 3 Category C1 with respect to conducted interference Conditions for compliance with the limits TN or TT system with a grounded neutral point Use of shielded motor cables Compliance with maximum motor cable length Maximum permissible motor cable length Page 82 Converter operation using the default pulse frequency or with reduced pulse frequency 11 8 3 4 Current harmonic...

Page 1107: ...ard to harmonic cur rents 75 A No limit values for current harmonics are defined for these devices in the IEC standards Notification of the network operator and a system eval uation according to IEC 61000 3 14 or 61800 3 Annex B 4 are recom mended The converters FSH and FSJ always require an upstream line reactor and an upstream line filter for operating on the public low voltage sys tem When oper...

Page 1108: ... to the compatibility level for voltage harmonics regardless of what percentage of the overall load is made up of the converter load Note The voltage distortions behavior in the frequency range of 2 kHz to 9 kHz IEC 61000 2 2 AMD 1 and from 9 kHz to 150 kHz IEC 61000 2 2 AMD 2 must be evaluated specifically for each system as a function of the impedance at the power supply connection point 11 8 3 ...

Page 1109: ... motor cable length Page 82 EMC compliant setup of the machine or plant Page 52 Technical data 11 8 Electromagnetic compability of the converter SINAMICS G120X converter Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC 1107 ...

Page 1110: ...uencies Line frequency 47 63 Hz Pulse frequency for example 4 8 16 kHz and multiples thereof assessed up to a maximum of 100 kHz 5 The routing of power cables has a significant impact on the electromagnetic fields that occur Install and operate the components inside metallic cabinets in compliance with the documentation and use shielded motor cables EMC compliant setup of the machine or plant Page...

Page 1111: ...ing instructions https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109483379 Operating the converter with the BOP 2 operator panel Operating instructions IOP 2 https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109752613 Operating the converter with the IOP 2 operator panel SINAMICS G120 Smart Access Operating Instructions https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109758122 Operating the conve...

Page 1112: ...rds and guidelines EMC compliant control cabinet design EMC overview https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 103704610 EMC Guidelines configuration manual EMC compliant control cabinet design potential equalization and cable routing EMC installation guideline http support automation siemens com WW view en 60612658 Appendix A 1 Manuals and technical support SINAMICS G120X converter 1110 Op...

Page 1113: ...ts you use The Knowledge Manager Intelligent Search helps you find the documents you need Users and specialists from around the world share their experience and knowledge in the Forum You can find your local representative for Automation Drives via our contact database under Contact Partner Information about local service repair spare parts and much more can be found under Services Appendix A 1 Ma...

Page 1114: ...Appendix A 1 Manuals and technical support SINAMICS G120X converter 1112 Operating Instructions 06 2019 FW V1 01 A5E44751209B AC ...

Page 1115: ...othed r0022 473 Actual stator resistance r0395 0 n 535 Actual torque smoothed r0031 475 Acyclic communication 220 Additional acceleration torque sensorless p1611 0 n 697 Additional technology controller 0 296 Air barrier 57 Alarm 373 959 964 Alarm buffer 373 964 Alarm code 964 r2122 0 63 771 Alarm counter p2111 768 Alarm history 965 Alarm number r2110 0 63 768 Alarm time 373 964 Alarm time receive...

Page 1116: ...1007 A07427 1008 A07428 N 1008 A07444 1009 A07530 1009 A07531 1009 A07805 N 1011 A07850 F 1012 A07851 F 1012 A07852 F 1012 A07891 1013 A07892 1013 A07893 1014 A07903 1015 A07910 N 1016 A07920 1016 A07921 1016 A07922 1017 A07926 1017 A07927 1018 A07929 F 1018 A07980 1021 A07981 1021 A07991 N 1025 A07994 F N 1026 A08511 F 1026 A08526 F 1027 A08564 1027 A08565 1027 A08800 1027 A30016 N 1032 A30030 10...

Page 1117: ... F07220 N A 1002 F07300 A 1002 F07311 1002 F07312 1002 F07320 1003 F07330 1003 F07331 1004 F07332 1004 F07390 1004 F07405 N A 1006 F07406 N A 1006 F07410 1006 F07411 1006 F07426 A 1007 F07435 N 1008 F07436 A 1008 F07437 A 1008 F07438 A 1009 F07445 1009 F07800 1010 F07801 1010 F07802 1010 F07806 1011 F07807 1011 F07810 1012 F07860 A 1012 F07861 A 1013 F07862 A 1013 F07894 1014 F07895 1014 F07896 10...

Page 1118: ...on motor control parameters p0340 0 n 524 Automatic mode 292 293 Automatic restart 425 Automatic restart delay time start attempts p1212 649 Automatic restart faults not active p1206 0 9 647 Automatic restart mode p1210 648 Automatic restart monitoring time p1213 0 1 650 Automatic restart start attempts p1211 649 B Bearing code number selection p0531 0 n 544 Bearing maximum speed p0532 0 n 544 Bea...

Page 1119: ...1 BI Enable operation inhibit operation p0852 0 n 591 592 BI Enable ramp function generator inhibit ramp function generator p1140 0 n 638 BI Enable setpoint inhibit setpoint p1142 0 n 639 640 BI ESM activation signal source p3880 843 BI ESM direction of rotation signal source p3883 844 BI External alarm 1 p2112 0 n 768 BI External alarm 2 p2116 0 n 769 BI External alarm 3 p2117 0 n 769 BI External...

Page 1120: ...OP manual mode p8558 877 BI Setpoint inversion p1113 0 n 631 632 BI Technology controller enable p2200 0 n 791 BI Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 p2220 0 n 795 BI Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 p2221 0 n 795 BI Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 p2222 0 n 795 BI Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 p2223 0 n 796 BI Technology control...

Page 1121: ...19 772 Change acknowledge mode mode p2127 0 19 772 Change fault response fault number p2100 0 19 764 Change fault response response p2101 0 19 764 Change message type message number p2118 0 19 770 Change message type type p2119 0 19 770 Change safety message type p3117 828 Characteristic Additional 379 Linear 379 388 parabolic 379 388 square law 379 388 Checklist PROFINET 146 CI Active speed setpo...

Page 1122: ...ative direction of rotation p1052 0 n 620 CI Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation p1051 0 n 620 CI Speed setpoint for messages signals p2151 0 n 779 CI Supplementary setp p1075 0 n 623 CI Supplementary setpoint scaling p1076 0 n 623 CI Technology controller actual value p2264 0 n 802 CI Technology controller Kp adaptation input value signal source p2310 809 CI Technology controller Kp ad...

Page 1123: ... Command Data Set CDS selected r0836 0 1 586 CO BO Command word r29659 0 1 932 CO BO Compound braking DC quantity control status word r3859 0 1 842 CO BO Control word 1 r0054 0 15 488 CO BO Control word faults alarms r2138 7 15 775 CO BO Control word sequence control r0898 0 10 596 CO BO Control word setpoint channel r1198 0 15 643 CO BO CU digital inputs status r0722 0 12 560 CO BO CU digital inp...

Page 1124: ...r0056 0 15 490 CO BO Status word application r29629 0 2 929 CO BO Supplementary control word r0055 0 15 488 489 CO BO Technology controller fixed value selection status word r2225 0 796 CO BO Technology controller status word r2349 0 13 814 CO BO Write protection know how protection status r7760 0 12 860 CO Absolute actual current smoothed r0027 474 CO Absolute current actual value r0068 0 1 492 C...

Page 1125: ...e 2 p2901 0 n 825 CO Fixed value M Nm p2930 0 n 825 CO Fixed values r2902 0 14 825 CO Flux actual value r0084 0 1 496 CO Flux setpoint p1570 0 n 691 692 r0083 496 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 actual value after limiter r11072 898 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 limit maximum p11091 899 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 limit minimum p11092 899 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 output signal r11094 900 CO Free tec_ctrl 0 setpoint after ramp function ...

Page 1126: ...p function generator setpoint at the input r1119 632 CO Ramp up scaling output r29576 923 CO Send binector connector converter status word r2089 0 4 759 CO Setpoint after the direction limiting r1114 632 CO Speed controller I torque output r1482 683 CO Speed controller P gain effective r1468 682 CO Speed controller setpoint sum r1170 642 CO Speed controller speed setpoint r1438 680 CO Speed contro...

Page 1127: ...ntroller output signal r2294 807 CO Technology controller setpoint after filter r2262 802 CO Technology controller setpoint after ramp function generator r2260 802 CO Technology controller system deviation r2273 805 CO Technology controller Tn adaptation output r2322 812 CO Technology controller Kp adaptation output r2316 811 CO Temperature sensor actual value r29705 933 CO Temperature sensor exci...

Page 1128: ...nputs smoothing time constant p0753 0 3 566 CU analog inputs type p0756 0 3 567 568 CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring delay time p0762 0 3 571 CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring response threshold p0761 0 3 570 CU analog outputs activate absolute value generation p0775 0 2 573 CU analog outputs characteristic value x1 p0777 0 2 574 CU analog outputs characteristic value x2 p0779 0 2...

Page 1129: ...k voltage 414 DC link voltage comparison delay time p2173 0 n 783 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold r0297 512 DC link voltage threshold value p2172 0 n 783 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold r0296 512 DC quantity controller configuration p3855 0 n 841 DC quantity controller integral time p3858 0 n 842 DC quantity controller P gain p3857 0 n 842 DC link overvoltage 414 Dead time compensatio...

Page 1130: ...ber of activations faults p3888 845 ESM setpoint source p3881 843 ESM setpoint source alternative p3882 844 Essential service mode 430 Ethernet IP ODVA speed scaling p8982 886 Ethernet IP ODVA STOP mode p8981 885 Ethernet IP ODVA torque scaling p8983 886 Ethernet IP profile p8980 885 Extending the telegram 219 External fault 3 switch on delay p3110 826 F Factory assignment 105 Factory settings Res...

Page 1131: ...t total r1624 698 Filter time constant Vdc correction p1806 0 n 713 Firmware Update 1080 Firmware check status r9926 891 Firmware downgrade 1077 Firmware file incorrect r9925 0 99 891 Fixed speed setpoint number actual r1197 642 Fixed speed setpoint select mode p1016 612 Flow control 350 Flow meter calculated flow r29633 930 Flow meter pump flow p29632 0 4 930 Flow meter pump power p29631 0 4 930 ...

Page 1132: ...ion p11026 894 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value inversion p11171 905 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value lower limit p11168 904 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value smoothing time constant p11165 904 Free tec_ctrl 1 actual value upper limit p11167 904 Free tec_ctrl 1 differentiation time constant p11174 905 Free tec_ctrl 1 integral time p11185 906 Free tec_ctrl 1 limit ramp up ramp down time p11193 906 Free tec_ctrl...

Page 1133: ..._max frequency controller integral time p1341 0 n 674 I_max frequency controller proportional gain p1340 0 n 674 I_max voltage controller integral time p1346 0 n 675 I_max voltage controller proportional gain p1345 0 n 675 i2t monitoring 408 I2t motor model thermal time constant p0611 0 n 549 Identification and Maintenance 1 p8806 0 53 878 Identification and Maintenance 2 p8807 0 15 879 Identifica...

Page 1134: ... buffering 428 Know how protection 940 953 KTY84 409 L LED BF 960 961 LNK 960 RDY 960 LED light emitting diode 959 Level control 350 Line contactor 297 Line contactor monitoring time p0861 594 Line dip 428 Linear characteristic 379 388 List of existing parameters 1 r0980 0 299 604 List of existing parameters 10 r0989 0 299 605 List of existing parameters 2 r0981 0 299 604 List of faults and alarms...

Page 1135: ...emory card serial number r7843 0 20 865 Memory card device memory firmware version r7844 0 2 865 Menu BOP 2 174 Operator panel 174 Minimum speed 158 338 343 p1080 0 n 624 Modular Safety System 135 Modulation depth smoothed r0028 475 Modulator configuration p1810 713 Modulator mode p1802 0 n 711 712 Monitoring configuration p2149 0 n 778 MOP motorized potentiometer 330 Mot_temp_mod 1 I2t fault thre...

Page 1136: ...l changeover delay time open closed loop control p1759 0 n 706 Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation p1755 0 n 705 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation p1756 705 Motor model configuration p1750 0 n 702 703 Motor model error signal stall detection r1746 701 Motor model error threshold stall detection p1745 0 n 701 Motor model feedback scaling p1784 0 n 709 Moto...

Page 1137: ...n 535 Motor stator resistance cold p0350 0 n 527 r0370 0 n 533 Motor temperature sensor 105 Motor temperature sensor type p0601 0 n 547 Motor torque constant p0316 0 n 519 Motor type selection p0300 0 n 512 513 Motor weight for the thermal motor model p0344 0 n 526 Motorized potentiometer 330 Motorized potentiometer configuration p1030 0 n 615 Motorized potentiometer maximum speed p1037 0 n 617 Mo...

Page 1138: ...668 Operating hours counter power unit fan p0251 0 n 508 Operating hours counter power unit fan inside the converter p0254 0 n 508 Operating instruction 23 Operating Instructions 1109 Operation 183 Operator panel BOP 2 174 Menu 174 Optimizing the closed loop speed controller 397 Optimum motor load angle p0327 0 n 521 Options for electrical cabinets p3931 849 Output frequency smoothed r0024 473 Out...

Page 1139: ...4 PolID circle center point p1998 0 n 731 PolID technique p1980 0 n 730 Power cable length maximum r0231 0 1 506 Power factor smoothed r0038 479 Power failure 425 Power limit motoring p1530 0 n 688 Power limit regenerative p1531 0 n 688 Power Module serial number r7841 0 15 864 Power unit alarm with I2t overload p0294 511 Power unit application p0205 502 Power unit code number p0201 0 n 500 Power ...

Page 1140: ...diagnostics channel r8858 0 39 880 PROFINET state r8854 880 Protection functions 180 PS file fault code parameter not transferred r9408 0 19 889 PS file parameter index parameter not transferred r9407 0 19 889 PS file parameter number parameter not transferred r9406 0 19 888 Pt100 409 Pt1000 409 PTC 409 Pulse cancellation 209 265 Pulse enable 209 265 Pulse frequency 407 408 Pulse frequency setpoin...

Page 1141: ... on 183 Real time clock 373 Reference current p2002 732 Reference power r2004 733 Reference speed reference frequency p2000 731 Reference temperature p2006 734 Reference torque p2003 733 Reference voltage p2001 732 Replace Control Unit 1080 Gear unit 1080 Hardware 1080 Motor 1080 Power Module 1080 Reset Parameter 173 Reset drive parameters p0970 602 Reset energy consumption display p0040 480 Rever...

Page 1142: ...7 p0522 0 19 543 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 8 p0523 0 19 543 Scaling specific parameters referred to p0514 9 p0524 0 19 543 Scaling specific reference values p0514 0 9 540 SD memory card 940 Formatting 940 Select debug monitor interface p2039 743 Selecting the system of units p0505 540 Sequence control 183 Sequence control configuration p0869 595 Series commissioning 949 Service...

Page 1143: ...d_ctrl_opt speed p1965 728 Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency determined r1970 0 1 730 Square law characteristic 379 388 Stall limit scaling p1553 0 n 690 Standards EN 61800 3 29 Star connection Y 98 Starting behavior Optimization 389 Starting behavior Optimization 382 Starting current 387 Starting current voltage boost permanent p1310 0 n 669 Starting current voltage boost when acc...

Page 1144: ...251 799 Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration p2230 0 n 796 Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value p2237 0 n 798 Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value p2238 0 n 798 Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp down time p2248 0 n 799 Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp up time p2247 0 n 799 Technology controller ...

Page 1145: ...resonance damping gain p1338 0 n 673 U f mode resonance damping maximum frequency p1349 0 n 676 Unit system 294 Units changeover adapted parameters r9451 0 29 890 Update Firmware 1080 Upgrading the firmware 1075 Upload 940 Download 946 USB functionality p8999 887 USB memory access p8991 887 Use for the intended purpose 24 User interfaces 99 USS universal serial interface 268 UTC Universal Time Coo...

Page 1146: ...r1286 665 Vdc_min controller time threshold p1255 0 n 658 Vdc_min controller time threshold U f p1295 0 n 666 Vector control 397 Sensorless 391 Voltage boost 377 382 387 389 Voltage boost total r1315 671 Voltage generation alternating base voltage amplitude r3926 0 n 847 Voltage input 197 Voltage limiting p1331 0 n 671 Voltage measurement configuring p0247 507 Voltage reserve dynamic p1574 0 n 692...

Page 1147: ......

Page 1148: ...t SINAMICS G120X Germany Further information PROFINET Safety Integrated SINAMICS converters www siemens com sinamics www siemens com safety integrated www siemens com profinet Siemens AG Digital Industries Motion Control Postfach 3180 91050 ERLANGEN ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for SINAMICS G120X

Reviews:

Related manuals for SINAMICS G120X

Brands by name

Popular brands

Siemens SINAMICS G120X, Operating Instructions Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for SINAMICS G120X

Reviews:

Related manuals for SINAMICS G120X

Brands by name

Popular brands